CAVITE STATE UNIVERSITY

Don Severino de las Alas Campus

Indang, Cavite
(046) 415-0021(046) 415-0012
www.cvsu.edu.ph

CASE STUDY:
A PROPOSED 150-BED TERTIARY
HOSPITAL WITH MEDICAL SCIENCES
SCHOOL COMPLEX

Submitted by:

Dylan Daphne R. Gumapac

Bachelor of Science in
Architecture

Submitted to:

Ar. Christian Oliver S. Agripa, UAP, RMP

Professor

In Partial Fulfilment of the

Requirements for the program Bachelor of Science in
Architecture

JANUARY 2024

0|Page
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

I.

PROJECT INTRODUCTION …………………………………………………………1

HISTORY OF HOSPITAL.........................................................................................................8
VITAL ROLES OF TERTIARY HOSPITALS..........................................................................11
HOW REFERRALS WORK WITH YOUR HEALTH INSURANCE:........................................15
TERTIARY CARE AND HOSPITALIZATION.....................................................................15
HEALTHCARE SYSTEM IN THE PHILIPPINES:.................................................................15
Shortage of Tertiary Hospitals:...........................................................................................16
Geographical Disparities:...................................................................................................16
Infrastructure and Funding Challenges:.............................................................................16
Educational and Training Facilities:....................................................................................17
IMPORTANCE OF TERTIARY HOSPITALS........................................................................17
Specialized Medical Care:..................................................................................................17
Medical Education and Research:......................................................................................17
Critical Care Services:........................................................................................................17
Referral Centers:................................................................................................................18
II. BACKGROUND OF THE SITE / PROBLEM.....................................................................20
III. COMPREHENSIVE LAND USE PLAN OF INDANG, CAVITE........................................23
A. PROFILE OF THE MUNICIPALITY (GENERAL INFORMATION).................................23
A.1. Brief History.......................................................................................................................23
A.2. Geographic Location and Features................................................................................24
A.3. Human Resources............................................................................................................25
A.4 Physical/Infrastructure Resources...................................................................................31
A.5 The Economic Structure....................................................................................................46
A.6 Existing Land Use..............................................................................................................48
A.7 Situational Analysis............................................................................................................49
A.8 Functional Role of the Municipality..................................................................................50
A.9 Local Administration..........................................................................................................51
IV. THE COMPREHENSIVE LAND USE PLAN OF INDANG (2011-2020)..........................53
B. PROFILE OF THE MUNICIPALITY (GENERAL INFORMATION).................................53
B.1 Introduction.........................................................................................................................53
B.2 Vision and Mission.............................................................................................................54
B.3 Rationale, Goals, Objectives, and Methodology............................................................55
B.4 General Development Concept........................................................................................56
 B.5 The Development Concept/Structure Plan.....................................................................67
B.6 Land use Policies and Principles.....................................................................................85
B.7 Priority Programs and Projects........................................................................................88
V. THE ZONING ORDINANCE (ZO) IN THE CAVITE.......................................................95
TITLE OF THE ORDINANCE..................................................................................................96
ARTICLE II AUTHORITY AND PURPOSE...........................................................................97
ARTICLE III DEFINITION OF TERMS...................................................................................98
ARTICLE IV ZONE CLASIFICATIONS................................................................................103
ARTICLE V ZONING MAPS..................................................................................................104
GENERAL RESIDENTIAL ZONE (GRZ).............................................................................105
GENERAL COMMERCIAL ZONE (GCZ)............................................................................111
ARTICLE VI ZONE REGULATIONS....................................................................................118
ARTICLE VII............................................................................................................................131
ARTICLE VIII INNOVATIVE TECHNIQUES.......................................................................135
ARTICLE IX MISCELLANEOUS PROVISONS..................................................................135
ARTICLE X MITIGATING DEVICES....................................................................................136
ARTICLE XI ADMINISTRATION AND ENFORCEMENT..................................................139
VI. THE SECTORAL STUDIES...........................................................................................150
VII. DEMOGRAPHY.............................................................................................................150
Population Size and Growth Rate....................................................................................150
Population Density............................................................................................................152
Population Distribution......................................................................................................153
Rural-Urban Household Population..................................................................................154
Projected Household Population by Age Group, and by Sex...........................................159
Projected Population Composition...................................................................................160
Dependency Ratio............................................................................................................162
Religion.............................................................................................................................162
Labor and Employment....................................................................................................163
Projected Labor Force......................................................................................................164
Physical environment.......................................................................................................166
Social sector studies.........................................................................................................171
Housing.............................................................................................................................172
Health Care Program........................................................................................................176
Local Industry...................................................................................................................178
VIII. INFRASTRUCTURE & UTILITIES SECTOR STUDIES..............................................178
Power................................................................................................................................181
Water................................................................................................................................182
 Communication and Computer Technology.....................................................................184
Infrastructure and Utilities support programs....................................................................185
Social Support Infrastructure program..............................................................................188
Public Administrative Support Infrastructure program......................................................190
IX. ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT SECTOR.............................................................191
Environmental Management and support programs........................................................194
Natural Resources Management program.......................................................................194
X. DISASTER RISK REDUCTION AND MANAGEMENT...................................................196
Local Disaster Risk Reduction and Management and support programs........................197
Post-disaster activities......................................................................................................199
Quick response program..................................................................................................199
Social - Institutional Intersectoral Issues..........................................................................202
Social - Infrastructure/Land Use Intersectoral Issues.......................................................205
Economic - Environmental Intersectoral Issues...............................................................206
Economic - Institutional Intersectoral Issues....................................................................207
Economic - Infrastructure/Land Use Intersectoral Issues.................................................209
Institutional - Infrastructure/Land Use Intersectoral Issues..............................................210
Environmental - Infrastructure/Land Use Intersectoral Issues..........................................211
Institutional - Environmental Intersectoral Issues.............................................................212
XI. REVIEW OF RELATED LITERATURE..........................................................................214
XII. CONCEPTUAL FRAMEWORK.....................................................................................236
XIII. STATEMENT OF THE PROBLEM...............................................................................238
XIV. SIGNIFICANCE OF THE STUDY:...............................................................................240
XV. SCOPE AND LIMITATIONS.........................................................................................247
XVI. TERMINILOGIES.........................................................................................................251
XVII. SAMPLES OF SIMILAR DEVELOPMENTS (LOCAL)..............................................278
University of the Philippines-Philippine General Hospital (UP-PGH):..............................278
St. Luke's Medical Center:................................................................................................279
De La Salle University Medical Center (DLSUMC):.........................................................280
The Medical City:..............................................................................................................281
Makati Medical Center:.....................................................................................................282
Philippine Heart Center:...................................................................................................283
Jose R. Reyes Memorial Medical Center:........................................................................284
Cardinal Santos Medical Center:......................................................................................285
University of Santo Tomas Hospital:................................................................................286
Chong Hua Hospital:........................................................................................................287
XVIII. SAMPLES OF SIMILAR DEVELOPMENTS (INTERNATIONAL).............................288
 Mayo Clinic:......................................................................................................................288
Johns Hopkins Hospital:...................................................................................................289
Cleveland Clinic:...............................................................................................................290
Charité – Universitätsmedizin Berlin:................................................................................291
Singapore General Hospital:............................................................................................292
King's College Hospital:....................................................................................................293
Karolinska University Hospital:.........................................................................................294
National University Hospital:.............................................................................................295
Massachusetts General Hospital:.....................................................................................296
Brigham and Women's Hospital:......................................................................................297
XIX. TECHNOLOGIES: ENERGY, EFFICIENCY, WASTE MANAGEMENT, AND CLEAN
ENERGY SOURCE..............................................................................................................299
ENERGY EFFICIENCY:...................................................................................................299
a. LED Lighting........................................................................................................................299
b. Energy-Efficient HVAC Systems......................................................................................299
c. Smart Building Management Systems.............................................................................299
d. Renewable Energy Integration..........................................................................................299
e. Energy-Efficient Medical Equipment................................................................................299
WASTE MANAGEMENT:.................................................................................................299
a. Waste Segregation.............................................................................................................299
b. Waste-to-Energy Technologies........................................................................................299
c. Recycling Programs...........................................................................................................300
d. Composting.........................................................................................................................300
CLEAN ENERGY SOURCES:..........................................................................................300
a. Solar Power.........................................................................................................................300
b. Wind Power.........................................................................................................................300
c. Geothermal Systems..........................................................................................................300
EDUCATION AND AWARENESS:...................................................................................300
MONITORING AND REPORTING:..................................................................................301
PERTINENT LAWS:
XX. BP 344 IMPLEMENTING RULES AND REGULATIONS (IRR) AMENDMENTS
MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS FOR ACCESSIBILITY..........................................................303
1. ACCESSIBLE RAMPS.................................................................................................303
2. SLIP RESISTANT MATERIALS...................................................................................308
3. HANDRAILS AND GRAB BARS..................................................................................309
4. PARKING......................................................................................................................312
5. SIGNAGES...................................................................................................................316
 Tactile Maps Character....................................................................................................321
Proportion.........................................................................................................................321
Raised and Brailled Characters and Pictorial Symbol Signs (Pictograms)......................321
Finish and Contrast...........................................................................................................322
Tactile Floor Surfaces............................................................................................................322
Stairs.................................................................................................................................324
OUTSIDE AND AROUND BUILDINGS...........................................................................326
Dropped Sidewalks.................................................................................................................326
Curb Ramps......................................................................................................................330
Sidewalks and Walkways.................................................................................................333
Open Spaces....................................................................................................................339
Crossings..........................................................................................................................339
Accessible Entrances........................................................................................................341
Doors................................................................................................................................343
Thresholds........................................................................................................................346
Switches............................................................................................................................346
Toilets and Baths..............................................................................................................349
Elevators...........................................................................................................................358
Telephones.......................................................................................................................361
Automated Teller Machines.............................................................................................362
Dressing Rooms and Cubicles.........................................................................................363
Counters...........................................................................................................................363
Workstations.....................................................................................................................364
Restaurants, Eateries, and other Dining Establishments.................................................364
Hotels, Appartelles, Dormitories, & Other Transient Lodging Facilities..............................365
SAFETY...............................................................................................................................367
Fencing for Roadworks and Footworks............................................................................367
Covers for Excavations.....................................................................................................367
Signages for Roadworks on the Carriageway...................................................................368
Location of Emergency Exits............................................................................................368
Areas of Refuge................................................................................................................369
Audio Visual Fire Alarm Systems.....................................................................................371
SPECIAL TYPES OF FACILITIES......................................................................................371
Auditoriums, Arenas, Theaters, and Other Assembly Areas...........................................371
GENERAL TERMINOLOGY................................................................................................373
DEFINITION OF TERMS.....................................................................................................373
XXI. REPUBLIC ACT NO. 9514: AN ACT ESTABLISHING A COMPREHENSIVE FIRE
CODE OF THE PHILIPPINES, REPEALING PRESIDENTIAL DECREE NO. 1185 AND
FOR OTHER PURPOSES...................................................................................................385
SECTION 1.......................................................................................................................385
SECTION 2.......................................................................................................................385
SECTION 3.......................................................................................................................385
SECTION 4.......................................................................................................................391
SECTION 5.......................................................................................................................391
SECTION 6.......................................................................................................................394
SECTION 7.......................................................................................................................394
SECTION 8.......................................................................................................................398
SECTION 9.......................................................................................................................399
SECTION 10.....................................................................................................................401
SECTION 11.....................................................................................................................401
SECTION 12.....................................................................................................................404
SECTION 13.....................................................................................................................405
SECTION 13-A. Assessment of Fire Code Taxes, Fees and Fines.................................406
SECTION 13-B. Collection and Assessment of Local Taxes, Fees and Fines..............406
SECTION 13-C. Use of Income Generated from the Enforcement of the Fire Code....406
SECTION 13-D. Monitoring the Implementation of the Fire Code and the Amount of the
Fees Collected........................................................................................................................407
SECTION 14.....................................................................................................................407
SECTION 15.....................................................................................................................407
SECTION 16.....................................................................................................................407
SECTION 17.....................................................................................................................407
XXII. CODE ON SANITATION.............................................................................................408
CHAPTER I.—GENERAL PROVISIONS.........................................................................408
CHAPTER II.—WATER SUPPLY....................................................................................411
CHAPTER III. FOOD ESTABLISHMENT........................................................................413
CHAPTER IV.—MARKETS AND ABATTOIRS...............................................................431
CHAPTER VI.—SCHOOL SANITATION AND HEALTH SERVICES.............................433
CHAPTER VII. INDUSTRIAL HYGIENE..........................................................................435
CHAPTER IX.—REST AREAS, BUS TERMINALS, BUS STOPS, AND SERVICE
STATIONS........................................................................................................................439
CHAPTER XVII.—SEWAGE COLLECTION AND DISPOSAL EXCRETA DISPOSAL
AND DRAINAGE..............................................................................................................441
CHAPTER XVIII.—REFUSE DISPOSAL.........................................................................446
CHAPTER XX.—POLLUTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT...............................................447
 CHAPTER XXI.—DISPOSAL OF DEAD PERSONS.......................................................448
CHAPTER XXII.—FINAL PROVISIONS..........................................................................458
XXIII. USER’S PROFILE....................................................................................................461
Households.......................................................................................................................461
Population by age group...................................................................................................462
Historical population.........................................................................................................463
Barangays in Indang Cavite.............................................................................................465
Users and their roles........................................................................................................466
Patients ( People in Indang ).................................................................................................466
Healthcare Providers..............................................................................................................466
Administrative Staff.................................................................................................................466
Hospital Management and Executives.................................................................................466
Support Staff............................................................................................................................466
Information Technology (IT) Staff.........................................................................................466
Medical Laboratory Technologists........................................................................................466
Pharmacists.............................................................................................................................466
Radiologic Technologists.......................................................................................................466
Physical Therapists.................................................................................................................467
Occupational Therapists........................................................................................................467
Patient Advocates...................................................................................................................467
Social Workers........................................................................................................................467
Quality Assurance and Compliance Officers.......................................................................467
Security Personnel..................................................................................................................467
Biomedical Engineers.............................................................................................................467
Hospital Chaplains..................................................................................................................467
Dietitians...................................................................................................................................467
Volunteers................................................................................................................................468
XXIV. DESIGN CRITERIA FOR THE COMPLEX AND MID RISE TOWER: GUIDELINES IN
THE PLANNING AND DESIGN OF A HOSPITAL AND OTHER HEALTH FACILITIES..470
P. D. 1096.........................................................................................................................470
P. D. 1185.........................................................................................................................470
P. D. 856...........................................................................................................................470
B. P. 344...........................................................................................................................470
R. A. 1378.........................................................................................................................470
R. A. 184...........................................................................................................................470
WHAT TO CONSIDER ON PLANNING A TERTIARY HOSPITAL..................................471
1 Environment.....................................................................................................................471
 2 Occupancy.......................................................................................................................471
3 Safety................................................................................................................................471
4 Security.............................................................................................................................472
5 Patient Movement...........................................................................................................472
6 Lighting.............................................................................................................................472
7 Ventilation.........................................................................................................................473
8 Auditory and Visual Privacy...........................................................................................473
9 Water Supply...................................................................................................................473
10 Waste Disposal............................................................................................................473
11 Sanitation.....................................................................................................................473
12 Housekeeping..............................................................................................................474
13 Maintenance................................................................................................................474
14 Material Specification..................................................................................................474
15 Segregation..................................................................................................................474
16 Fire Protection.............................................................................................................474
17 Signage.........................................................................................................................474
18 Parking..........................................................................................................................474
19 Zoning...........................................................................................................................475
20 Function........................................................................................................................476
21 Space............................................................................................................................477
XXV. CONSIDERATIONS IN DESIGNING A TERTIARY HOSPITAL................................480
Site Selection and Layout:.............................................................................................480
Functional Zoning:.........................................................................................................480
Hospital Facilities Design:.............................................................................................480
Medical School Facilities:..............................................................................................481
Mid-Rise Tower Design:.................................................................................................481
Energy Efficiency and Sustainability:..........................................................................481
Safety and Security:.......................................................................................................482
Technology Integration:.................................................................................................482
Sustainability and Resilience:.......................................................................................482
Compliance and Regulations:.......................................................................................482
XXVI. MANUAL ON TECHNICAL GUIDELINES FOR HOSPITAL PLANNING AND
DESIGN 250-BED HOSPITAL (LEVEL 3)..........................................................................484
Administrative Service Facilities..................................................................................484
Emergency Service Facilities........................................................................................512
Outpatient Service Facilities: Outpatient Clinics, Ambulatory Surgery Clinic,
Physical Rehabilitation Unit, Dialysis Unit...................................................................528
 Ancillary Service Facilities............................................................................................560
Nursing Service Facilities..............................................................................................600
Burn Unit Service Facilities...........................................................................................608
Operating Room & Icu Service Facilities.....................................................................612
Delivery Room & Nicu Service Facilities......................................................................637
Nutrition & Dietetics Service Facilities.........................................................................659
Engineering, Maintenance And Housekeeping Service Facilities.............................674
Support Service Facilities..............................................................................................689
XXVII. SITE CONSIDERATIONS........................................................................................717
XXVIII. SITE POTENTIALS.................................................................................................718
XXIX. SITE LIMITATIONS...................................................................................................720
XXX. SITE ANALYSIS.........................................................................................................722
XXXI. REFERENCES..........................................................................................................725
 PROJECT INTRODUCTION

Hospitals play a crucial role in communities by providing a wide range of

medical services, including diagnosis, treatment, and housing for people who are

sick or injured. They're also places where medical research and teaching often take

place. In addition to traditional inpatient care, hospitals nowadays offer outpatient

services, emergency care, psychiatric support, and rehabilitation. A hospital is a

public health organization. It is an organization that looks after the using advanced

tools and equipment to monitor people's health and illnesses by a team of individuals

with specific training.

Contrary to popular

belief, hospitals serve

more purposes than just

caring for the sick. It also

maintains and looks after

people's health and well-

being. It attempts to

maintain their health and prevent illness by implementing immunization, educational

program and by imparting knowledge on social and personal hygiene. Hospitals

represent pivotal bastions of healing, progress, and empathy in the fabric of human

society. They transcend mere physical structures, embodying the heartbeat of

humanity's pursuit of health and welfare. It serves a vital role in providing extensive

and diverse healthcare services. Equipped with advanced medical technology, they

facilitate the diagnosis and treatment of various illnesses.

1|Page
 A significant function of

hospitals lies in their assembly of

a diverse healthcare workforce

comprising doctors, nurses, and

interns. This collective expertise

ensures thorough check-ups for

patients and provides the

opportunity for multiple medical opinions, ensuring attentive care. Rooted in a

lineage stretching across centuries, hospitals have evolved from shelters for the

infirm and needy to multifaceted institutions offering a diverse spectrum of cutting-

edge medical care, research advancements, and community-focused support.

According to WHO (World Health Organization) hospitals are an integral part of a

social and health organization with the function of providing complete services,

healing diseases (curative) and prevention of diseases (preventive) to the

community. It is also a training center for health workers and a medical research

center.

Healthcare systems comprise diverse actors performing distinct but

interconnected tasks. Hospitals, especially research or academic ones, emerge as

pivotal nodes in healthcare networks due to their multifaceted roles at key system

intersections. They act as brokers among different knowledge domains, bridges

between various learning modes, and connectors across stages in the innovation

process. The presence of numerous healthcare professionals under one roof

eliminates the need to visit multiple clinics for specialized care, streamlining the

healthcare process and saving time and effort. Moreover, hospitals serve as a

significant source of employment, encompassing roles beyond medical staff,

2|Page
including maintenance crews and equipment handlers. Additionally, hospitals often

cater to underprivileged communities by offering affordable healthcare options and

actively participate in raising awareness through prevention and vaccination

campaigns. Furthermore, hospitals specialize in delivering targeted treatments for

specific illnesses, contributing to their importance in healthcare provision’s, and

efficiency in delivering healthcare services.

Hospitals are often categorized based on their size and the range of services

they offer, dividing them into small, medium, and large facilities. Small hospitals,

typically run by private practitioners or government primary health centers (PHCS),

fall into the category of primary care hospitals. These smaller establishments might

have one or two general wards, with limited diagnostic facilities like labs or imaging

services. Often, they refer patients to external agencies for such services and may

not operate during nighttime.

Medium-sized hospitals are usually found in smaller towns or taluk

headquarters. They employ around 5 to 10 doctors, including specialists, and

provide some diagnostic facilities in-house. These secondary care hospitals, with a

capacity of up to 100 beds across essential wards like medical, surgical, pediatric,

and maternity, operate round the clock. They receive moderately complicated cases

referred from primary care hospitals for treatment.

Large hospitals, such as district headquarters hospitals, teaching medical

college hospitals, and major private or corporate hospitals, fall under the category of

tertiary or referral hospitals. These highly specialized facilities boast a bed capacity

ranging from 100 to 1000 beds. They offer comprehensive services, including

advanced diagnostics and treatment options. Employing more than 50 doctors and

3|Page
approximately 300 paramedical professionals working in shifts throughout the day,

they are equipped to handle complex cases referred from primary and secondary

care hospitals for further specialized treatment. Typically, hospitals are broadly

categorized into private and government-operated establishments. Private hospitals

are managed by individuals, groups of physicians, or organizations, whereas

government hospitals are administered by the government.

Additionally, there exist semi-government hospitals, jointly operated by private

entities and the government. General hospitals encompass a wide range of

healthcare services but may have limitations in capacity. They cater to patients of

varying ages and genders, treating a broad spectrum of diseases and conditions. In

contrast, specialized hospitals focus exclusively on specific health areas such as

oncology, maternity care, and more, narrowing their services to particular medical

disciplin es.

The evolution of hospitals in the contemporary era heavily relies on

technological innovation. Advancements, from state-of-the-art imaging techniques to

precision-guided robotic procedures, demonstrate hospitals' embrace of

transformative technology. Artificial intelligence, telemedicine, and personalized

treatment plans have revolutionized healthcare delivery, enabling hospitals to offer

precise diagnoses, tailored therapies, and patient-centric care beyond their physical

boundaries, hospitals play a pivotal role in promoting community health. They drive

public health initiatives, advocate for health literacy, and actively engage in

preventative healthcare programs that extend beyond individual patients,

significantly impacting the overall well-being of society. Numerous studies explore

health-related innovations, encompassing biotechnology advancements and

enhancements in healthcare services.

4|Page
 While hospitals are acknowledged as pivotal in innovation, they're typically

treated indirectly in research, viewed as contexts, partners, or users in industrial and

scientific commercialization studies. One of the example is modern hospital, it have

undergone a remarkable metamorphosis, expanding well beyond their initial scope.

They now serve as pivotal hubs of medical excellence, catering to a wide spectrum

of services ranging from inpatient care to outpatient clinics, emergency medicine,

surgical interventions, psychiatric support, rehabilitation, and palliative care.

Particularly, another example is the university hospitals, they are integral in

health innovation systems, characterized by extensive division of labor and

collaborative approaches in applying practical knowledge. Hospitals undertake

diverse functions: providing healthcare, adopting and utilizing new technologies,

potentially developing organizational innovations, contributing to educational

systems, conducting clinical experiments, and conducting extensive research. The

role of individual doctors as innovators is well-documented in medical technology

history, yet it must be contextualized within an intricate institutional environment and

long-term epistemic and cultural shifts. They want to evaluate hospitals' role in

generating medical innovations, defined broadly as the introduction of new drugs,

devices, and clinical practices in healthcare provision. With the emergence of more

open innovation models, focusing on hospitals' contributions in upstream innovation

activities as leading organizations or partners becomes crucial.

Special attention is placed on literature discussing universities, research

hospitals, and academic medical centers' growing significance in modern health

innovation systems. Hospitals' roles in consuming and implementing innovations,

both technical and clinical, have been extensively covered in health management,

5|Page
economics, and policy fields. However, the organizational capacity of hospitals in

generating medical innovations has received less attention.

In some places, there are "bedless hospitals" that focus mainly on outpatient

care and day surgeries. Patients come in for short appointments or treatments and

are discharged on the same day for follow-up care with their primary health

providers. While hospitals exist in most countries, developing nations often lack

enough hospitals, equipment, and trained staff to meet the healthcare needs of their

populations. As a result, people in these regions might not have access to modern

medicine, public health measures, or hospital care, leading to lower life

expectancies.in developed countries, hospitals are more advanced and complex,

especially with the rapid progress of medical technology. This progress has

expanded diagnostic capabilities and treatment options, demanding a highly trained

and specialized staff. The development of new treatments and medical equipment

requires specific training and facilities, making hospitals costlier to operate. Health

service managers in these areas focus on issues like quality, cost, effective.

The primary objective of hospitals is to provide comprehensive healthcare

services ensuring both care and treatment. Some hospitals also function as training

centers, providing education and training for aspiring physicians and healthcare

professionals. Research activities are undertaken by many hospitals, contributing to

advancements in medical knowledge and treatments. Essential services offered by

hospitals encompass emergency and casualty care, outpatient department (OPD)

services, inpatient department (IPD) services, and operation theaters where surgical

procedures are conducted.Hospitals contribute to new idea generation through

experiential learning in clinical practice and research, collaborating with universities

and firms to identify problems and potential solutions. They may spin out ideas to

6|Page
form new companies or license them to existing firms. Internally, hospitals initiate

certain product development activities, collaborating with established firms to test

and document the effectiveness, safety, and efficiency of new products.

Overall, hospitals play crucial roles in the innovation ecosystem, from idea

generation to product development and service innovation, influencing technology

selection and shaping opportunities for technological learning.

However, the emphasis of this study is the tertiary hospital, also known as

a referral hospital or tertiary care center. This type of hospital is a specialist medical

facility that provides a wide range of advanced healthcare services. These hospitals

go beyond the services provided by primary and secondary care facilities, focusing

on complex and specialized medical care. Tertiary hospitals offer a comprehensive

array of specialized medical services, advanced diagnostic procedures, and

treatment options. These may include highly specialized surgeries, organ

transplants, advanced imaging, intensive care units (ICUs), and specialized

treatments for various diseases. Equipped with cutting-edge medical technology and

a multidisciplinary team of specialized healthcare professionals, these hospitals

provide highly advanced care. They often have a larger team of specialized doctors,

surgeons, nurses, and support staff. It act as referral centers for patients requiring

specialized care. Patients are usually referred from primary and secondary care

facilities to tertiary hospitals for complex medical conditions, specialized surgeries, or

treatments that require highly skilled expertise or advanced technology. Tertiary

hospitals often serve as teaching institutions, closely associated with medical

schools or universities. They play a crucial role in medical education, training future

healthcare professionals, and conducting advanced medical research. These

hospitals cater to a wide range of medical specialties, providing integrated and

7|Page
comprehensive healthcare services. They are at the forefront of healthcare, offering

specialized and advanced treatments, contributing significantly to medical education

and research, and serving as critical referral centers for complex health issues.

HISTORY OF HOSPITAL

The hospital's historical trajectory traces back to ancient Mesopotamia and

extends to the conclusion of the Middle Ages. There are references to established

healthcare facilities in India dating back to the 5th century BC, while the expansion of

Buddhism into regions like Sri Lanka, China, and Southeast Asia potentially led to

nursing facilities, although their specifics remain unknown. The Graeco-Roman era is

notable, as while Greece birthed rational medicine in the 4th century BC, medical

practitioners of that time made house-calls, and temples dedicated to Asclepius were

primarily sought for sleep incubation and magico-religious remedies. In Roman

society, hospitals catering to the military and slaves were present since the 1st

century AD, but these were designed for specific groups rather than the general

public and thus didn't foreshadow the modern hospital's concept. The origins of

hospitals can be traced to ancient civilizations, where temples and monasteries

served as sanctuaries offering

rudimentary care and solace to the

unwell. This marked the genesis of a

transformative journey that mirrored

the advancement of human

civilization. During the middle ages,

religious orders pioneered care,

8|Page
nurturing the afflicted. Over time, formal institutions dedicated exclusively to medical

care emerged, signaling a shift from benevolent shelters to specialized centers

devoted to healing.

Traditionally, hospitals have been recognized for their role in providing care to

the ill and injured. However, these institutions serve multiple functions beyond

patient care, including facilitating health-related research and acting as educational

hubs for students pursuing various healthcare disciplines. For instance, student

nurses undergo training across different hospitals to translate classroom knowledge

into practical skills, ensuring safe practice upon graduation.

The origins of the modern hospital are often attributed to Christians. Initially

established as hospices to accommodate pilgrims and messengers between

bishops, these institutions evolved under Christian influence into hospitals

resembling the modern concept. Rome saw its first hospital constructed in the 4th

century AD by a wealthy penitent widow named Fabiola. During the early Middle

Ages (6th to 10th century), Benedictine Orders made infirmaries a standard feature

of monasteries. Later in the Middle Ages (post-10th century), monastic infirmaries

expanded, accompanied by the establishment of public hospitals funded by city

authorities, the church, and private benefactors. This period also saw the inception of

specialized institutions like leper houses. Notably, during the Golden Age of Islam,

the Muslim world boasted significantly advanced healthcare systems, exemplified by

magnificent hospitals across various countries.

The history of hospital research is vast and crucial. It spans centuries,

evolving from early medical practices to modern scientific advancements. It began in

ancient civilizations like Egypt and Greece, where temples served as healing

9|Page
centers. Over time, institutions emerged, such as the Middle Ages monasteries that

cared for the sick. The Renaissance period saw a surge in anatomical studies, laying

the groundwork for understanding human biology. The 19th century brought

significant changes. Florence Nightingale's work revolutionized nursing, emphasizing

sanitation and statistics. This period also witnessed the rise of medical schools and

hospitals dedicated to research, like Johns Hopkins Hospital. The 20th century

marked remarkable progress with breakthroughs in vaccines, antibiotics, and

surgical techniques. Institutions like the Mayo Clinic and the National Institutes of

Health (NIH) played pivotal roles in medical research. Today, hospital research

spans various fields, from genetics and pharmaceuticals to innovative treatments

and cutting-edge technology, all contributing to improving healthcare worldwide.

. Moreover, hospitals have evolved beyond their traditional role; they are

vibrant hubs fostering scientific inquiry, cultivating future healthcare professionals,

and driving groundbreaking research that pushes the boundaries of medicine.

Despite their remarkable contributions, hospitals grapple with myriad challenges.

Disparities in healthcare accessibility persist, particularly in regions with limited

resources, impeding the equitable delivery of care. Additionally, the rapid stride of

medical progress poses a challenge as hospitals strive to integrate cutting-edge

technology while ensuring that healthcare services remain accessible and affordable.

Financial constraints, workforce shortages, and the evolving needs of patients

underscore the intricate landscape hospitals navigate daily.

10 | P a g e
VITAL ROLES OF TERTIARY HOSPITALS:

Tertiary hospitals play vital roles within the healthcare system due to their

advanced medical functions:

1. Specialized Healthcare Services: These hospitals provide a broad range of

specialized medical services, including complex surgeries, advanced disease

treatments, organ transplants, specialized diagnostics, and intensive care for critical

patients.

2. Referral and Complex Care: Serving as referral hubs, tertiary hospitals

handle cases that demand specialized expertise or advanced technology, often

referred from primary or secondary care facilities.

3. Education and Training: Affiliated with medical schools or universities,

tertiary hospitals offer crucial hands-on training for medical students, residents, and

fellows, exposing them to various specialties and complex medical scenarios.

4. Research and Advancements: Tertiary hospitals actively engage in cutting-

edge medical research, contributing to the development of new treatments,

procedures, medications, and technologies, fostering innovation and clinical trials.

5. Holistic Patient Care: They ensure comprehensive care by assembling

multidisciplinary teams comprising specialists, nurses, therapists, and support staff,

catering to patients with severe or complex conditions.

6. Community Health Initiatives: Tertiary hospitals often initiate community

health programs, public health campaigns, and educational efforts to enhance

community health awareness and preventive measures.

11 | P a g e
 7. Emergency and Critical Care: Equipped with well-established emergency

departments and critical care units, these hospitals manage emergencies, trauma

cases, and provide intensive care for critically ill patients.

In essence, tertiary hospitals function as advanced healthcare centers,

delivering specialized services, facilitating research and education, addressing

complex healthcare needs, and contributing significantly to medical progress without

replicating the same ideas from the original text.

In medicine, levels of care refer to the complexity of the medical cases

doctors treat and the skills and specialties of the providers. Levels are divided into

four categories. Primary care is when you consult with your primary care provider.

Secondary care is when you see a specialist such as an oncologist or

endocrinologist. Tertiary care refers to specialized care in a hospital setting such as

dialysis or heart surgery. Quaternary care is an advanced level of specialized care.

As a patient, you might sometimes hear these terms. So, knowing their

definitions can help you better understand what your doctor is talking about and help

you recognize the level of care you're receiving.

 PRIMARY CARE: ESSENTIALS

Most people are very familiar with primary care. This office is your first stop for

most of your symptoms and medical concerns. You might seek primary care for the

following:

12 | P a g e
 - Illness: You may see your primary care doctor when you notice a new

symptom or when you come down with a cold, the flu, or some other

infection.

- Injury: You may also seek primary care for a broken bone, a sore muscle,

a skin rash, or any other acute medical problem.

- Referral: Also, primary care is typically responsible for coordinating your

care among specialists and other levels of care.

In addition, you'll probably see a primary care provider (PCP) for regular

screenings, general checkups, and wellness visits.

PRIMARY CARE PROVIDERS MAY BE:

 Doctors

 Nurse practitioners

 Physician assistants

There are some primary care specialties as well. For instance, OB-GYNs,

geriatricians, and pediatricians are all primary care doctors. But they also happen to

specialize in caring for a particular group of people. Most health insurance policies

require you to designate a primary care provider. In most cases, you can choose a

family practice physician, internist, OB-GYN, geriatrician, or pediatrician for this role.

 SECONDARY CARE: SPECIALISTS

Secondary care is when your primary care provider refers you to a specialist.

Secondary care means your doctor has transferred your care to someone who has

more specific expertise in whatever health issue you are experiencing. Specialists

13 | P a g e
focus either on a specific system of the body or a particular disease or condition.

Examples of specialists include:

 Cardiologists focus on the heart and blood vessels.

 Endocrinologists focus on hormone systems, including diseases like

diabetes and thyroid disease.

 Oncologists specialize in treating cancers, and many focus on a

specific type of cancer.

Sometimes problems arise in secondary care. These may include:

Wrong specialist: Sometimes, doctors refer people to the wrong kind of

specialist. That can happen because symptoms often overlap between a variety of

health conditions. So, your symptoms may suggest one problem when, in reality, it is

another condition that requires a different specialist.

Lack of coordination of care: You may also experience problems if you're

seeing more than one specialist and each is treating a different condition.

Sometimes in these cases, doctors might not fully coordinate your care. Ideally,

specialists should work with your primary care health team to ensure everyone

knows what the others are recommending.

14 | P a g e
HOW REFERRALS WORK WITH YOUR HEALTH INSURANCE:

 TERTIARY CARE AND HOSPITALIZATION

If you are hospitalized and require a higher level of specialty care, your doctor

may refer you to tertiary care. Tertiary care requires highly specialized equipment

and expertise. At this level, you will find procedures such as:

 Coronary Artery Bypass Surgery

 Dialysis

 Plastic Surgeries

 Neurosurgeries

 Severe Burn Treatments

 Complex Treatments or Procedures

A small, local hospital may not be able to provide these services. So, if you

require more advanced care, they may need to transfer you to a medical center that

provides highly specialized tertiary level services.

Studies have shown that when you are in tertiary care for certain chronic

conditions such as diabetes and chronic kidney disease, your PCP must remain

involved. That's because your PCP can help you establish and maintain a

management plan for the long term.

HEALTHCARE SYSTEM IN THE PHILIPPINES:

The Philippines has a mixed healthcare system with both public and private

sectors. The government is responsible for providing healthcare services through

15 | P a g e
public hospitals and health centers, while the private sector plays a significant role in

healthcare delivery as well.

Shortage of Tertiary Hospitals:

Population Growth: The Philippines has a rapidly growing population, which

puts pressure on the healthcare system. The increasing population may lead to a

higher demand for healthcare services, including specialized and advanced medical

care provided by tertiary hospitals.

Geographical Disparities:

There is often an uneven distribution of healthcare facilities across different

regions in the Philippines. Some areas, especially rural or remote areas, may lack

access to tertiary hospitals, making it challenging for residents to receive specialized

medical care without traveling long distances.

Infrastructure and Funding Challenges:

Tertiary hospitals require advanced infrastructure, equipment, and skilled

healthcare professionals. Limited funding and resources may hinder the

establishment and maintenance of such hospitals, leading to a shortage of tertiary

care facilities.

16 | P a g e
Educational and Training Facilities:

The training of healthcare professionals, especially those specialized in

tertiary care, requires appropriate educational institutions and training facilities. A

lack of such facilities can contribute to a shortage of skilled professionals.

Importance of Tertiary Hospitals:

Specialized Medical Care:

Tertiary hospitals are crucial for providing specialized medical services,

including advanced diagnostics, surgeries, and treatments for complex medical

conditions. These hospitals often house specialized departments such as cardiology,

oncology, neurology, and more.

Medical Education and Research:

Tertiary hospitals often serve as teaching hospitals affiliated with medical

schools. They provide a crucial environment for medical education, training, and

research. Medical students, residents, and fellows gain hands-on experience and

contribute to the advancement of medical knowledge.

Critical Care Services:

Tertiary hospitals are equipped to handle critical and emergency cases. They

have intensive care units (ICUs), trauma centers, and other facilities to address life-

threatening conditions.

17 | P a g e
Referral Centers:

Tertiary hospitals act as referral centers for patients with complex or severe

health conditions. Patients from primary and secondary healthcare facilities are often

referred to tertiary hospitals for specialized diagnosis and treatment.

In summary, the shortage of tertiary hospitals in the Philippines may be

influenced by factors such as population growth, geographical disparities,

infrastructure challenges, and funding limitations. Tertiary hospitals play a crucial

role in providing specialized medical care, medical education, research, and serving

as referral centers for complex health conditions. Addressing the shortage and

improving access to tertiary care is essential for the overall well-being of the

population.

18 | P a g e
19 | P a g e
BACKGROUND OF THE SITE / PROBLEM

Indang is a landlocked municipality with an area of 8,920 hectares

(22,000 acres). It is centrally located in the province of Cavite. It is bounded on the

north by the municipality of Naic and the city of Trece Martires, on the south by the

municipality of Mendez and the city of Tagaytay, on the west by the municipalities

of Alfonso and Maragondon, and on the east by the municipality of Amadeo and the

city of General Trias. It’s topography characterized by gently sloping or rolling terrain.

Almost 40.36% of its total land area is within the slope grade of 3-8%, while 2,135

hectares is within the slope range of 8-15% which is characterized by undulating or

sloping terrain.

The land elevation ranges from 230

to 380 meters (750 to 1,250 ft) above sea

level. The land area is furthermore fairy well

dissected by numerous creeks and streams

that are deeply cut, characterized by steep

and abrupt banks. Rivers, creeks and spring

supply the water needed for both

agricultural and households’ purposes. These rivers and creeks also serves as

natural drainage into which storm water is discharged and flow in northern direction

to discharged into either Manila Bay or Laguna de Bay.

Indang has a tropical climate with two pronounced seasons: wet season and

dry season. Wet season covers the period from May to December of each year and

20 | P a g e
dry season covers the period from January to April. Due to the rolling landscape of

the town, the southern villages near the Mendez and Alfonso borders, due to high

elevations and the nearness to Tagaytay, experience cooler temperatures as

compared to those in the north, especially from November to February.

The economy of Indang largely depends on agriculture. It is a first-class

municipality. The 80.45% or 7,176.38 hectares are primarily devoted to agriculture.

They are predominantly planted with various types of crops like coconut, banana,

coffee, fruit trees, and pineapple, while there are small portions of rice, root crops,

vegetables, and corn. Most farmers are engaged in multi-cropping farming system.

The largest number of employment is farming and trading of agricultural products.

Livestock and poultry raisers occupied an area of about 22.76 hectares or 0.32% of

the total agricultural area.

Indang has a public market, located in Poblacion 4, where goods such as

vegetables, seafood, meat, and household items are sold. On the trade and industry,

existing commercial and agribusiness establishments play a relatively major role in

the predominantly agri-based economy of Indang. Municipal record on this

establishment shows the wholesale and retail trade stores are clustered within the

poblacion or urban area while in the rural, the trading establishments are dominated

by sari-sari stores.

Agro-business commercial farms raise large volumes of livestock and poultry.

As per record of the municipal agricultural office, there are existing hog farms, broiler

farms, layer and breeder farms.

21 | P a g e
22 | P a g e
COMPREHENSIVE LAND USE PLAN OF INDANG, CAVITE

A. PROFILE OF THE MUNICIPALITY (GENERAL INFORMATION)

A.1. Brief History

Indang derived its name from the words, inrang or “yndan”, a tree, which was

also called anubing. The tree of inrang was used to be abundant in the local since

the early times. Before 1655, Indang was under the leadership of Silang until the

people decided to pose a petition to the senior authorities for the separation of

Indang from Silang. After 70 years of being a subordinate barrio of Silang, Indang

gained its autonomy as a municipality with the leadership of Juan Dimabiling as the

first Gobernadorcillo.

The town of Indang takes a significant part in the Philippine Revolution when

Andres Bonifacio was arrested at Barrio Limbon after being defeated in the Tejeros

Convention. It was also in Indang where Andres Bonifacio was barred from setting

up a separate government and army. Some of the outstanding revolutionary figures

who are also considered as the distinguished sons of Indang were Severino delas

Alas (member of Aguinaldo during his retreat to Northern Luzon), General Ambrosio

Mojica (politico military governor of the First Philippine Republic in Samar and

Leyte), Hugo Ilagan and Jose Coronel (delegates of Cavite to the revolutionary

congress in Tarlac). Indang’s revolutionary name during the Spanish Era was

Walang Tinag which means immovable.

23 | P a g e
 The exact month and day of the municipality establishment has no

verification. However, existing documents proved that Indang was instituted during

the ‘cold month’ of 1655. Therefore, the municipal government decided and declared

December 1st as “Indang Day” which was annually celebrated by its people.

A.2. Geographic Location and Features

Indang is upland municipality in Cavite composed of 36 barangay with a total

area of 8,920 hectares. It is centrally located in the upland of Cavite with a bearing of

120°52’ longitude and 14°11’ latitude. It is bounded on the north by the municipality

of Naic and Trece Martirez City, on the south by municipality of Mendez and

Tagaytay City, on the west by municipalities of Alfonso and Maragondon, and on the

east by the municipalities of Amadeo and Trece Martirez City. The municipality is

highly accessible from major points within the province and to major market areas

like Naic and Alfonso while it is only 13.5 kilometers from the seat of provincial

government at the city of Trece Martirez, Indang is about 12.8 kilometers from

Tagaytay City.

The topography is characterized by gently sloping or rolling terrain. Almost

40.36% of its total land area is within the slope grade of 3-8% while 2,135 hectares is

within the slope range of 8-15% which is characterized by undulating/sloping terrain.

The land elevation ranges from 230 to 380 meters above sea level. The land area is

furthermore fairy well dissected by numerous creeks and streams that are deeply

cut, characterized by steep and abrupt banks. Rivers, creeks and springs supply the

water needed for both agricultural and household purposes. These rivers and creeks

also serve as natural drainage into which storm water is discharged and flow in

northern direction to discharge into either Manila Bay or Laguna de Bay. Based on

24 | P a g e
Hazard Mapping and Assessment for Effective Community-Based Disaster Risk

Management conducted by PHILVOLCS-DOST, Indang is susceptible on the Strong

Ground Shaking when the earthquake intensity scale reached PEIS Intensity VIII and

above, but not susceptible on Earthquake-Induced landslide. However, there are a

possible landslide deposits along major rivers. Generally, the municipality has low

susceptibility on Rain-Induced landslide.

ZONING MAP OF INDANG CAVITE

A.3. Human Resources

The human population of Indang gives general information of the population

size, composition and distribution. Population is the most important information on

25 | P a g e
the determining the needs for public service and creates demand for goods and

services affecting the level of economic activities in sustaining their existence.

A.3.1. Population Size and Growth Rate

Population in Indang increases due to births that occur and the influx of

migrants from other municipalities in search of employment and for a better quality of

life. Based on 2010 NSO Census of Population, Indang has a total population of

62,030 with a growth rate of 1.92 %. This represents 2.01% of the total population of

Cavite which is 3,090,691 in the same census year. In 1995 census, it has grown by

1.74%, an increase of 3,583 residents over a period of 5 years (1990-95). From 1995

to 2000, a period of another five years, it grew doubled with a high growth rate of

3.70% and slowed down for the period 2000-2010 with a growth rate of 1.92%

compared to the province growth rate with the gradual decreased from 1990-2010.

The historical growth of the population in different census years of Indang and

Province of Cavite is shown below.

Table 01: Population Size and Historical Growth Rate Municipality of Indang and Province
of Cavite, Year 1990-2010

A.3.2 Population Distribution

Indang has a total of 13,061 households based on year 2010 NSO census.

The average household size is 4.74. There are 2,406 households or 18.42% of total

26 | P a g e
 household had a household size of 5 while the 4,130 households had a household

size of 6 & over. It shows that 31.62% of total household had more than the average

number of person per household.

Number of Household Size Average

Indang Household 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 and over HH Size
13,061 636 1,219 2,028 2,642 2,406 1,779 977 1,374 4.71
% of Total HH 100.00 4.87 9.33 15.53 20.23 18.42 13.62 7.48 10.52
Source: Municipal Planning & Development Office

Table 02: Number of Household by Household Size, Year 2010

A.3.3 Total Population, Rural-Urban Household Population

Based on 2010 NSO census, the 36 barangays of Indang has total population

of 62,303 which constitute a population density of 6.95 persons per hectare. The

urban (Poblacion) population of 5,743 gives an urban growth area density of 52.92

persons per hectare, whereas, in rural, the density is 6.39 persons per hectare.

These show that urban growth area land utilization is compact where people tend to

cluster together in a certain settlement area. Existing densities indicate that the

municipality has low density development.

27 | P a g e
 The classification of urban and rural areas remains an important indicator for

planning and analysis as it provides a basis for sound policies and decisions

pertaining to urban planning and delivery of basic services.

Table 04, shows that in the year 2010, among the 32 rural barangays, the

Brgy. Alulod, Buna Cerca and Banaba Cerca are the first three barangays giving the

largest share for the increase of the municipal household population with 4,322,

3,473and 2,982 respectively and had an average household size of 5.07. These

barangays are almost adjacent to the Poblacion while the barangays with the

smallest shares are Tambo Balagbag, Guyam Munti and Limbon, , with 719,587, and

558household population respectively, these are located far away the town proper

and had an average household size of 4.17 while urban barangays or town proper

has the total population of 5,743 with5,712 household population indicating the share

of 9.48% to total household population and has population density of 52.92 persons

per hectare. It also indicate that the urbanization level in poblacion areas are within

the same level during the past census years.

Household Number of Average

Barangay Total Population Household Household
Population Size
Urban
1 Poblacion 1 1,320 1,316 291 4.52
2 Poblacion 2 999 995 254 3.91
3 Poblacion 3 1,030 1,016 206 4.92
4 Poblacion 4 2,394 2,385 417 5.72
Sub – Total 5,743 5,712 1,168 4.89
Rural
1 Agus-os 1,386 1,381 302 4.58
2 Alulod 4,322 4,294 834 5.15
3 Banaba Cerca 2,982 2,919 576 5.07
4 Banaba Lejos 1,313 1,288 286 4.50
5 Bancod 2,434 2,418 498 4.86
6 Buna Cerca 3,473 3,461 692 5.00
28 | P a g e
 7 Buna Lejos 1 1,812 1,800 382 4.71
8 Buna Lejos 2 2,048 2,041 421 4.85
9 Calumpang Cerca 2,820 2,796 584 4.79
10 Calumpang Lejos 2,543 2,514 526 4.78
11 Carasuchi 1,187 1,123 278 4.04
12 Daine 1 1,706 1,700 377 4.51
13 Daine 2 2,177 2,165 452 4.79
14 Guyam Malaki 2,411 2,403 506 4.75
15 Guyam Munti 589 587 145 4.04
16 Harasan 922 918 214 4.28
17 Kayquit I 1,401 1,396 302 4.62
18 Kayquit 2 1,810 1,799 388 4.64
19 Kayquit 3 2,213 2,205 463 4.76
20 Kaytambog 1,225 1,221 273 4.48
21 Kaytapos 1,333 1,328 289 4.60
22 Limbon 565 558 133 4.21
23 Lum. Balagbag 961 958 225 4.25
24 Lum. Halayhay 1,402 1,395 315 4.43
25 Ma. Kahoy Cerca 1,700 1,694 367 4.61
26 Ma. Kahoy Lejos 869 866 206 4.20
27 Mataas na Lupa 2,894 2,885 580 4.97
28 Pulo 917 909 209 4.34
29 Tambo Balagbag 722 719 168 4.27
30 Tambo Ilaya 847 845 191 4.43
31 Tambo Kulit 1,466 1,391 306 4.54
32 Tambo Malaki 1,837 1,826 405 4.51
Sub – Total 56,287 55,803 11,893 4.69
TOTAL 62,030 61,515 13,061 4.71
Source: NSO various population census

Table 04: Total Population, Estimated Household Population by Urban and Rural
barangay and Average Household Size, Year 2010

A.3.4 Estimated Population by Age Group, and by Sex

These are the important sets of information in the planning of specific social

services and facilities representing age groups that would require demand for

services, health, education, jobs, family planning programs, and welfare.

The estimated population by age-group of Indang in the 2010 is shown below.

These can be attributed to factors like urbanization and in-migration wherein

29 | P a g e
residents from other locality got married to local residents and others acquired a job

and lived in the municipality. With this steady increased in population, the survival

and enabling needs, demands for jobs, land, house, recreation and other facilities

would likewise increases.

Male Female Sex Ratio

Age Group Both Number % Number %
Sexes
School going- age
population 22,631 11,536 50.98 11,095 49.02 104
Pre-school (3-6) 4,208 2,179 51.79 2,029 48.21 107
Elementary (7-12) 7,548 3,885 51.47 3,663 48.53 106
Secondary (13-16) 4,933 2,509 50.86 2,424 49.14 104
Tertiary (17-21) 5,942 2,963 49.86 2,979 50.14 99
Working age (15-64) 39,105 19,439 49.71 19,666 50.29 99
Labor Force (15 and 42,753 21,415 50.09 21,338 49.91 100
over)
Dependent Population 22,404 11,187 49.93 11,217 50.07 100
Young (0-14) 18,762 9,713 51.77 9,049 48.23 107
Old (65 and over) 3,642 1,474 40.46 2,168 59.54 68
Source: NSO various population census & Municipal Planning & Development Office

Table 05: Estimated Population Composition by School-Age, Working-Age,

Dependent-Age group and Sex, Year 2010

A.3.5 Labor and Employment

In 2010, the municipality of Indang has a labor force population of 42,753 with

the age of 15 years old and over. The 39,141 or 91.55% are in the labor force

whereas 3,612 are not in the labor force. Within the labor force, the 36,821 or

86.12% are economically active while 2,320 are unemployed.

Table 06 shows that 18,734 or 50.88% of those employed in the labor force

are male while the remaining 49.12% are female.

Population 15 Labor Force Not in the

30 | P a g e
 Indang yrs and Over Employed % Unemployed % Labor Force
Male 21,415 18,734 50.88 1,171 50.47 1,510
Female 21,338 18,087 49.12 1,149 49.53 2,102
TOTAL 42,753 36,821 100.00 2,320 100.0 3,612
0
Source: Municipal Planning & Development Office

Table 06: Labor Force Population by Sex and Employment Status, Year 2010

A.4 Physical/Infrastructure Resources

A.4.1 Transportation Network

Land transportation is the principal mode of transporting goods and services

in Indang and its neighboring municipalities. Vehicular routes going to other

municipalities are Indang-Tagaytay, Indang-Alfonso, Indang-Naic, and Indang-Trece

Martirez City-Dasmarinas to Baclaran and vice versa. There are also several types

of vehicles traversing the place, but the most commonly used vehicles for public

conveyances are jeepneys and a number of tricycles plying within the poblacion area

and nearby barangays.

At present, there are available 130 buses routing to Baclaran, 749 jeeps with routes

to adjacent municipalities and cities, and 1066 tricycles steering around Indang.

These are supported by 19 transport groups and provided by the support of six (6)

gasoline stations and eight (8) auto supplies for their maintenance and needs

Indang has 25.571 km. barangay roads, 4.982 km. municipal road, 28.642

km. provincial road, 29.859 km. national road and 46.433 km. farm-to-market roads.

The barangay roads primarily provide the delivery of goods, services, and facilities

31 | P a g e
which bring improvement on the living condition of the rural populace. On the other

hand, the 85.36% of total farm-to-market roads are not passable by vehicles during

rainy season. There are 21 bridges connecting the 19barangays of this municipality

classified as national, provincial, municipal and barangay bridges. The inventory of

roads and bridges are shown at tables below.

Type of Pavement
LOCATION / Barangay Length (km) Concrete Asphalt
(km) (km)

Calderon St. 0.122 - 0.122

Hugo Ilagan St. 0.374 - 0.374
Lakandula St. 0.222 - 0.222
Balagtas St. 0.259 - 0.259
San Miguel St. 0.414 - 0.414
Lopez Jaena St. 0.160 - 0.160
A. Bonifacio St. 0.229 - 0.229
A. Luna St. 0.339 - 0.339
Evangelista St. 0.290 - 0.290
P. Burgos St. 0.145 - 0.881 0.145
J. Dimabiling St. 1.006 - 0.757 0.125
De Ocampo St. 0.051 0.641 0.051
By Pass Road (Ramirez) 0.757 -
Calumpang Cerca-Bancod Road 0.641 -
Total 4.982 2.279 2.703

32 | P a g e
 Table

07: Inventory of Farm to Market Roads Municipality of Indang CY 2010

Table 08: Inventory of Municipal Roads Municipality of Indang CY 2010

33 | P a g e
 Table 09: Inventory of National Roads Municipality of Indang CY 2010

Type of Pavement
LOCATION / Barangay Length (km) Concrete Asphalt (km)
(km)

Calumpang Lejos 2.044 - 2.044

Agus-os 1.363 - 1.363
Calumpang Cerca 1.937 - 0.325 1.937
Poblacion (Cal. Cerca-Buna Cerca) 1.645 1.488 1.320
Buna Cerca (San Gregorio St.) 1.488 0.952 -
Guyam Malaki 0.952 1.220 -
Lumampong Halayhay 1.220 1.500 - 0.189
Tambo Kulit 1.689 0.920 0.096
Tambo Ilaya 1.016 1.250 0.132
Tambo Malaki 1.382 - 0.653
Kaytambog 0.653 - 0.216
Banaba Cerca 0.216 - 3.009 0.638
Poblacion (Binangbangan St.) 0.638 2.551 -
Mataas Na Lupa 3.009 0.687 -
Alulod 2.551 3.522 -
Kaytapos 0.687 0.106 - 2.800
Buna Cerca 3.522 - 0.938
Mahabang Kahoy Cerca 2.906
Kayquit 3 0.938
Total 29.859 17.530 12.110

Source: Municipal Planning & Development Office

34 | P a g e
 Table 10: Inventory of Barangay Roads Municipality of Indang CY 2010

Type of Pavement
LOCATION / Barangay Length (km) Concrete Gravel (km)
(km)
Daine 1 & 2 6.480 6.480 - 0.503
Lumampong Balagbag 3.403 2.900 -
Tambo Kulit 1.295 1.295 -
Tambo Balagbag 1.618 1.618 -
Lumampong Halayhay 0.513 0.513 -
Guyam Malaki 1.193 1.193 -
Harasan 1.532 1.532 -
Tambo Malaki 1.534 1.534 -
Buna Lejos 1 & 2 3.063 3.063 -
Mahabang Kahoy Cerca 2.503 2.503 -
Mahabang Kahoy Lejos (Balagbag) 1.159 1.159 -
Buna Cerca 1.278 1.278
Total 25.571 25.068 0.503
Source: Municipal Planning & Development Office

Table 11: Inventory of Provincial Roads Municipality of Indang CY 2010

Type of Pavement
LOCATION / Barangay Length (km) Concrete Asphalt
(km) (km)
Guyam Munti 1.482 1.482 -
Guyam Malaki 1.536 1.536 -
Carasuchi 2.128 2.128 -
Pulo 2.723 2.723 - 0.550
Kaytambog 2.043 1.490 -
Banaba Lejos 1.533 1.533 - 0.403
Banaba Cerca 4.083 4.083 -
Kayquit 5.103 4.700 - 0.608
Limbon 0.769 0.769 1.194
Alulod 1.023 1.023 -
Kaytapos (Patilyo-Banadero) 1.206 0.598 -
Poblacion (Dimabiling-Banadero) 1.194 - 1.108 -
Mahabang Kahoy Lejos(Balagbag) 1.108 2.503
Mahabang Kahoy Cerca 2.503 0.208
Buna Cerca (Road to Kayquit) 0.208
Total 28.642 25.887 2.755
Source: Municipal Planning & Development Office

35 | P a g e
 Table 12: Inventory of Bridges Municipality of Indang CY 2010

LOCATION Length Width

(Barangay) Name of Type (m) (m) Condition
Bridge
Alulod - Mataas na Alulod Composite Steel I- 16.20 9.05 Fair
Lupa Beam
Alulod - Kaytapos Saluysoy Pre-Stress Deck 43.85 9.50 Fair
Girder
Alulod – Limbon Limbon Concrete 15.00 8.00 Passable
Limbon - Amadeo Limbon-2 Bailey 18.00 3.50 Passable/
Critical
Kaytapos Macanda Concrete 13.00 8.00 Passable
Kaytapos - Alulod Patillo-2 Concrete 16.00 8.00 Passable
Kaytapos - Poblacion- Banadero Box Culvert 16.00 9.00 Passable
1
Kayquit - Buna Cerca Kayquit Concrete 18.00 8.00 Passable
Kayquit-3 - Ma. Italaro Composite Steel I- 41.72 8.90 Fair
Kahoy Cerca Beam
Poblacion-4 - Banaba Binambanga Stone Arch 8.50 10.30 Poor
Cerca n
Banaba Cerca - Kaytambog Reinforced 15.65 9.00 Good
Kaytambog Concrete Deck
Girder
Kaytambog - Tambo Lulungisan Reinforced 11.00 9.15 Fair
Malaki Concrete Deck
Girder
Tambo Ilaya - Tambo Banaba Reinforced 18.55 8.85 Fair
Kulit Concrete Deck
Girder
Tambo Kulit - Lum. Lipa Reinforced 21.66 9.54 Good
Halayhay Concrete Deck
Girder
Guyam Malaki - Catmon Reinforced 21.80 9.54 Good
Alfonso Concrete Deck
Girder
Guyam Malaki San Pascual Bailey 9.00 3.50 Passable/
Critical
Guyam Malaki - Harasan Bailey 9.00 3.50 Passable/
Harasan Critical
Pulo – Harasan Harasan-2 Box Culvert 3.50 4.50 Passable
Tambo Kulit - Lum. Magabe Steel 28.00 3.50 Passable/
Balagbag Critical
Tambo Balagbag - Lamiyo Concrete 4.50 3.50 Passable
Daine-1
Calumpang Cerca - Bancod Steel 66.00 8.00 Passable
Bancod
Source: Municipal Planning & Development Office

36 | P a g e
A.4.2 Social Services facilities/utilities/amenities

The presence of social facilities/utilities/amenities in Indang would determine the

improving accessibility of social services that are essential in addressing the poverty

of the residents. Relative to improving the state of well-being of local population, the

existing social services facilities/utilities/amenities are as follows;

Public Building

 Barangay Multi Purpose Hall - 36

 Barangay Covered Court - 3

 Municipal Hall

 Municipal Covered Court

 Municipal Fire Station

 Municipal Police Station and Jail

 Señior Citizen Bldg.

 Public Market and Slaughterhouse

Education Facilities

 Cavite State University (main campus)

 Private Secondary School – 8

 Public Secondary School – 3

 Private Elementary School – 9

 Public Elementary School – 26

 Municipal Daycare Center

37 | P a g e
  Barangay Daycare Center – 25

Health Facilities

 Municipal Health Center

 Barangay Health Station – 32

 Cavite State University (CvSU) Infirmary

 Dental Clinic – 6

 Medical Clinic – 5

 Pharmacy – 1

 Drug Store – 4

 Diagnostic and Laboratory – 1

Burial Facilities

 Municipal Cemetery

 Indang Catholic Cemetery

 Barangay Cemetery – 2

 Private Cemetery – 5

Public Park

 Heroes Park

 Andres Bonifacio Shrine

38 | P a g e
Municipal Material Recovery Facility

Sports/Recreational facilities

 Municipal covered court

 Gymnasium (CvSU)

 Private resort – 5

 Cockpit stadium

Residential Subdivisions

 Upland Cavite Habitat for Humanity Foundation Inc.

 Asama Homes

 Metro Gate Indang

 Green Valley

 Green Village

 Cocoville

 Indang Village

 Villa Corazon

Based on year 2010 State of Local Development Electronic Report under Local

Governance Performance Management System (LGPMS), Indang state of social

development rate is at the high governance performance management level. The

detailed descriptions are as follows:

39 | P a g e
State of Health and Nutrition

- Children nutrition, in general, is assured.

- Morbidity rates for the identified leading illnesses, in general, are within

acceptable conditions.

 Crude death rate is low (the lower rate, the better). Local situation is better than

the national.

 Maternal mortality rate is low. The obtaining situation is better than the national.

Sustain programs that ensure maternal care and aim for lower rates.

 Infant mortality rate is currently not a problem. Local condition is far better than

national.

 Children mortality rate (below 5 yrs old age) in the LGU is far better than the

national situation. Sustain programs that ensure childcare.

State of Education

- Elementary Participation Rate (EPR) is very high. Rate is definitely higher than the

2010 target. Access to primary education is assured.

- Elementary Completion Rate (ECR) is high. Rate is higher than the 2010 target.

- Secondary Completion Rate (SCR) is very high. Secondary education appears to

be well supported.

- Tertiary or Technical Education Completion Rate (TECR) is high. More than A3/4

of the population completed tertiary or technical education. The quality of human

capital is evident.

- Simple Literacy Rate (SLR) is high. Rate is higher than the national percentage

target.

40 | P a g e
State of Housing and Basic Utilities

- The extent of house and lot ownership is very high.

- The size of the informal dweller-population is negligible.

- Households with makeshift houses exist in the area but the magnitude is lower

than the national situation.

- Majority of the HHs have easy access to water supply (piped-in). That situation is

far better than most of the LGUs outside of Metro Manila and HUCs.

- The situation with regards to households with sanitary toilet facility is far better

than the target areas or the benchmark for LGUs outside of Metro Manila and

HUCs.

- The situation of households with electricity is far better than the national average

for rural areas or the benchmark for LGUs outside of Metro Manila and HUCs.

State of Peace and Order

- Incidence of index crime such as murder, homicide, physical injury, rape, robbery

and theft is very low compared with the benchmark at the national level.

- Incidence of non-index crime such as crimes against national security,

fundamental laws of state, public order, public morals, violations of special laws,

illegal gambling, illegal possession of firearms, carnapping, illegal drugs,

kidnapping, serious illegal detention, and smuggling is very low compared with the

benchmark at the national level.

A.4.3. Utilities: (Water, Power, Communication & Computer Technology, and Waste
Management)

A.4.3.1 Water

41 | P a g e
 Water is the lifeblood of the environment, essential to the survival of all living

things. Indang is extremely blessed with six (6) major rivers with 88 natural springs which

are sources of household water supply. The water classification is within a water Class

“A” classification and therefore safe for drinking. All of the barangays have existing

waterworks utilities with level III (piped-in) distribution system, however, some barangays

have experiencing scarcity of water supply during summer. The water supply and

resources per category level are presented at table 13.

Table 13: Water Supply and Resources per Category Level Municipality of Indang, CY

2010

Location and No. of % of Total Household

Pumps served per Category
Location of Water Resources Barangay Served Level

1.Ikloy Spring @ Brgy. Kayquit & Poblacion 1,2,3 & 4 100% of HH @Level III
Kaytambog with series
Kayquit-Kaytambog River of Pumps Banaba Cerca 100% of HH @Level III

(Managed by Water Kayquit 2 100% of HH @Level III

District) Kaytambog 100% of HH @Level III
Calumpang Cerca 100% of HH @Level III
Kaytapos 100% of HH @Level III
Alulod 100% of HH @Level III
part of Kayquit-1 100% of HH @Level III
part of Agus-os 100% of HH @Level III
part of Banaba Lejos 100% of HH @Level III

42 | P a g e
 2. Ulo Spring @Alulod River - part of Alulod 20% of HH @Level III
3. Bulbok Spring @ 1- Pump (Kayquit) Kayquit-1 80% of HH @Level III
Mahabang Kahoy-Kayquit
River
4. Bulbok Spring-2 @ - Buna Cera 45% of HH @Level III
Maha- bang Kahoy-Kayquit
River
- Banaba Lejos 40% of HH @Level II
5. Paho Spring @
Banaba Cerca-Tambo River
- Agus-os 35% of HH @Level III
6. Silidon Spring @ Alulod-
Bancod River
7. Siloy Spring @ - Harasan and Pulo 45% of HH @Level III
Carasuchi- Guyam Malaki
River
8. Sibol Spring @ - Pulo 55% of HH @Level III
Kaytambog-Pulo River
9. Madilim Spring @ Pulo-
- Tambo Malaki and 100% of HH @Level III
Harasan River
Tambo Ilaya
10. Kalamyas Spring @
Tambo Ilaya
T.Kulit-Harasan River - 100% of HH @Level III
Daine 1 & 2
11. Macabag Spring @
Lumampong Balagbag River Tambo Balagbag
- 95% of HH @Level III
12. Magabi Springs @
Lump. Balagbag-Tambo Kulit
River Tambo Kulit
- 100% of HH @Level III
13. Sahing Spring @
Harasan- Guyam Malaki
Tambo Kulit
River - 60% of HH @Level III
14. Makawayan Spring @ 1-Pump (Tambo Kulit)
Tambo Kulit River Lumampong Halayhay
40% of HH @Level III
15. Saluysoy Spring @
Guyam Malaki-Paho River -
part of Limbon
16. Limbon Spring @ 1-Pump (Limbon) 70% of HH @Level III
Limbon-Pangil river
17. Macanda Spring @ Bancod
Kaytapos River - 80% of HH @Level III

18. Bulbok Spring @ Lump.

Halayhay-Alfonso River Lumampong Balagbag
70% of HH @Level III
19. Buna Spring @ Buna
Cerca-Kayquit River Cavite State University
campus 50% of HH @Level III

20. Deepwells with 29

Pumps (support utilities to 1- Pump (CvSU) CvSU 50% of HH @Level III
attain
1- Pump (Bancod) Bancod
Level III water supply)
1-Pump (Mataas Na

43 | P a g e
 Lupa) Mataas Na Lupa 50% of HH @Level III
1- Pump (Limbon)
Pump (Burgos St.) Limbon 30% of HH @Level III
Pump (Agus-os) Calumpang Cerca 100% of HH @Level III
Pump (Cal. Lejos) 2- Agus-os -do-
Pump (Ma. Kahoy
Calumpang Lejos -do-
Balagbag)
Mahabang Kahoy -do-
Pump (Ma. Kahoy Balagbag
Cerca) -do-
Mahabang Kahoy
Cerca & part of Buna -do-
Lejos 1&2
Pump (Buna Lejos 1&2)
Buna Lejos 1 & 2 -do-
2- Pump (Buna Cerca)
Buna Cerca -do-
Pump (Banaba Lejos)
Banaba Lejos -do-
Pump (Kayquit-3)
Kayquit-3 -do-
4- Pump (Carasuchi)
Carasuchi -do-
1- Pump (Harasan)
Harasan -do-
1- Pump (Daine-1)
part of Daine 1 & 2 -do-
1- Pump
21. Deepwell-(3) (Mannual) (Lump.Halayhay) 3- Lumampong Halayhay -do-
Pump (Guyam Malaki)
Guyam Malaki -do-
1- Pump (Guyam Munti)
(Harasan) Guyam Munti -do-
part of Harasan -do- (usable on summer)

Source: Municipal Planning and Development Office

44 | P a g e
A.4.3.2 Power

The Municipality of Indang is served by MERALCO with provincial office at

City of Dasmariñas, Cavite. The 36 barangays have been energized giving a rate of

100percent electricity by providing round-the-clock services considering the part of

the transmission line of National Power Corporation (NAPOCOR) had been crosses

at the three (3) barangay of this municipality. Consumers are classified into

commercial, residential, public buildings and streetlights. Socialized rate

classification is applied. Presently, consumers are expected to increase due to

population growth.

A.4.3.3 Communication and Computer Technology

Radio and television sets in Indang have a good reception. These

communication channels make the populace of Indang well-informed and up-to-date

in terms of national and international issues. The Philippine Long Distance

Telephone Company (PLDT) and Digital Telecommunication Inc. (DIGITEL) are the

two leading telephone companies serving the municipality. On mobile

telecommunication, 18 mobile Base Station transceiver towers are currently in place.

Cellular phones are commonly used by the residents especially in remote barangays

where telephone landline services are not available. We have also Postal Service

office, and five (5) money transfer outlets. There are existences of several computer

shops that cater education and business research activities.

A.4.3.4 Environmental Management

45 | P a g e
 With the location and topography of gently sloping or rolling terrain along with

numerous natural spring and rivers, the Municipal Government put top priority

program is the protection and preservation of freshwater resources. It includes the

preservation of fertile soil, protection of rivers and landscape, and preservation of our

agricultural land.

Furthermore, Indang is one of the compliant in R.A. 9003 which is known as

Ecological Solid Waste Management Act of 2000 and in cleaning-up and

rehabilitation of Manila Bay by establishing Material Recovery Facility (MRF). This

facility is design to recover reusable and recyclable materials from collected

municipal solid wastes. It has waste collection and segregation system, a compost-

organic fertilizer plant, a Shredder machine, and a Bioreactor designed by the

Department of Science and Technology (DOST). These machines design to process

the biodegradable waste from public market to promote the safe and environmentally

sound recovery of recyclable materials in the existing controlled dumpsite.

A.4.3.5 Environment Hazards and related Disaster

Typhoons are the common natural phenomena experienced by the

municipality of Indang. It occurs between the months of July to December and strikes

unexpectedly with storm winds and heavy rains which results to disastrous

consequences to the population. These cause landslides along the roads at

Barangay Tambo Kulit, Tambo Ilaya, Tambo Malaki, Kaytambog, Poblacion-4. It also

threatens the lives of people, crops and livestock, disturbance to the ecosystem,

destruction of properties, disruption in utilities such as waterworks system, power,

communication and transportation. Sometimes there were incidental hazard like

46 | P a g e
cases of dengue & other livestock epidemic health problems, grass fire and other

structural fire.

Along the river in few barangays are existing private resorts utilizing river bed

as swimming pool by constructing structures which is vulnerable to environmental

hazard while causing decrease of the quality of running water.

Based on Hazard Mapping and Assessment for Effective Community-Based

Disaster Risk Management conducted by PHILVOLCS-DOST, Indang has high

susceptible on the Strong Ground Shaking when the earthquake intensity scale

reached PEIS Intensity VIII and above, but not susceptible on Earthquake-Induced

landslide. However, there are a possible landslide deposits along major rivers.

Generally, the municipality has low susceptibility on Rain-Induced landslide.

A.5 The Economic Structure

The economy of Indang largely depends on agriculture. It is a first (1st) class

municipality and has an area of 8,920 hectares. With its strategic location coupled

with favorable slopes and elevation, good quality of soil and climatic condition, the

municipality is a focal point of agricultural activities. The 80.60% or 7,189.42

hectares are primarily devoted to agriculture. They are predominantly planted with

various types of crops like coconut, banana, dragon fruit, coffee, pineapple, and fruit

trees while there are small portions of rice, root crops, vegetables, and corn. Most

farms are small and many are only operated part-time. Farmers are engaged in

multi-cropping farming system. About 17.92 % of total household are still farming or

47 | P a g e
farm labor are the main source of income while trading of agricultural products are

other common source of income of Indangeños.

Most of the people of Indang now are work in service industry such as

administration, education, health care, tourism and transportation. Some are working

in manufacturing industries at CEPZA, FCIE, Gateway Business Park while other are

employed overseas. Only about 11.86 % of total household have their own

businesses and has over-all employment participation rate of about 0.915.

On the trade and industry, existing commercial and agri-business

establishments play a relatively major role in the predominantly agri-based economy

of Indang. Record on this establishment shows the wholesale and retail trade stores

are clustered within the Poblacion or urban area while in the rural, the trading

establishments are dominated by sari-sari stores. Agri-business farms raise large

volumes of livestock and poultry, there are existing hog farms, broiler farms, layer

and breeder farms. Indang Public Market and Slaughterhouse stand on 20,316

square meter government-owned property along Dimabiling St., Barangay IV

(Poblacion). This public market has three (3) simple market buildings and

“Bagsakan” for wholesale trading. The slaughterhouse occupies an area of 1,800

square meters, which is adjacent to the meat section of market building. It has

complete facilities like corral and hog-holding pen.

48 | P a g e
A.6 Existing Land Use

As of year 2010, the major land use is agricultural which occupies 7,189.42

hectares. This constitutes about 80.60 percent of its total land area. Agricultural

areas consist of croplands and agri-business farms like livestock rising such as

piggery and poultry.

Increase in population and economic developments, however, propelled the

municipality’s growth and transformed the lands into built-up uses. The built-up areas

consist of residential, commercial, institutional, industrial, functional open spaces,

infrastructure and utilities land uses. These uses occupy a total area of 705.33

hectares or 7.91% of the total land area as shown in Table I4.

The natural bodies of water, easement including its tributaries is considered

as a protected areas. They are about 1,020.48 hectares or 11.44 percent of the total

land area.

Table 14: Existing General Land Use, Municipality of Indang

Land Use Categories Existing Area (Has) Percent(%) to Total

Built-Up Areas 705.334 7.91
Residential 449.399 5.04
Commercial 21.988 0.25
Institutional 108.907 1.22
Parks and functional open space 8.888 0.10
Infrastructure/Utilities 103.520 1.16
Industrial Areas 2.340 0.03
Tourism areas 10.292 0.11
Agri-Demo Farm 3.968 0.04
Material Recovery Facility 0.800 0.01
Easement and Water Bodies 1,020.480 11.44
Agricultural Areas 7,189.418 80.60
TOTAL 8,920.000 100.00
Source: Municipal Planning & Development Office

49 | P a g e
A.7 Situational Analysis

The following are assessment of present condition and analysis of the current state

of Indang which are intended to provide a complete picture of the community.

COMPARATIVE/COMPETITIVE CHALLENGES (Priority issues and

ADVANTAGES concern)
- Strategic location of Indang in the - Offices in the Municipal Hall have
upland of Cavite which is 13.5 kilometer inadequate working space;
away from Provincial Capitol and 12.8 - Congested municipal cemetery;
kilometer away from Tagaytay City - Increasing number of tricycles and
- Indang is outside the flood-prone areas; other public utility vehicles occupying
- Merely susceptible on the Strong municipal streets as their waiting
Ground Shaking when the earthquake areas causing traffic and road
intensity scale reached PEIS Intensity congestion
VIII and above; - Absence of central Public transport
- Existence of nine (9) entry and exit terminal;
points to adjacent municipalities and - Public market have improper
city; sectioning arrangement;
- Existence of concreted barangay road - Presence of outdated Market Code;
(25.57 km), concreted and asphalt - Presence of outdated CLUP;
municipal road (5.08 km), - Absence of tourism development
concreted/asphalt provincial road (28.64 plan;
km), concreted/asphalt national road - Partial implementation of Republic Act
(29.64 km), and 43.74 km farm to 9003 known as Ecological Solid
market road; Waste Management Act of 2000.
- Productive and fertile agricultural land - Inadequate School Educational Fund
with good climatic condition; (SEF);
- Existence of Cavite State University - Inadequate support from SK on ALS
main campus; programs;
- Existence of six (6) major rivers and - Health Center have inadequate health
about 88 natural springs which can be personnel;
tapped as possible sources of high - Absence of Comprehensive Solid
quality potable water and power supply; Waste Management Plan;
- Existence of 100% power supply; - Increasing number of high school
- Existence of PLDT, DIGITEL landlines students enrolled in Indang National
and 18 mobile cell site; High School and Lumampong
- Supportive municipal and barangay National High School;
officials; - Absence of municipal livelihood
- Low crime rate and generally peaceful training center;
community; - Increasing number of low-income
- Existence of 4.4 hectares lot for families;
municipal agri-demo farm and material - Increasing number of unemployment;
recovery facility; - Presence of garbage on vacant lot,
- Existence of public market with 3 creek & river.
building with bagsakan area and - Culture and Arts of Indang are not
slaughterhouse; given preferential attention;
- Existence of 26 public elementary - Bureau of Fire protection (BFP)
school; temporarily occupied the SK

50 | P a g e
 - Presence of 10 private secondary federation building as Fire Station
school with elementary
- Existence of 26 daycare centers; - Absence of official book on History of
- Existence of two 2 national high school; Indang;
- Existence of Municipal Literacy - Absence of Health and Sanitation
Coordinating Council and ALS (Non- Code;
formal Education) programs - Absence of Gender & Development
- Existence of level 2 and 3 water work Code, Children Code, and Absence of
system in every barangay; Municipal Investment and Incentive
- Existence of 32 barangay health Code;
stations; - Presence of about 62,030 population
- Presence of standard quality sports and in year 2010 with a growth rate of
recreation facilities inside the main 1.92 per annum;
campus of CvSU; - 31.61% of total household had the
- Existence of Municipal Health Center average HH size of six (6) & over;
accompanied by diagnostic & laboratory - Estimated Household of 13,061 in the
facilities with 24/7 operation of safe birth year 2010 with about 61,515
delivery services. population; and
- 2010 Population density of about
52.92 persons per hectare in
Poblacion areas.

A.8 Functional Role of the Municipality

Like other municipalities in Cavite, Indang plays a functional role in the

context of provincial development. It is one of the major sources of permanent crops

like coconut, banana, santol, mango, guyabano, and jack fruit. It also helps in the

production of high value crops, such as papaya, pineapple, cassava, dragon fruit,

ube, gabi, ginger and other processed products from Kaong trees. Likewise,

increasing agri-business farms raise large volumes of livestock and poultry due to

favorable climatic condition. These are hog farms, broiler farms, layer and breeder

farms.

Strategic location of Indang which is centrally located in the upland Cavite

could make a potential tourist destination due to its natural attractions like rivers and

51 | P a g e
landscape if given support developments. Likewise, with the good types of soil and

favorable climatic condition can boost the municipality agricultural development.

With the existence of six (6) major river and 88 natural springs, these large of

volume of water would be a possible source of potable water in the province of

Cavite due to its water Class “A” classification if given legislative support and

policies.

A.9 Local Administration

A.9.1 Administrative machinery

The development effort in Indang is handled by Local Chief Executive and its

Sangguniang Bayan members composed of eight (8) Councilors, ABC President,

and SK Federation President. Assisting them are the 36 Punong Barangay and their

Kagawad who are responsible in ensuring the effectiveness of public services and

promote the general welfare of the residents. Also visible are the representatives of

the national agencies overall detailed in the municipality discharging their duties and

functions according to their agencies overall programs and services. The national

agencies in the municipality include:

o Philippine National Police

o Bureau of Fire Protection

o Commission on Election

o Bureau of Internal Revenue

o Philippine Postal Corporation

52 | P a g e
 o Department of Agrarian Reform

o Department of Interior and Local Government

Other than the aforementioned government officials and offices, the municipal

government at the start of planning period (Year-2010) has 10 offices. These are

Office of Planning and Development; Office of Civil Registrar;Office ofBudget; Office

of Treasurer; Office of Accountant; Office of Assessor; Office of Engineer; Office of

Agriculturist; Office of Social Welfare and Development and Development; Municipal

Health Office; and 5 division offices under the Mayor office (these are : Human

Management Office, Business & Licensing Office, Public Market Office, Environment

& Natural Resources Office, and Public Employment Office).

A.9.2 Fiscal Management

The Municipality of Indang is a first class municipality with the total income of

Php 89,977,352.42 in the year 2010, an increase of about 5.5% compare in the year

2009 which is Php 85,284,573.48. From year 2009 to 2010, the business taxes and

revenue has increased from Php 5,426,909.54 to Php 5,961,851.18 with an increase

of 9.86% over preceding year.

The management of funds by the municipality operates on local budget

system. Potential revenue earnings are estimated according to appraised tax base

within the municipality and expenditures are budgeted ahead of time. All revenues

received fall under the General Fund and national financial supports are separated

by functions. The present national aids like Countrywide Development Fund are

usually extended for infrastructures and social services.

53 | P a g e
 Expenditures are budgeted according to major classifications namely:

Personal Services; Maintenance and other Operating Expenses (MOOE); and

Capital Outlay. The 20 percent of Internal Revenue Allotment (IRA) available for

expenditures is also allotted to finance development projects and activities.

54 | P a g e
A.9.3 Income

Referring to the total income of Php 89,977,352.42 in the year 2010, the

78.16% comes from the Internal Revenue Allotment (IRA) and the remaining 21.84

percent are received from other revenues. This means that the biggest source of

revenues was the shared allotment given by the Bureau of Internal Revenue (BIR)

annually to the municipal treasury.

A.9.4 Expenditures

The total expenditure in the year 2010 was Php 81, 369,493.31. The bulk

went to general administration (62.83%), social and health services (13.87%),

Governance (12.73%), economic development (9.09%), and the

environmental management (1.48%).

THE COMPREHENSIVE LAND USE PLAN OF INDANG (2011-2020)

B. PROFILE OF THE MUNICIPALITY (GENERAL INFORMATION)

B.1 Introduction
Land is viewed as common natural resources, much like air and water found

therein, in the absence of land use planning and continues population grow, use of

land for food production, settlements and industry, as well as the need for

environment preservation and protection often result in conflicting issues and

because every individual added to the population requires additional space for living,

space for making a living, and space for infrastructure support, the demand-supply

balancing approach is essential in determining whether there is adequate supply of

land to meet the projected demand for urban development.

55 | P a g e
 While the State declares its land use policies and principles in terms of

relation to national economy and patrimony as well as its police power for the

promotion of public health, public safety, public interest, public order and general

welfare. This Comprehensive Land Use Plan of Indang is a support undertaking as

mandated under Section 20(c) Local Government Code (RA 7160).

This (Ten) 10-year Comprehensive Land Use Plan serves as a blueprint for

utilizing available land resources to different land using activities, and for the

implementation of social and economic development, policies, plans, programs and

projects consistent with the vision and mission of Indang.

B.2 Vision and Mission

VISION PANANAW

The Center of Agri-Tourism imbued with Ang Sentro ng Agri-Turismo na

nurturing and respectful people in a itinataguyod ng mapagkalingaat magalang
progressive, healthy and balanced na mamamayan sa isang maunlad,
environment governed by honest leaders. mayabong at balanseng kapaligiran na
may tapat na pamunuan.

MISSION MISYON

Enhance the quality of life of the people by Isulong ang antas ng pamumuhay ng mga
providing adequate basic social services in tao sa pamamagitan ng sapat na
an environment conducive for living that panlipunang serbisyo sa isang kapaligirang
promotes agri- tourism. nag-aangat sa agri-turismo.

Sustain a balance and healthy environment

through proper preservation, and Mapanatili ang isang balanse at mayabong
protection of natural resources. na kapaligiran sa pamamagitan ng
pagkalinga at pangangalaga sa likas na
Ensure peace and public safety through yaman.
respecting people’s lives to achieve an
orderly society. Masiguro ang kapayapaan at kaligtasan na
may paggalang sa buhay tungo sa isang
maayos na lipunan.

56 | P a g e
B.3 Rationale, Goals, Objectives, and Methodology

B.3.1 Rationale

o To comply with the Section 20(c) of the Local Government Code (RA 7160);

o Balancing the future demand for, and land allocation for urban development;

o Generation and characterization of alternative spatial strategies or urban form;

o Protecting the character and stability of residential, commercial, industrial,

institutional, agricultural, open space and other functional areas within the

locality and promote the orderly and beneficial development of the same;

o To preserve and special natural features and environmental critical areas;

o To provide guidelines for the appropriate use of natural resources;

o To allocate land for settlements and other urban uses on land least suitable

for agricultural and farming uses;

o To serve as basis for reclassifying and converting land; and

o To guide the orderly development of municipality to promote and protect the

health, safety, peace, comport, convenience, and general welfare of the

inhabitant.

B.3.2 Goals

o Revising outdated municipal comprehensive land use plan;

o Formulating land use policy framework for 2011-2020 Comprehensive Land

use Plan;

o Promote the efficient utilization, acquisition and disposition of land and ensure

the highest and best use of land;

57 | P a g e
 o Provide land use framework consistent with the overall development and

vision of the municipality;

58 | P a g e
 o Provide land use framework for social and economic development; and

o Promote sustainable development.

B.3.3 Objectives

o To promote life-sustaining development to ensure the future quality of living

environment;

o To direct, harmonize and influence discussion and activities of private and

public sectors relative to the use and management of land;

o To reconcile land use conflicts and proposals between and among individuals,

private and government entities relative to the present and future need for

land;

o To promote desirable patterns of land uses to prevent wasteful development

and minimize the cost of public infrastructure and utilities and other social

services; and

o Conserve areas of ecological, aesthetic, historical and cultural significance.

B.3.4 Methodology

The strategy adopted by the municipal government in the revision of CLUP

was bottom-up approach method or bottom up planning and other basic steps of

strategic planning process.

B.4 General Development Concept

B.4.1 Development Context

59 | P a g e
 A major consideration in the updating of this land use plan is the functional

role that the municipality plays in the context of the provincial and regional

development. Like other upland municipalities in Cavite, Indang is a major source of

permanent crops like coffee, coconut mango, and santol. It helps in the production of

fruit crops, such as papaya, pineapple, banana and dragon fruits. It is also a one of

the sources of root crops in the province.

The proximity of Indang toward City of Tagaytay which is 12.80 km. and 13.5

km. from adjacent Trece Martires City (a seat of Provincial Government) could make

the municipality a potential tourist destination due to its natural attractions like rivers

and landscape if given support developments. Likewise, with the good quality of soil

and favorable climatic condition can boost the municipality agricultural development

in terms of modern technology resources and develop as center of agri-tourism and

promoted as an Agricultural Trading Center of upland Cavite.

Existence of six (6) major river and 88 natural springs which are viable for

water administration and investment proposals for water/energy sector development.

It has a water Class “A” classification and could be a possible source of potable

water in the province of Cavite

Since typhoons are the common natural phenomena experienced by this

municipality, the disturbance to the ecosystem were negligible, considering the

hazard mapping assessment conducted by PHILVOLCS- DOST in which Indang is

merely susceptible on the strong Ground Shaking only when the earthquake intensity

scale reached PEIS Intensity VIII and above, but not susceptible on Earthquake-

60 | P a g e
Induced landslide. However, there are a possible landslide deposits along major

rivers. Generally, the municipality has low susceptibility on Rain-Induced landslide.

61 | P a g e
B.4.2 Scope and Limitation

Land use development for the municipality will cover land use trends and

projection for the planning period 2011-2020. It also considered the population

projection, historical growth rate, households and household population, and

geographical location of the Indang. However, limitations of these proposals and

uncertainties in making land use projections for these years may be greatly

influenced by numerous factors involving human, social and economic consideration.

B.4.3 The Municipal Land-use Trends and Consideration

The land use development trends of Indang addresses the continuing growth

of our municipality in terms of supplementary space to meet the demand for urban

development along with the functional role in the provincial development as

agricultural municipality or major source of fruit crops, poultry & livestock, and other

processed agri-products.

The existing built-up area as of year 2000 was 697.38 hectares and it was

increased for about 705.33 hectares in the year 2010. The slow built-up land

utilization was possibly due to the enormous decreased of growth rate from 3.70 in

year 2000 down to 1.92 in 2010. This had been indicated that the municipality of

Indang had low density development in the past 10 years.

As of year 2010 the major land use is agricultural which occupies 7,189.42

hectares. This constitutes about 80.60 percent of its total land area. Agricultural

62 | P a g e
areas consist of croplands and agri-business farms like livestock rising such as

piggery and poultry.

Increase in population and economic developments, however, propelled the

municipality’s growth and transformed the lands into built-up uses. The built-up areas

consist of residential, commercial, institutional, industrial, functional open spaces,

infrastructure and utilities land uses. These uses occupy a total area of 705.33

hectares or 7.91% of the total land area as shown in Table I4.

The present urban population growth requires the need for additional space to

accommodate increase in population in the next 10 years of their existence. These

are additional space for living, space for making a living, and space for infrastructure

support services which the most logical space available is the agricultural land. Since

Indang is a first (1st) class municipality, only 10 (%) percent of total agricultural area

is allowed for reclassification under Section 20 of R. A. 7160. At present, the

agricultural area is around 7,189.418 hectares which constitutes of about 80.60% of

the total land area of this municipality.

B.4.3.1 Population Trends and Projections

Population in Indang increases due to births that occur and the influx of

migrants from other municipalities in search of employment and for a better quality of

life. Based on 2010 NSO Census of Population, Indang has a total population of

62,030 with a growth rate of 1.92 %. This represents a 2.01% of the total population

of Cavite which is 3,090,691 in the same census year. In 1995 census, the

municipality has grown by 1.74%, an increase of 3,583 residents over a period of 5

years (1990-95). From 1995 to 2000, a period of another five years, it grew doubled

63 | P a g e
with a high growth rate of 3.70% and slowed down for the period 2000-2010 with a

growth rate of 1.92% compared to the province growth rate with the gradual

decreased from 1990-2010.

The historical growth of the population in different census years of Indang and

Province of Cavite is shown below. Table15 shows that the population of the

municipality grew steadily from 42,765 in 1995 to 51,281 in 2000. This shows an

average annual growth rate of 3.70 percent. Population figure went up to 62,030

thereafter for an annual rate of 1.92 percent in the year 2010.

Table15: Population Size and Historical Growth Rate Municipality of Indang and

Province of Cavite 1990-2010

Census Date Total Population Historical Growth Rate

Cavite Indang Cavite Indang
2010 3,090,691 62,030 4.12 1.92
2000 2,063,161 51,281 5.54 3.70
1995 1,610,324 42,765 6.46 1.74
1990 1,152,534 39,227
Source: NSO various population census

In Table 16, the municipality of Indang has a population density of 6.95

persons per hectare in 2010 with an urban population density of 52.92. This increase

in population density was primarily due to the strategic location of Indang in the

upland of Cavite which is 13.5 kilometer away from Trece Martires City and 12.8

kilometer away from Tagaytay City.

64 | P a g e
 For the planning year consideration, the estimated total population density will

increase to 8.41 persons per hectare with an urban-rural population density of 64.02

and 7.73 respectively.

In the year 2010 National Statistic Office (NSO) data Indang has 62,030

populations. It will be expected to increase to about 75,032 in the year 2020. By the

start of planning year and the succeeding years thereafter, the food requirements for

the residents will increase accordingly. It also creates local demand for goods and

services affecting the level of economic activities in sustaining their existence in this

municipality in the next 10 years or planning period.

Table16: Population Density (Urban-Rural) CY 2000-2020

Total Population Rural Urban Total

Total Population 1995 37,921 4,844 42,765
Total Population 2000 46,021 5,260 51,281
Total Population 2010 56,287 5,743 62,030
Total Population 2020 68,084 6,948 75,032

Density: Person/Hectare Rural Urban Total

Year 1995 4.30 44.63 4.79
Year 2000 5.22 48.47 5.75
Year 2010 6.39 52.92 6.95
Year 2020 7.73 64.02 8.41
Area( Has ) 8,811.47 108.53 8,920.00
Source: NSO various population census

B.4.3.2 Development Opportunities

The land use plan of the municipality is formulated through the consideration

of the following development prospective listed below:

o An agricultural Trading Center of upland Cavite;

65 | P a g e
 o Agri-eco tourism development potential;

o A possible source of quality potable water;

o A center of education in upland Cavite due the presence of Cavite State

University (CvSU) main campus;

o A potential place for regional sport events due to the existence of sport

auxiliary facilities inside the CvSU campus;

o A better place for the people live and make a healthful living.

o Development Constraints

o The issues identified in the analysis of the existing land use as well as the

projected land requirements within the planning period are as follows:

o Impacts of housing settlement along the roads with electrical utilities and with

communication lines facilities. The increase in population on housing

settlement areas demands provision for additional spaces in the future and

the most logical space available is the agricultural land which is

about7,189.418or 80.60% of the total land area of the municipality.

o The issue is prioritization of needs between settlements development and

food security. The concern is for the plan to be able to balance response to

these needs. Settlements development should be promoted without

jeopardizing the existing production levels of agricultural lands;

o Conservation and preservation of natural environment like soil and water

resources of the municipality in relation to economic development concern.

Likewise, the promotion of environmental management and sustainable

development and at the same time providing livelihood opportunities for social

development;

66 | P a g e
 o Congestion and traffic jams along business areas of Poblacion 1, 2 & 3 during

rush hour considering the presence of students from different schools

particularly Cavite State University main campus. Thus, need to decongest

the area by developing the area of Barangay Poblacion 4 along Dimabiling

Street wherein the Indang Public Market is located and part of Barangay 3

along national road going to Naic which have potential for growth and

development. It is also the appropriate location area for the establishment of

public transport terminal since this is where the new Municipal Hall soon to be

built;

o The issues are the presence of resorts utilizing river bank as resorts or the

presence of swimming structures within the river bed that causes obstruction

of river flow; and

o Existence of converted/reclassified residential areas of land for the past 6

years or more but still undeveloped (no development started).

B.4.3.3 The Development Thrust and Strategies

Indang local economy is largely agricultural based, however, employment in

utilities and service sectors are sustainable. Since the municipality wanted to keep

agriculture as their economy primary asset, crops production at this stage is on the

decreasing level due to inadequate technology support to this sector which result the

decrease of people interest on farming. Thus, the support of government and private

sectors for intensify agricultural developments are necessary.

67 | P a g e
 Broaden local economy to boost income level and widen employment

opportunity is therefore essential in dealing with development agenda. However,

during the process of identifying the best development option, it was recognized that

the municipality should be continuously develop and establish as center of agri-

tourism and has a potential as an agricultural trading center of upland Cavite due to

its geographical location.

Unlike other municipalities in the upland of Cavite, Indang has a favorable

slope for upland farm cultivation. It has six (6) major rivers with 88 natural springs

generating large volume of water with water Class “A” classification. Due to this

existence, the municipality is dealing with two seemingly opposite interest that simply

cannot co-exist, economic benefits and ecological balance. It is imperative to have a

diverse economic structure, however, the municipality wanted to keep the ecological

value of these natural resources which they considered as their primary asset.

Therefore, a development strategy that will push economic development and favors

ecological balance is best suited for local development. This concept led the

municipal government to adopt agri-tourism, eco-tourism and potable water

development.

As agricultural municipality, it was perceived that agri-tourism will strengthen

agriculture sector and will augment diverse economic structure. It also intends to put

an added value to agricultural activities while production is expected to improve at

the same time. Likewise, the same will likely motivate the local farmers and land

owners to continuously grow variety of fruit bearing trees as added attraction.

However, to support our agricultural sector, we must ensure more investments in

68 | P a g e
agricultural research, infrastructures, improve water governance and land use

policies, create strengthened extension system that will assist farmers to achieve

economic diversification, and access to credit facilities.

It is vital to keep the ecological value of natural environment of Indang. The

modernity must be balanced by green environment with natural beauty, protection

and conservation of river. It landscape will preserve and develop for tourism

promotion. We also have a great desire to create trademark from outside

perspective. So, we aimed to preserve the historical and valuable Filipino culture &

landmarks, and the education sector will have a great participation in pursuing the

latter strategy particularly in cultural enhancement.

Considering the six (6) major rivers with 88 natural springs, Indang appears to

be a water-rich town of Cavite with class “A” water classification Yet, the large

volume of water can be utilize to augment the household requirement as well as to

carry out different economic activities of adjacent municipalities and cities of the

province. In support of this development strategy, viable institutional arrangements

for water administration and investment proposals for potable water development

must be considered

69 | P a g e
Thrust and strategies listed below will serve as a general guide to pursue the

development of Indang:

DEVELOPMENT DEVELOPMENT STRATEGIES

THRUST

1.Intensified agricultural - Crops and livestock development;

development - High valued crop production & agri-processing
program that will uplift income level;
- Investments in agricultural research and
infrastructure and improve water management;
- Strengthen the agriculture sector through the
support of active community based organizations as
partners
2. Agri-tourism .
- Establish as Agricultural Trading Center of upland
Cavite;
- Improvement of agricultural activities, products and
its land use policies;
- Diversified economic structure that will enlarge
employment opportunities;
- Enactment of Local Investment and Incentive Code;
- Enhancement of municipal Agri-Demo farm;
- Adopt a Farm program;
- Formulation of Municipal Tourism Master Plan
- Enrichment of agricultural activities; and
- Showcase craftsmanship using local products and
materials;
3. Eco-tourism
- Preserve and improve the river and landscape for
tourism promotion;
- Preserve the historical and valuable Filipino culture
& landmarks;
- Enhancement of the historical churches not only for
worship but as heritage sites
- Protecting and maintain the natural environment
setting.
4. A source of quality
potable water for Cavite - Potable water development;
province - Public-Private Partnership Agreement;
- Natural springs preservation and river protection;
- Sanitation and wastewater management; and

70 | P a g e
 - Sustainable utilization of surface water resources.
.

71 | P a g e
B.5 The Development Concept/Structure Plan

The spatial development framework will provide the structure plan of this

municipality for the physical, social and economic development, environmental

management. This addresses the concerns for food security, settlement

development and ecological balance or environmental aspects. Because every

individual added to the population requires additional space for living, space for

making a living, and space for infrastructure support, the built environment increases

in size while the unbuilt environment is correspondingly reduced, so the demand-

supply balancing approach is essential in determining land uses policies for

settlement development, production land use, protection land use, and infrastructure

development.

The land use plan and zoning ordinance for the municipality is formulated

through the consideration of the following physical/spatial development framework

listed below:

- The spatial expansion of the urban core to its surrounding barangays on

which urbanization is visible;

- Provide sustainable land use framework for social and economic

development;

- The promotion of agriculture and other agri-related businesses;

- Conservation and optimal utilization of prime agricultural resources;

- The development of Indang as center of agri-tourism, along with the historic

Andres Bonifacio Shrine in brgy. Limbon where he was captured;

- The visible urban growth areas along the Calumpang Cerca-Bancod road;

72 | P a g e
 - Spatial expansion of urban central part of Poblacion on the contiguous site of

new municipal hall;

- The perceptible urban growth areas surrounding the place of Indang National

High School annex at brgy. Calumpang Cerca;

- Development of Municipal Agri- Demo Farm at barangay Banaba Lejos;

- Proposed Socialized Housing Site at Brgy. Bancod, and Mataas na Lupa;

- Viable institutional arrangements for water administration and investment

proposals for Indang bulk water as possible source of potable water within the

province of Cavite and for energy sector development; and

- Enhancement of the historical churches not only for worship but as heritage

sites

B.5.1 The existing Land Use

The Poblacion is the urban core of the municipality. It is bounded on the north

by Calumpang Cerca, on the south by Buna Cerca, on the east by Jordan River and

on the west by Tibagan River. It is composed of four (4) urban barangays, with an

aggregate total land area of about 108.53 hectares. Urban land use features seven

major uses such as residential, commercial, institutional, parks and functional open

spaces, infrastructure/utilities, protected areas, and agricultural areas as shown in

Table17.

Table 17: Existing Urban Land Use Municipality of Indang

Land Use Categories Existing Area (Has) Percent (%) to Total

Urban-use Areas 54.760 50.46
Residential 29.385 27.08
Commercial 8.921 8.22
Institutional 4.057 3.74
Parks and functional open space 6.813 6.28

73 | P a g e
 Infrastructure/Utilities 5.584 5.14
Easement and Water Bodies 5.250 4.84
Agricultural Areas 48.520 44.70
TOTAL 108.530 100.00
Source:Municipal Planning & Development Office

Residential areas are portions of the urban growth areas which are devoted

primarily for housing purposes. Around 29.385 hectares or 27.08percent of the total

urban (Poblacion) area is utilized for residential purposes.

Commercial area in the Poblacion covers a total of about 8.921 hectares or

8.22 percent of the total urban area. Existing areas devoted for this purpose are

located along De Ocampo Street and spiral street/road of San Miguel-Balagtas-San

Gregorio Streets which form as a Central Business District (CBC) of the Poblacion,

small scale commercial activities such as parlors, eatery/canteen, bakeries and

health clinics, computer/internet shops are found along Mabini and some part of San

Gregorio Streets. Other commercial establishments are banks, money transfer

outlets, pawnshops, auto supplies, hardware/construction supplies, groceries and

other general merchandise. Institutional areas are the land occupied by government

buildings and religious centers as well as other structures catering to the provision of

public services similar to schools and rural health center. It covers an aggregate total

area of 4.057 hectares or 3.74 percent of the total Poblacion area.

Parks and functional open space such as playground, plazas, cemeteries

which primarily serve as breathing space occupying around 6.813 hectares or 6.28

percent of the total urban area. These include the parks fronting the municipal trial

court and municipal hall, Indang catholic cemetery near De Ocampo Street and (4)

along Mojica Street. Similar facilities which are found within various academic

74 | P a g e
institutions such as schools are excluded from this use. These facilities are included

among the amenities of the said institution.

Infrastructure/utilities in the Poblacion cover a total of 5.584 hectares or 5.14

percent of the total urban area. These areas are occupied by telecommunications

antenna towers including roads and right of way. Easement and Water Bodies are

areas along the rivers slope, including water bodies and its tributaries. They are

about 5.250 hectares or 4.84 percent of the total rural areas. A total of 48.520

hectares or 44.70 percent of the total Poblacion area are still utilized for agricultural

purposes such as high value crops cultivation and other agricultural products.

B.5.1.2 Existing Rural Land Use

The rural area is composed of 32 barangay with the total area of 8,811.470

hectares or 98.78 % of the total municipal land area. Rural land uses features five (5)

primary uses such as urban-use areas, agri-demo farm & material recovery facility,

protected areas, and agricultural areas.

In rural barangays, the urban-use areas are settlement areas in rural

barangays. These are usually found at the heart of the barangay. They occupy

around 650.574 hectares or 7.38 percent of the total rural area (see Table 18). These

are residential area, commercial area, industrial area, tourism area, parks and

functional open spaces such as playground, plazas, cemeteries which primarily

serve as breathing space, institutional areas which are occupied by government

buildings and religious centers as well as other structures catering to the provision of

public services similar to learning center/schools and rural health stations, and the

75 | P a g e
areas occupied by infrastructure/utilities are telecommunications antenna towers

including roads and right of ways.

Table18: Existing Rural Land Use Municipality of Indang

Land Use Categories Existing Area (Has) Percent (%) to Total

Urban-use Areas 650.574 7.38
Residential 420.014 4.77
Commercial 13.067 0.15
Institutional 104.850 1.19
Parks and functional open space 2.075 0.02
Infrastructure/Utilities 97.936 1.11
Industrial Areas 2.340 0.03
Tourism areas 10.292 0.11
Agri-Demo Farm 3.968 0.05
Material Recovery Facility 0.800 0.01
Easement and Water Bodies 1,015.230 11.52
Agricultural Areas 7,140.898 81.04
TOTAL 8,811.470 100.00
Source:Municipal Planning & Development Office

Agri-Demo farm and material recovery facility occupy an area of about 4.768

hectares or 0.06 percent of total rural area. It is owned and managed by the

municipal government. Easement and Water Bodies are areas along the rivers slope,

including water bodies and its tributaries. They are about 1,015.230 hectares or

11.52 percent of the total rural areas.

The agricultural lands occupy about 7,140.898 hectares or 81.04 percent of

the total rural area. They are predominantly land devoted to planting of coconut,

banana, coffee, fruit trees, pineapples, root crops, vegetables, and other upland

crops. It also includes the area utilized for agri-industrial, poultry, and livestock

production.

76 | P a g e
B.5.1.3 Existing General Land Use

The existing general land use is the combination of existing land use of urban

and rural barangays. As a result of the actual land use survey conducted by the

Municipal Planning Staff, the municipality exhibits major general land-use

classification. These are the urban-use/built-up areas, agri-demo farm & material

recovery facility, protected areas, and agricultural areas.

Table19: Existing General Land Use Municipality of Indang

Land Use Categories Existing Area (Has) Percent(%) to Total

Urban-use Areas 705.334 7.91
Residential 449.399 5.04
Commercial 21.988 0.25
Institutional 108.907 1.22
Parks and functional open space 8.888 0.10
Infrastructure/Utilities 103.520 1.16
Industrial Areas 2.340 0.03
Tourism areas 10.292 0.11
Agri-Demo Farm 3.968 0.04
Material Recovery Facility 0.800 0.01
Easement and Water Bodies 1,020.480 11.44
Agricultural Areas 7,189.418 80.60
TOTAL 8,920.000 100.00
Source: Municipal Planning & Development Office

5.1.3.1 Urban-use Areas

Increase in population and economic developments however, propelled the

municipality’s growth and transformed the lands into urban-use areas. Urban-use

areas consist of residential, commercial, institutional, tourism, industrial, functional

77 | P a g e
open space, and infrastructure and utilities land uses. These uses occupy a total

area of 705.334 hectares or 7.91 percent of the total land area.

Table 20: Distribution of Urban-use Areas, Urban and Rural Municipality of Indang

Distribution
Total Urban-use Area Urban-use Area Urban-use Area
(Urban) (Rural)
Land Use Categories % to % to % to % to
Area Total Total Area Total Area Total
(Has) Land Urban (Has) Area per (Has) Area per
Area Growth Land Land use
Area use Category
Category
Residential 449.399 5.04 63.72 29.385 6.54 420.014 93.46
Commercial 21.988 0.25 3.12 8.921 40.57 13.067 59.43
Institutional 108.907 1.22 15.44 4.057 3.73 104.850 96.27
Parks and functional
open space 8.888 0.10 1.26 6.813 76.65 2.075 23.35
Infrastructure/Utilities 103.520 1.16 14.67 5.584 5.39 97.936 94.61
Industrial Areas 2.340 0.03 0.33 - - 2.340 100.00
Tourism areas 10.292 0.11 1.46 - - 10.292 100.00
TOTAL (Urban Growth 705.334 7.91% 100.00% 54.760 7.76% 650.574 92.24%
Area)
Source: Municipal Planning & Development Office

Urban-use areas are settlement areas in both urban and rural barangays.

Presently these areas occupy only a minimal of 7.91 percent of the total land area of

the municipality. The total urban growth area of 705.334 hectares is divided into: In

urban, it has 54.760 hectares or 7.76 percent of total urban growth area while in

rural, it has 650.574hectares or 92.24 percent of the total urban growth areas.

B.5.1.3.1 Residential Areas

Residential areas are the major urban growth land use category, with a total

area of 449.399 hectares constituting about 63.72 percent of total urban growth area.

78 | P a g e
These are about 5.04 percent of the total land area. Urban residential areas are

about 6.54 percent of the total residential areas while rural is 93.46 percent. With the

total household population of 13,061, the total residential area-household density is

29 households per hectare of residential areas. With urban household of 1,168, the

urban residential area household density is 40 households per hectare.

Rural residential area-household density is 28 households per hectare given

the rural household of 11,893. These densities give the average lot size per

household as follows: 345 square meters lot per household for the total residential

area; 250 square meters lot per household for urban areas and 357 square meters

lot per household for rural areas.

B.5.1.3.2 Commercial Areas

Commercial activities occupy only 21.988 hectares. These are only about

3.12 percent of the total urban growth area and 0.25 percent of the total land area.

The major commercial activities are concentrated in the Poblacion area, which

constitutes about 40.57 percent of the total commercial area. The remaining 59.43

percent of commercial areas are distributed to different rural barangays and cluster

settlement areas. The commercial activities included wholesale/retail trade, business

and personal services shops, manufacturing and financing services.

B.5.1.3.3 InstitutionalAreas

Institutional areas include those which are occupied by institutions both

government and private which caters the educational and medical needs of the

79 | P a g e
population. Land occupied by administrative building and religious institutions are

also included. The current land areas occupied by these establishments or

institutions have a total of 108.907 hectares or 15.44 percent of the total urban

growth areas and equivalent to 1.22 percent of the total land area. Of these, 4.057

hectares or 3.73 percent to total area per land use category are in urban (Poblacion)

area and the remaining 104.850 hectares or 96.27 percent are distributed to the

different rural barangays.

B.5.1.3.4 Park and Functional Open Spaces

Functional open spaces are open land development areas which cater to a

specific function. These include plaza and parks for rest and recreation both active

and passive including cemetery for the care of the dead. These spaces occupy a

total area of 8.888 hectares or about 1.26 percent to total urban growth areas or 0.10

percent of the total land area. The 6.813 hectares or 76.65 percent to total area per

land use category are in the urban areas and the rest of the functional open spaces

like cemetery are in Barangay Daine II and Guyam Malaki which occupy an area of

2.075 hectares or 23.35 percent of the total municipal functional open spaces.

B.5.1.3.5 Infrastructure/Utilities

The category covered is areas occupied by roads, water utilities and

communication facilities. It covers an area of 103.520 hectares or about 14.67

percent of the total urban growth areas (1.16 percent of the total land area). These

consist of road network like municipal, national, provincial, barangay road including

80 | P a g e
farm to market road which provide mobility and accessibility to all parts of the

municipality at varying road width.

81 | P a g e
 Whereas, the communication facilities in Indang like PLDT, DIGITEL, Smart,

Sun cellular and Globe mobile base station towers and water utilities occupy an area

in the different parts of the municipality. It includes the transmission line that crosses

this municipality which is part of Calaca-Dasmariñas 230 KV Transmission line route

of National Power Corporation (NPC). These crosses along barangays of Buna

Lejos, Mahabang Kahoy Cerca and Kayquit 3 and occupies an area of 9.18 hectares

B.5.1.3.6 Industrial areas

Industrial areas are areas occupied by old ASAMA and Filipinas Water

Bottling Company which is about 2.34 hectares or 0.03 percent. B.5.1.3.1.7.

B.5.1.3.7 Tourism Areas

Tourism areas occupy only 10.292 hectares or about 1.46 percent of the total

urban growth areas. These areas are occupied by Bonifacio Shrine in barangay

Limbon and private resorts or establishments such as: Alta Rios Resort, Queen Anne

Resort, LouFil Resort, Hacienda Isabella, La Felicidad Resort, and Red & Green

Farm Garden.

B.5.1.3.8 Agri-Demo Farm and Material Recovery Facility

The agri-demo farm and material recovery facility occupy an area of about

4.768 hectares or 0.06 percent of total rural area. It is owned and managed by the

municipal government. The agri-demo farm is developed to capture the people’s

interest on how agriculture works in the upland areas. On the other hand, the

Material Recovery Facility (MRF) is established to recover the reusable and

82 | P a g e
recyclable materials from collected municipal solid wastes while promoting the safe

and environmentally sound recovery of recyclable materials in the existing controlled

dumpsite wherein the residual waste are transported to accredited sanitary landfill.

B.5.1.3.9 Easement and Water Bodies

These are the areas along the rivers slope, including water bodies and its

tributaries. It is considered as protected areas. They are about 1,020.48 hectares or

11.44 percent of the total land area.

B.5.1.3.10 Agricultural Areas

The major land use is agricultural which occupies 7,189.418 hectares. This

constitutes about 80.60 percent of the total land area. Agricultural areas consist of

agricultural croplands, agri-industrial and commercial farms rising such as swine &

broiler production, and other backyard livestock like cattle, piggery, and poultry. It

includes the areas identified by the Office of the Municipal Agriculturist as Strategic

Agricultural and Fisheries Development Zone (SAFDZ) pursuant to RA. 8435 since

they produced crops and fruits well and generate income. This is about 40.20% of

total agricultural areas of the municipality or 2,890.146 hectares.

B.5.2 The land use plan analysis

B.5.2.1 Quantified Requirements

Increase in population and economic activity entails corresponding land

allocation for urban-use areas or settlement areas. The need for housing and other

social services as well as infrastructure and utilities support facilities has to be

83 | P a g e
provided with land spaces for adequate, effective, and efficient service. The

quantified requirements for the components of urban growth uses such as

residential, commercial, institutional, functional open spaces and roads are

necessary to determine how much land should be made available within the planning

period, compatibility of uses and national land use management.

B.5.2.2 Bases for Future Requirement

The projected population for both urban and rural distribution will adopt the

land use planning standards being used by the Housing and Land Use Regulatory

Board (HLRB) to determine future requirements.

The population figures the municipality of Indang from year 2010 to 2020 as follows:

Planning Period 2010 2020

Total Population 62,030 75,032

Urban Population 5,743 6,948

Rural Population 56,287 68,084

No. of Households 13,061 15,799

Urban Household 1,168 1,413

Rural Household 11,893 14,386

84 | P a g e
The HLURB Land Use Planning Standards considered are as follows:

Residential - 180 square meter per lot per household (Urban)

240 square meter per lot per household (Rural)

Commercial - 1.5 to 3.0 % of total built-up

Institutional - 5 hectares per 15,000 populations

Roads - 2.4 kilometers per 1,000 populations

- 1 kilometer per 100 hectares of arable land at 8 meter

wide

Industrial - 0.8 hectare per 1,000 populations

Functional Open Spaces:

Park and Plaza - 500 square meter pocket parks per 1,000 populations

Cemetery - 2.4 square meter per burial lot /deaths

B.5.2.3 Urban-use Area requirement for Major urban growth center (Poblacion)

The projected household by year 2020 was allocated the standard residential

lot size of 180 square meters each. This will serve as a benchmark for expansion

consideration in the major urban growth center like the Poblacion. The additional

area of 4.410 hectares was allocated for the purpose.

Commercial activities, particularly the major businesses are intensifying at the

urban core or Poblacion Area. It is one strategy to maintain and further strengthen

the role of Poblacion as the Major Urban Growth Center, thus, the expansion of

commercial activities along the contiguous site of new municipal hall and public

85 | P a g e
market are consider. The expansion of 1.600 hectares is considered based on

HLURB planning standard.

The existing institutional areas may seem adequate within the planning

period. It is the areas occupied by institutions both government and private which

caters educational and medical needs. It also includes the land occupied by

government administrative buildings and by religious and cultural institutions.

However, present actual use is just adequate for the present. With the present use

being adequate, the influx of additional population may affect the efficient functioning

of the institutions. Thus, the net increase of urban population from 2011-2020 the

1.000 hectare was allocated for this uses. At present, the parks and playgrounds in

the urban areas are seems inadequate. The need of 1.000 hectare additional space

for this purpose was considered.

Mobility of people and goods within the urban areas was also provided in the

requirements. The expansion of urban central part of Poblacion on the contiguous

part of J. Dimabiling street and A. Mojica street to junction of Calumpang Cerca is

plan and consider for Plan Unit Development Area (combined development option for

institutional with commercial component). Land allocation for this purpose is about

3.500 hectares.

86 | P a g e
 Table 21: Urban-use Area allocation (Poblacion) Municipality of Indang

Additional Land Total Land

Land Use Categories Existing Area Requirements Allocation
(Hectare) (Hectare) (Hectare)
Residential 29.385 4.410 33.795
Commercial 8.921 1.600 10.521
Institutional 4.057 1.000 5.057
Parks and functional open 6.813 1.000 7.813
space
Infrastructure/Utilities 5.584 0.750 6.334
Plan Unit Development Area 3.500 3.500
TOTAL 54.760 8.76012.260 63.52067.020
Source:Municipal Planning & Development Office

With all the above consideration, additional urban-use area requirement for

the Poblacion is 8.760 hectares. With the existing areas of 54.760 hectares, the

major urban-use allocation is 63.520 hectares by year 2020. See table above.

B.5.2.4 Urban-use Area Requirement (Rural)

In determining urban-use area requirements in the rural areas, net increase in

population and household was generally considered.Residential uses, net increase

in the number of households from 2011-2020 was used, the standard of 240 sq. m.

per lot per household was adopted instead of 357 sq. m. based on existing

residential lot size to minimize residential area requirement.

Population based standard for commercial use area was adopted to provide

for commercial needs of the population in rural barangays, considering the net

increase in population for next 10 years, the existing commercial areas may seem

adequate. However, in consideration of proximity of Indang in Trece Martires City (a

seat of Provincial Government) and distance from City of Tagaytay, the area for Plan

87 | P a g e
Unit Development (PUD) is considered. Plan Unit Development (PUD) was planned

to accommodate the areas for combined development options (residential

development with minimum lot size of 500 sg. meters or combination of tourism with

agriculture development or tourism-commercial development. The area allocated for

the purpose is about 124.90 hectares is shown in the Zoning Map.

The existing institutional areas may seem adequate within the planning period

considering the standard of 5 hectares per 15,000 populations. It is the areas

occupied by institutions both government and private which caters educational and

medical needs. It also includes the land occupied by government administrative

buildings and by religious and cultural institutions.

Infrastructure/Utilities particularly road was projected based on the planning

standard. With the current road network, the municipality is still in need of an

additional 45.077 kilometers of access road and 25.464 kilometers farm-to- market

road or equivalent to 82.901 hectares.

At present, the parks and playgrounds in the urban areas are seems

inadequate. The need of 1.000 hectare additional space for this purpose was

considered.

Considering the net increase of municipal population from 2011-2020 with the

standard of per 0.8 hectare per 1,000 populations for industrial area requirements,

the 60.025 hectares is required. However, only 22.671 hectares is allocated in

Barangay Mataas na Lupa for Light Industrial use (intended exclusively for

company/Industries with environmental-friendly operation as declared by DENR and

88 | P a g e
other government agencies) considering the existence of several industrial estates in

Cavite.

Promotion of local tourism both government and private sectors will generate

an awareness and interest to domestic tourism. The additional 2.0 hectares will be

allocated for tourism development and promotion.

Table 22: Urban-use Area allocation (Rural) Municipality of Indang

Additional Land Total Land

Land Use Categories Existing Area Requirements Allocation
(Hectare) (Hectare) (Hectare)
Residential 420.014 44.874 464.888
Commercial 13.067 10.000 23.067
Institutional 104.850 - 104.850
Parks and functional open 2.075 1.500 3.575
space
Infrastructure/Utilities 97.936 82.901 180.837
Industrial Areas 2.340 22.671 25.011
Tourism areas 10.292 2.000 12.292
Plan Unit Development Area 124.900 124.900
TOTAL 650.574 163.946 288.846 869.280 939.420
Source:Municipal Planning & Development Office

With the above consideration, additional urban-use area requirement is

163.946 hectares. With the existing areas of 650.574 hectares, the total urban land

allocation for rural barangays is 939.420 hectares by year 2020. See table above.

B.5.2.5 Total Additional Urban-use Area Requirement

Summing up the additional urban-use area requirements for two settlement

areas, the total is 301.106 hectares of land. Table23 shows the summary of

additional urban-use land requirement from two settlement areas.

89 | P a g e
Table 23: Additional Urban-use Area Requirement, Year 2020 Municipality of Indang

Total Additional
Land Use Categories Urban-use Area Urban-use Area Urban-use Area
(Urban) (Rural) (Hectare) Requirement
(Hectare) (Hectare)
Residential 4.410 44.874 49.284
Commercial 1.600 10.000 11.600
Institutional 1.000 - 1.000
Parks and functional open 1.000 1.500 2.500
space
Infrastructure/Utilities 0.750 82.901 83.651
Industrial Areas - 22.671 22.671
Tourism areas - 2.000 2.000
Plan Unit Development Areas 3.500 124.900 128.400
TOTAL 8.760 12.260 163.946 288.846 172.706 301.106
Source:Municipal Planning & Development Office

B.5.2.6 Total Urban-use Area Allocation

Considering the sum of additional land requirement by land use categories

(existing urban-use area plus the total additional urban-use area), the total urban-use

area allocations by year 2020 was determined.

Table 24: Total Urban-use Area Allocation, Year 2020 Municipality of Indang

Existing Urban- Total Additional Total Urban-use

Land Use Categories use Area Urban- use Area Area Allocation
(Hectare) Requirement (Hectare)
(Hectare)
Residential 449.399 49.284 498.683
Commercial 21.988 11.600 33.588
Institutional 108.907 1.000 109.907
Parks and functional open 8.888 2.500 11.388
space
Infrastructure/Utilities 103.520 83.651 187.171
Industrial Areas 2.340 22.671 25.011
Tourism areas 10.292 2.000 12.292
Plan Unit Development Areas 128.400 128.400
TOTAL 705.334 172.706 301.106 878.040
1,006.440
Source:Municipal Planning & Development Office

90 | P a g e
Thus, total urban-use area land requirement for year 2020 is 1,006.440 hectares.

B.5.3 The Total Land Utilization until the year 2020

Combining the total urban-use area land requirement, the total land utilization

by the end of the planning period is shown below.

Table 25: Total Land Utilization, Year 2020 Municipality of Indang

Existing Land Additional Land Total Land (%)

Land Use Categories Use Area Requirement Utilization Percent to
(Hectare) (Hectare) (Hectare) Total Area
Residential 449.399 49.284 498.683 5.59
Commercial 21.988 11.600 33.588 0.38
Institutional 108.907 1.000 109.907 1.23
Parks and functional open 8.888 2.500 11.388 0.13
space
Infrastructure/Utilities 103.520 83.651 187.171 2.10
Industrial Areas 2.340 22.671 25.011 0.28
Tourism areas 10.292 2.000 12.292 0.14
Plan Unit Development Areas 128.400 128.400 1.44
Agri-Demo Farm 3.968 - 3.968 0.04
Material Recovery Facility 0.800 - 0.800 0.01
Easement and Water Bodies 1,020.480 - 1,020.480 11.44
Agricultural Areas 7,189.418 - (172.706 6,888.312 78.66 77.22
301.106)
TOTAL 8,920.000 8,920.000 100.00
Source:Municipal Planning & Development Office

B.6 Land use Policies and Principles

The State declares its land use policies and principles in terms of relation to

national economy and patrimony as well as its police power for the promotion of

public health, public safety, public interest, public order and general welfare, utilizing

land and water resources to ensure that the future quality of living environment are

within the life-sustaining level.

91 | P a g e
Consequently, the municipal land use component areas and its policies and

principles are as follows:

B.6.1 Settlements Areas

 Enforce the provision as to setback, yard requirements, bulk easement, and

other restriction;

 Strictly conform with the requirements of the National Building Code and

Structural Code as well as all laws, ordinances, design standards, rules and

regulation related to the land development constructions of the various safety

codes;

 Provision of adequate socio-economic and administrative support facilities

and utilities; and

 Strictly enforced the provision of local zoning ordinance along with other

related laws and restrictions.

B.6.2 Production Areas

 Regulate the conversion of agricultural land into non-agricultural uses;

 Provision of essential support physical infrastructure and services such as

farm-to-market roads, credit/lending facilities, technology and marketing of

farm produced;

 Strict compliance on the proper hygiene practices in the production of poultry

and livestock;

 Enact code containing investment incentives and economic promotions;

92 | P a g e
  Provision of adequate trade and industry support facilities and utilities; and

 Strictly enforced the provision of local zoning ordinance along with other

related laws and restrictions.

B.6.3 Easement and Water Bodies

 Regulate the conversion of agricultural land into non-agricultural uses;

 Enact code containing the conservation, preservation and management of

natural springs, rivers and its tributary of this municipality;

 Enforce and implement the RA 9279 (Clean Water Act-2004), RA 9003 (Solid

Waste Mgt. Act-2000), and PD 856 (Sanitation Code of the Philippines) and

other related laws;

 Designation of the Cañas and Malimango rivers as water quality management

area; and

 Strictly enforced the provision of local zoning ordinance along with other

related laws and restrictions.

B.6.4 Infrastructure Areas

 Provision of essential physical agricultural infrastructures and support utilities

for farm development;

 Provision of quality infrastructure standards in existing public services and

utilities;

 Provide circulation system to induce future development in identified growth

areas;

93 | P a g e
  Provide physical base for social and economic development as well as

provide infrastructure support requirement of other development sectors, and

 Provision of support infrastructures to reduce vulnerability of people to natural

and man-made disaster.

B.7 Priority Programs and Projects

The programs and projects listed below would support for the social and

economic development essential for the improvement of the living condition of the

residents.

B.7.1 Social Sector

The proposed programs and projects covered by this sector seeks to improve

the state of well-being of the residents and upgrading the quality of social services

such as education, health, sports and recreations, housing, welfare, protective/public

safety. It also addressed the equity, social justice, gender concerns and those of

vulnerable groups.

B.7.1.1 Education Programs/Projects:

1. Establishment of daycare center in six (6) barangay;

2. Construction of additional classrooms;

3. Maintenance/Improvement of school buildings, learning center and facilities;

4. Acquisition of site for Municipal High School and classroom construction;

5. Recreation and sports programs & activities;

94 | P a g e
 6. Maintenance/Improvement of school sports and recreation facilities;

B.7.1.2 Health care Programs/Projects:

1. Maintenance/Improvement of municipal health center, facilities and utilities;

2. Improvement of municipal health center as center for birthing place;

3. Acquisition of site for Municipal Hospital and construction;

4. Sanitation and wastewater management;

5. Expansion of municipal cemetery;

6. Maintenance/Improvement of existing municipal cemetery;

B.7.1.3 Sports and Recreation Development Programs/Projects:

1. Maintenance/Improvement of municipal and barangay covered courts;

2. Improvement of basketball courts in every barangay into covered court;

3. Maintenance/Improvement/Expansion of parks and playground.

B.7.1.4 Local Housing Programs/Projects:

1. Land acquisition and infrastructure development;

2. Shelter/housing infrastructure projects;

3. Housing development;

B.7.1.5 Social Welfare Programs/Projects:

1. Program on child & youth welfare, family & community welfare, welfare of

elderly, and disabled person;

2. Improve MSWD office

95 | P a g e
 3. Practical Skills development/Livelihood training;

4. Maintenance/Improvement of Senior Citizen building & facilities/MWSD Office;

B.7.1.6 Protective Services Programs/Projects:

1. Instalations of CCTV/ camera along the main roads in the Poblacion areas

and in other barangays;

2. Acquisition of site for Police, Fire station & sub-stations;

3. Construction of barangay tanod outpost and check points in all barangay.

4. Street lighting projects;

5. Review, revision and enforcement of traffic ordinance;

6. Provision and improvement of traffic support facilities;

B.7.2 Economic Sector

The programs and projects involves in this sector are the enhancement of

natural economy and ensure the economy is in the environment favorable to

promotes agri-tourism, business and industry to grow and eventually assured the

residents of steady supply of goods and services and of jobs and stable household

income.

B.7.2.1 Agricultural Development Programs/Projects:

1. Crops and livestock development;

2. Agricultural productivity and marketing enhancement program;

3. Farm-to-Market road development;

4. Agri/Eco-Tourism projects;

5. Improvement of market infrastructures;

96 | P a g e
 6. Establishment of market trading post;

7. Establishment of composting facilities for the production of compost fertilizer;

8. Development/Improvement of Agri-Demo farm and other facilities;

9. Integrated sustainable farming program;

10. Adopt-A-Farm Program;

11. Maintenance/Improvement of Public Market & Slaughterhouse;

12. Construction and establishment of livelihood training center;

B.7.2.2 Commerce, Trade and Industry Support Programs/Projects:

1. Revision/Updating of Comprehensive land use Plan (CLUP) and Zoning

Ordinance;

2. Tourism and other economic development investment program;

3. Local enterprises investment program; and

4. Surface water resources utilization program and potable water development;

and

5. Program on peace and order, and public safety;

6. Construction of livelihood training center;

7. Tourism and other economic infrastructure projects;

8. Improvement and maintenance of public market and slaughter house;

9. Potable water development; and

10. Natural springs preservation projects;

7. ablishment of public library & museum;

B.7.2.3 Surface Water Resources Investment Program:

1. Potable water development.

97 | P a g e
 2. Infrastructure support building projects & land acquisition required as right-of-

way or easements of waterworks facilities & utilities;

3. Natural springs preservation projects;

4. River protection projects;

98 | P a g e
B.7.2.4 Local Tourism Development Programs/Projects:

1. Formulation of Municipal Tourism Master Plan;

2. Promotion of valuable historical traditions and cultural landmarks;

3. Development/Improvement of public market facilities and utilities;

4. Tourism support programs, infrastructure building projects & land acquisition;

5. Promotion of nature trail/path, springs and other sports & recreational

attractions;

6. Development of unexplored scenic spots and natural attractions; and

7. Preservation of old Municipal hall and other historic structures;

8. Construction of public transport terminal, and other tourism support

infrastructure building projects & land acquisition;

9. Resort development investment projects without affecting the natural features

of environment;

B.7.3 Infrastructure and Physical Sector

The programs and projects under this sector deals with the built environment

such as infrastructure building program and the land acquisition required as right-of-

way or easements of public facilities. It also include physical development proposals

for the redevelopment of old and declining sections of the municipality, opening of

new settlement areas and development of new growth centers. It lays the physical

base of social and economic development of the area as well as provide

infrastructure support requirement of other development sectors.

99 | P a g e
B.7.3.1 Economic Infrastructure Support Programs/Projects:

1. Installation of Deepwells/Water reservoirs for crops & livestock production;

2. Construction and improvement of Farm-to-Market road;

3. Construction of post-harvest facilities;

4. Improvement of Municipal Agri-Demo farm;

5. Improvement/Maintenance of public market facilities;

6. Redevelopment of old and declining road sections;

7. Maintenance/Improvement of roads and construction of bridges:

8. Land acquisition of right-of-way for and establishment of new growth area;

9. Construction of livelihood training center;

10. Public Transport Terminal site acquisition and construction;

11. Implementation of infrastructure investment projects;

12. Natural springs preservation projects and river protection projects;

13. Support-infrastructure for sanitation and wastewater management;

14. Facilities and utilities for potable water development;

15. Maintenance/Improvement of existing public administrative, social, and

economic support infrastructure facilities and utilities.

B.7.3.2 Social Infrastructure Support Programs/Projects:

1. Schools and facilities improvement program;

2. Municipal health center and barangay health station and facilities;

3. Sports and recreation development programs;

4. Provision of local socialized housing basic facilities & utilities;

5. Facilities for the aged and disadvantaged sectors; and

6. Maintenance/improvement of other existing social buildings & facilities;

100 | P a g e
 7. Facilities for protective and public safety.

B.7.3.3 Public Administrative Infrastructure Support Programs/Projects:

1. Construction of new Municipal Hall;

2. Construction of BFP building/office;

3. Improvement and maintenance of existing public administrative support

buildings and infrastructures;

4. Improvement/Maintenance of Heroes Park, Rizal Park, and Bonifacio Shrine;

and

5. Acquisition of new lot for Park and Playground and development.

B.7.4 Environmental Management Sector

The programs under this sector provide mitigating and preventive measures

for the anticipated impacts on the environmental implications of all development

proposals and activities in Indang. It also embodies projects for the protection of the

watershed areas, maintaining and preserving the quality of natural resources to

sustain ecological balance across generations. It also includes measures to minimize

the vulnerability of the residents to natural hazard and disasters.

B.7.4.1 Natural Resources Management Programs/Projects:

1. Projects for the maintenance/improvement of water quality (both surface and

underground);

2. Tree Planting Project;

3. Slope protection projects;

101 | P a g e
 4. Climate Change mitigating projects;

5. Natural springs preservation projects;

6. River protection projects;

7. Sanitation and wastewater management;

8. Solid waste management.

___________________________________________________________________

THE ZONING ORDINANCE (ZO) IN THE CAVITE

An ordinance revising the zoning regulations of the municipality of indang,

cavite and providing for the administration, enforcement and amendment thereof and

for the repeal of all ordinances in conflict therewith.

Be it enacted by the Sangguniang Bayan of Indang, Cavite.

WHEREAS, the implementation of Comprehensive Land Use Plans would

require the enactment of regulatory measures to translate its planning goals and

objectives into reality and a Zoning Ordinance is one such regulatory measure which

is important tool for the implementation of the comprehensive land use plan;

WHEREAS, the local government code authorizes local government units to

enact zoning ordinances subject to and in accordance with the existing laws;

102 | P a g e
 WHEREAS, the local governments are mandated to mainstream disaster risk

reduction and climate change in development processes such as policy formulation,

socio-economic development planning, budgeting, and governance, particularly in

the areas of environment, agriculture, water, energy, health, education, poverty

reduction, land-use and urban planning, and public infrastructure and housing;

WHEREAS, the Housing and Land Use Regulatory Board has spearheaded

and now assists in coordinates the activities of local governments in comprehensive

land use planning;

NOWTHEREF0RE, the Sangguniang Bayan of Indang, Cavite in a session

assembled hereby adopts the following zoning ordinance.

TITLE OF THE ORDINANCE

Section 1. Title of the Ordinance. This ordinance shall be known as the

Comprehensive Zoning Ordinance of the Municipality of Indang and shall be referred

to as the Ordinance.

103 | P a g e
ARTICLE II AUTHORITY AND PURPOSE

Section 2. Authority. This ordinance is enacted pursuant to the provisions of the New

Local Government Code, RA 7160 Sections 458 a.2 (7-9) and 447 a.2 (7-9) dated 10

October 1991, “Authorizing the Municipality through the Sangguniang Bayan to

adopt Zoning Ordinance subject to the provisions of existing laws’, and in conformity

with E.O. No. 72.

Section 3. Purposes. This ordinance is enacted for the following purposes:

1. Guide, control and regulate future growth and development of Indang, Cavite in

accordance with its Comprehensive Land Use Plan.

2. Protect the character and stability of residential, commercial, industrial,

institutional, agricultural, open space and other functional areas within the

locality and promote the orderly and beneficial development of the same.

3. Promote and protect the health, safety, peace and comfort, convenience and

general welfare of the inhabitants in the locality.

4. Ensure the protection and sustainability of the environment taking into

consideration climate change adaptation in synergy with disaster risk reduction

and management, principles of biodiversity, and preservation of historical and

cultural heritage, in all development processes.

104 | P a g e
Section 4.General Zoning Principle. This zoning regulation is based on the approved

Land Use Plans as per Resolution No. dated for.

ARTICLE III DEFINITION OF TERMS

The definition of technical terms used in the Zoning Ordinance shall carry the

same meaning given to them in already approved codes and regulations, such as

but not limited to the National Building Code, Water Code, Philippine Environmental

Code, Climate Change Act of 2009, Disaster Risk Reduction and Management of

2010 and other Implementing Rules and Regulations, promulgated by the HLURB.

The words, terms and phrases enumerated hereunder shall be understood to have

the meaning corresponding indicated as follows.

1. Agricultural Zone (AZ) – an area within the municipality intended for

cultivation/fishing and pastoral activities, e.g. fish, farming, cultivation of crops,

goat/cattle raising, etc.

2. HLURB/BOARD – shall mean the Housing and Land Use Regulatory Board.

3. Buffer Area – these are yards, parks or open spaces intended to separate

incompatible elements or uses to control pollution/nuisance and for identifying

and defining development areas or zones where no permanent structures are

allowed including buffer National Integrated Protected Areas System (NIPAS)

and Heritage.

4. Urban-use Area – a contiguous grouping of ten (10) or more structures.

105 | P a g e
 5. Certificate of Non-Conformance – certificate issued to owners of all uses

existing prior to the approval of the Zoning Ordinance, which does not conform

in a zone as per provision of the said Ordinance.

6. Compatible Use – uses or land activities capable of existing other

harmoniously, e.g. residential use, and parks and playground.

7. Comprehensive Land Use Plan (CLUP) – a document embodying specific

proposal for guiding, regulating growth and/or development. The main

components of the Comprehensive Land Use Plan in this usage are the

sectoral studies, i.e. Demography, Socio-Economic, Infrastructure and Utilities,

Local Administration and Land Use.

8. Conflicting Uses – uses or land activities with contrasting characteristics sited

adjacent to each other,

9. e.g. residential units adjacent to industrial plants.

10. Conforming Use – a use, which is in accordance with the zone classification as

provided for in the ordinance.

11. Easement – open space imposed on any land use/activities sited along

waterways, road-right- of-ways, cemeteries/memorial parks and utilities.

12. Environmentally Critical Areas – refer to those areas which are environmentally

sensitive and are listed in presidential proclamation 2146 dated December 14,

1981.

13. Environmentally Critical Projects – refer to those projects, which have high

potential for negative environmental impacts and are listed in presidential

proclamation 2146 dated December 14, 1981.

106 | P a g e
 14. Exception – a device which grants a property owner relief from certain

provisions of a Zoning Ordinance where because of the specific use would

result in a hardship upon the particular owner, as distinguished from a mere

inconvenience or a desire to make more money.

15. Floor Area Ratio (FAR) – is the ratio between the gross floor area of the

building and the area of the lot on which it stands, determined by dividing the

gross floor area and the area of the lot. The gross floor area of any building

should not exceed the prescribed floor area ratio (FAR) multiplied by the lot

area. The FAR of any zone should be based on its capacity to support

development in terms of the absolute level of density that the transportation

and other utility networks can support.

16. Residential-Commercial Zone (RCZ) – an area within the urban area

(Poblacion) of this municipality for dwelling, trading/services/business

purposes.

17. General Commercial Zone (GCZ) – an area within a municipality for

trading/services/business purposes.

18. General Residential Zone (GRZ) – an area within a municipality principally for

dwelling/housing purposes.

19. General Zoning Map – a duly authenticated map delineating the different zones

in which the whole municipality is divided.

20. Gross Floor Area (GFA) – the GFA of a building is the total floor space within

the perimeter of the permanent external building walls occupies by: Office

Areas, Residential Areas, Corridors; Lobbies, Mezzanine, Vertical

Penetrations, which shall mean stairs, fire escapes, elevator shafts, flues, pipe

shafts, vertical ducts, and the like, and their enclosing walls; Rest Rooms or

107 | P a g e
 Toilets; Machine Rooms and Closets; Storage Rooms and Closets; Covered

Balconies and terraces; Interior Walls and Columns, and Other interior

Features.

21. Locational Clearance – a clearance issued to a project that is allowed under

the provisions of this Zoning Ordinance as well as other standards, rules and

regulations on land use.

22. Mitigating Device – a means to grant relief in complying with certain provision

of the ordinance.

23. New Town – shall refer to a town deliberately planned and built which provides,

in addition to houses, employment, shopping, education, recreation, culture

and other services normally associated with a city or town.

24. Non-Conforming Use – existing non-conforming uses/establishments in an

area allowed to operate in spite of the non conformity to the provision of the

Ordinance subject to the conditions stipulated in this Zoning Ordinance.

25. Parks and Recreation Zone (PRZ) – an area designated for

diversion/amusements and for the maintenance of ecological balance of the

community.

26. Planned Unit Development (PUD) – it is a land development scheme wherein

project site is comprehensively planned as an entity via unitary site plan which

permits flexibility in planning/design, building sitting, complementary of building

types and land uses, usable open spaces and the preservation of the

significant natural land features.

27. Rezoning – a process of introducing amendments to or a change in the texts

and maps of the Zoning Ordinance. It also includes amendment or change in

view or reclassification under Section 20 of RA 7160.

108 | P a g e
 28. Rural Area – area outside of the designated urban areas.

29. Setback – the open space left between the building and the lot lines.

30. Socialized Housing Zone (SHZ) – shall be used principally for socialized

housing/dwelling purposes for the underprivileged and homeless as defined in

RA 7279.

31. Tourist Zone (TZ) – are sites within the municipalities endowed with natural or

manmade physical attributes and resources that are conductive to recreation,

leisure and other wholesome activities.

32. Urban Area(s) – include all barangay(s) or portion(s) of which comprising the

Central Business District (CBD) and other built-up areas including the

urbanizable land in and adjacent to said areas and where at least more than

fifty (50%) of the population are engaged in non-agricultural activities. CBD

shall refer to the areas designated principally for trade, services and business

purposes.

33. Urban Zoning Map – a duly authenticated map delineating the different zones

into which the urban area and its expansion area are divided.

34. Urbanizable Land – are designated as suitable for urban expansion by virtue of

land use studies conducted.

35. Variance – a specific locational clearance which grants a property owner relief

from certain provisions of Zoning Ordinance where, because of the particular,

physical surrounding, shape or topographical conditions of the property,

compliance on height, area, setback, bulk/and or density would result in a

particular hardship upon the owner, as distinguished from a mere

inconvenience or a desire to make more money.

109 | P a g e
 36. Warehouse – refers to a storage and/or depository of those in business of

performing warehouse services for others, for profit.

37. Water Zone (WZ) – are bodies of water within the municipalities, which include

rivers, streams, lakes and seas except those, included in other zone

classification.

38. Zone/District – an area within a municipality for specific land use as defined by

manmade or natural boundaries.

39. Zoning Administrator/ZoningOfficer – a municipal government employee

responsible for the implementation and enforcement of the Zoning Ordinance

in a community.

40. Zoning Ordinance – a local legal measure which embodies regulations

affecting land use.

___________________________________________________________________

ARTICLE IV ZONE CLASIFICATIONS

Section 5. Division into Zones. To effectively carry out the provision of this

Ordinance, the municipality is hereby divided into the following zones or districts as

shown in the Official Zoning Maps.

Urban Use Zones:

 General Residential Zone (GRZ)

 General Commercial Zone (GCZ)

110 | P a g e
  Residential-Commercial Zone (GIZ)

 Socialized Housing Zone (SHZ)

 General Institutional Zone (GIZ)

 Industrial Zone

 Parks and other Recreation Zone (PRZ)

Agricultural Zone (AZ)

Water Zone (WZ):

 Other Zones: (Municipal Agri-Demo Farm, and Material Recovery Facilities)

 Municipal Agri-Demo Farm; and

 Material Recovery Facilities

_________________________________________________________________

ARTICLE V ZONING MAPS

Section 6.Zoning Map. It is hereby adopted as an integral part of this Ordinance, the

official Zoning Map for the whole city/municipality wherein the designation, location

and boundaries of the zones established are indicated.

The official zoning map shall be signed by the /Municipal Mayor, the Vice Mayor as

presiding officer of the Sangguniang Bayan and duly authenticated by the

Sangguniang Panlalawigan/HLURB.

111 | P a g e
Section 7.Zone Boundaries. The location and boundaries of the above mentioned

various zones into which the municipality has been divided are hereby identified as

follows:

GENERAL RESIDENTIAL ZONE (GRZ)

1. GRZ- 1 - An area referred to as GRZ-1 in the Official Zoning Map are the lots

bounded by San Gregorio Street, Calderon Street, river, Callejon, except the

lot occupied by Indang East Elementary School and the lots zoned as RCZ-1;

2. GRZ- 2 - An area referred to as GRZ-2 in the Official Zoning Map are the lots

bounded by river, Callejon, San Miguel , San Gregorio, and Calderon Streets,

road going to Barangay Kayquit, except the lot occupied by Indang Central

Elementary School and lot numbers 5386 and 16511-A ;

3. GRZ-3 - An area referred to as GRZ-3 in the Official Zoning Map are the lots

bounded by H. Ilagan Street, bounded by Callejon, R. Jeciel Street, and river;

4. GRZ-4 - An area referred to as GRZ-4 in the Official Zoning Map are the lots

bounded by Calderon and H. Ilagan Streets;

5. GRZ-5 - An area referred to as GRZ-5 in the Official Zoning Map are the

lotsbounded by Calderon, Lakandula, San Miguel, and San Gregorio Streets;

6. GRZ-6 - An area referred to as GRZ-6 in the Official Zoning Map are the lots

bounded by Callejon , San Miguel, L.Jaena, and Balagtas Streets, except the

lot o9ccupied by barangay hall of Poblacion 2;

7. GRZ-7 - An area referred to as GRZ-7 in the Official Zoning Map are the lots

bounded by Balagtas,

112 | P a g e
 8. GRZ-8 - An area referred to as GRZ- 8 in the Official Zoning Map are the lots

bounded byBalagtas, Lakandula, San Miguel, and San Gregorio Streets

except the lots zoned as RCZ-2;

9. GRZ-9 - An area referred to as GRZ- 9 in the Official Zoning Map are the lots

bounded by R. Jeciel, H. Ilagan, Balagtas, and San Gregorio Streets, except

the Indang Municipal Hall and Rizal Park;

10. GRZ-10- An area referred to as GRZ-10 in the Official Zoning Map are the lots

bounded byBalagtas, San Miguel, L. Jaena, and J. Coronel Streets;

11. GRZ-11- An area referred to as GRZ-11in the Official Zoning Map are the lots

bounded byBalagtas, J. Coronel, and L. Jaena Streets;

12. GRZ-12- An area referred to as GRZ-12 in the Official Zoning Map are the lots

bounded byBonifacio, San Miguel, Balagtas, and J. Coronel Streets;

13. GRZ-13- An area referred to as GRZ-13in the Official Zoning Map are the lots

bounded by A. Mabini, San Miguel, A. Bonifacio, and J. Coronel Streets,

except the lots zoned as RCZ-6;

14. GRZ-14- An area referred to as GRZ-14in the Official Zoning Map are the lots

bounded by A. Bonifacio, J. Coronel, Balagtas, and L. Jaena Streets;

15. GRZ 15 - An area referred to as GRZ-15 in the Official Zoning Map are the

lots bounded by Callejon, A. Mabini, A. Mojica, and L. Jaena Streets, river,

except the lots zoned as RCZ-12;

16. GRZ 16 - An area referred to as GRZ-16in the Official Zoning Map are the lots

bounded by A. Mabini, J. Coronel, A. Bonifacio, and Evangelista Streets

except the lots zoned as RCZ-9;

113 | P a g e
 17. GRZ 17 - An area referred to as GRZ-17in the Official Zoning Map are the lots

bounded by A. Mabini, Evangelista,, A. Bonifacio, and A. Mojica Streets

except the lots zoned as RCZ-10;

18. GRZ 18 - An area referred to as GRZ-18in the Official Zoning Map are the lots

bounded by cemetery, Indang Catholic Church, De Ocampo and J. Coronel

streets, and the lots zoned as RCZ- 14;

19. GRZ 19 - An area referred to as GRZ-19in the Official Zoning Map are the lots

bounded by cemetery, A. Mojica and De Ocampo Streets, and except the lots

zoned as RCZ-15;

20. GRZ-20 - An area referred to as RCZ-20 in the Official Zoning Map are the

lots bounded by De Ocampo and A. Mojica Streets, J. Dimabiling Street and

lot occupied by Senior Citizen Bldg. and School;

21. GRZ 21 - An area referred to as GRZ-21in the Official Zoning Map are the lots

bounded by De Ocampo and A. Mojica Streets, J. Dimabiling Street and by-

pass road going to Indang Public Market except the lots occupied by Senior

Citizens building and lots zoned as RCZ-16;

22. GRZ 22 - An area referred to as GRZ-22 in the Official Zoning Map are the

lots bounded by Dimabiling Street, by-pass road going to

BinambanganStreet,creek and Indang National High School, except the lot

occupied by Indang Public Market and the lots zoned as RCZ 19;

23. GRZ 23 - An area referred to as GRZ-23 in the Official Zoning Map are the

lots bounded byDimabiling Street, Calumpang Cerca, creek, by-pass road

going to Binambangan Street, except the lot zoned as Agricultural Zone(AZ);

114 | P a g e
 24. GRZ 24 - An area referred to as GRZ-24 in the Official Zoning Map are the

lots bounded byby- pass road going to BinambanganStreet, creek, callejon

and Binambangan Street;

25. GRZ 25 - An area referred to as GRZ-25in the Official Zoning Mapare the lots

bounded by creek, by-pass road going to Binambangan Street, river,

Binambangan Street except the lots zoned as RCZ-20 and the Agricultural

Zone(AZ) lots;

26. GRZ 26 - An area referred to as GRZ-26in the Official Zoning Mapare the lots

bounded by Callejon, Binambangan and J. Dimabiling Streets ,Indang Public

Market except the lot occupied by Indang National High School;

27. GRZ 27 - An area referred to as GRZ-27in the Official Zoning Map are the lots

bounded by Binambangan and J. Dimabiling Streets, river, and the AZ lot

opposite the by-pass road going to Binambangan Street

115 | P a g e
116 | P a g e
117 | P a g e
GENERAL COMMERCIAL ZONE (GCZ)

1. GCZ -1- An area referred to as GCZ-1 in the Official Zoning Map is the lot

occupied by Indang Public market;

2. GCZ-2 - An area referred to as GCZ-2 in the Official Zoning Map is the lot

occupied by L-Paseo building;

3. GCZ-3 - An area referred to as GCZ-3 in the Official Zoning Map is the lot

occupied by Plaza Coronel building;

4. GCZ-4 - An area referred to as GCZ-4 in the Official Zoning Map is the lot

occupied by Elmia building;

5. GCZ-5 -An area referred to as GCZ-5 in the Official Zoning Map are the lot

numbers 5386 and 16511-A.

RESIDENTIAL- COMMERCIAL ZONE (RCZ)

1. RCZ-1- An area referred to as RCZ-1 in the Official Zoning Map are the lots

bounded by San Gregorio Street, Lintiw road, river, and Indang East

Elementary School;

2. RCZ-2- An area referred to as RCZ-2 in the Official Zoning Map are the lots

bounded by Balagtas, H. Ilagan, Lakandula, and San Gregorio Streets except

the lots zoned as GRZ-7;

3. RCZ-3- An area referred to as RCZ-3 in the Official Zoning Map are the lots

bounded by Balagtas, San Gregorio, Lakandula and San Miguel Streets

except the lots zoned as GRZ-8;

4. RCZ-4- An area referred to as RCZ-4 in the Official Zoning Map are the lots

bounded by A. Mabini, H. Ilagan, Balagtas, and San Gregorio streets, except

118 | P a g e
 the lots occupied by Indang Municipal Hall, Rizal Park, and the lots zoned as

GRZ-9;

5. RCZ-5- An area referred to as RCZ-5 in the Official Zoning Map are the lots

bounded by A. Mabini, San Gregorio, Balagtas, and San Miguel streets,

except the lots occupied by Elmia building, Hon. A Mojica Hall of Justice

Building, and Heroes Park;

6. RCZ-6- An area referred to as RCZ-6 in the Official Zoning Map are the lots

bounded by A. Bonifacio, San Miguel, Balagtas, and J. Coronel streets except

the lots zoned as GRZ-12;

7. RCZ-7- An area referred to as RCZ-7 in the Official Zoning Map are the lots

bounded by A. Mabini, San Miguel, A. Bonifacio, and J. Coronel streets,

except the lots zoned as GRZ-13;

8. RCZ-8- An area referred to as RCZ-8 in the Official Zoning Map are the lots

bounded by De Ocampo, San Miguel, A. Mabini, and J. Coronel streets,

except the lots occupied by Plaza Coronel;

9. RCZ-9- An area referred to as RCZ-9 in the Official Zoning Map are the lots

bounded by A. Mabini, A Bonifacio, J. Coronel, and Evangelista streets,

except the lots zoned as GRZ-16;

10. RCZ-10- An area referred to as RCZ-10 in the Official Zoning Map are the lots

bounded by De Ocampo and J. Coronel Streets, A. Mabini and Evangelista

Streets;

11. RCZ-11- An area referred to as RCZ-11 in the Official Zoning Mapare the lots

bounded by A. Mabini and Evangelista Streets, Bonifacio and A. Mojica

streets except the lots zoned as GRZ-17;

119 | P a g e
 12. RCZ-12-An area referred to as RCZ-12 in the Official Zoning Map are the lots

bounded by De Ocampo and Evangelista Streets, A. Mabini and A. Mojica

Streets;

13. RCZ-13- An area referred to as RCZ-13 in the Official Zoning Mapare the lots

bounded by A. Mabini and A. Mojica Streets, J. Dimabiling and Balagtas

Street, except the lots zoned as GRZ 15;

14. RCZ-14- An area referred to as RCZ-15 in the Official Zoning Map are the lots

bounded by De Ocampo and J. Coronel Streets, lots zoned as GRZ 18, and

municipal covered court;

15. RCZ-15- An area referred to as RCZ-16 in the Official Zoning Map are the lots

bounded by De Ocampo and A. Mojica Streets, J. Coronel Street, and the

municipal and catholic cemetery,

16. RCZ-16- An area referred to as RCZ-17 in the Official Zoning Map are the lots

bounded by A. Mojica and J. Dimabiling Streets, by-pass road going to Indang

Public Market, and Junction of CalumpangCerca;

17. RCZ-17- An area referred to as RCZ-18 in the Official Zoning Map is the

corner lot bounded by J. Dimabiling Street, by-pass road going to

Binambangan Street, and Indang Public Market;

18. RCZ-18- An area referred to as RCZ-19 in the Official Zoning Map is the lot

occupied by Ramirez gravel and sand at BinambanganStreet.

120 | P a g e
SOCIALIZED HOUSING ZONE

Areas occupied by Indang HABITAT for Humanity (Daine-2), ASAMA Homes,

Villa Corazon, and Local Housing sites colored in the Official Zoning Map.

INDUSTRIAL ZONE

Area referred to as Light Industrial Zone (intended exclusively for

Company/Industries with environmental-friendly operation as declared by DENR and

other government agencies) is colored in the Official Zoning Map along the national

road at Brgy. Mataas na Lupa.

PARKS AND OPEN SPACES ZONE (POSZ)

All areas occupied by parks, playgrounds, cemeteries /memorial parks.

GENERAL INSTITUTIONAL ZONE (GIZ)

All areas occupied by government buildings and religious centers as well as

other structures catering to the provision of public services similar to schools and

rural health center.

AGRICULTURAL ZONE (AZ)

All areas not classified as Residential, Commercial, Institutional, and Parks

and Open Spaces.

121 | P a g e
WATER-PROTECTION ZONE

All areas within the 50 meters distance from the source of natural water spring

are water-protection zone. Protection Areas (All areas occupied by rivers and its

tributary along with legal easement)

AREA OF MUNICIPAL AGRI-DEMO FARM AND MATERIAL RECOVERY

FACILITIES

Areas occupied by agri-demo farm and material recovery facilities owned,

operated and maintained by Municipal Government of Indang.

PLAN UNIT DEVELOPMENT (PUD) AREA

Area referred to all areas that had been planned to accommodate the areas

for combined development options (residential development with minimum lot size of

500 sg. meters, or combination of tourism with agriculture development or tourism-

commercial development, or combined development option for institutional with

commercial component is colored in the Official Zoning Map.

Section 8.Interpretation of Zone Boundary. In the interpretation of the boundaries for

any of the zones indicated on the Zoning Map, the following rule shall apply:

122 | P a g e
 1. Where zone boundaries are so indicated that they approximately follow the

center of streets or highways, the street or highways right-of-ways lines, shall

be construed to be the boundaries.

2. Where zone boundaries are so indicated that they approximately follow the lot

lines, such lines shall be constructed to be the boundaries.

3. Where zone boundaries are so indicated that they are approximately parallel

to the center lines or right- of-way lines of streets or highways, such zone

boundaries shall construed as being parallel thereto and at such a distance

there from as indicated in the zoning map. If no distance is given, such

dimension shall be determined by the use of the scale shown in said zoning

map.

4. Where the boundary of zone follows approximately railroad line, such

boundary shall be deemed to be the railroad right-of-way.

5. Where the boundary of zone follows a stream, lake or bodies of water, said

boundary line shall be deemed to be at the limit of the political jurisdiction of

the community unless otherwise indicated. Boundaries indicated as following

shorelines shall be construes to follow such shorelines and in the event of

change in the shorelines, shall be construed as moving with the actual

shorelines.

123 | P a g e
 6. Where a lot of one’s ownership, as of record at the effective date of this

Ordinance, is divided by a zone boundary line, the lot shall be construes to be

within the zone where the major portion of the lot is located. In case the lot is

bisected by the boundary line, it shall fall in the zone where the principal

structure falls.

7. Where zone boundary is indicated one-lot-deep, said depth shall be construes

to be the average lot depth of the lots involved within each particular

city/municipality block. Where, however, any lot has a depth greater than said

average, the remaining portion has an area less than fifty percent (50%) of the

total area of the entire lot. If the remaining portion has an area equivalent to

fifty percent (50%) or more of the total area of the lot then the average lot

depth shall apply to the lot which shall become a lot divided and covered by

two or more different zoning districts, as the case may be.

In case of any remaining doubt as to the location of any property along zone

boundary lines, such property shall be considered as falling within the less restrictive

zone.

The textual description of the zone boundaries shall prevail over that of the

Official Zoning Maps.

124 | P a g e
ARTICLE VI ZONE REGULATIONS

Section 9. General Provision. The uses enumerated in the succeeding sections are

not exhaustive or all- inclusive. The Local Zoning Board of Adjustment and Appeals

(LZBAA) shall, subject to the requirements of this

Article, allow other uses not enumerated hereunder provided that they are

compatible with the uses expressly allowed.

Allowance of further uses shall be based on the intrinsic qualities of the land

and the socio-economic and ecological/biophysical potential of the locality with due

regard to the maintenance of the essential qualities of the zone.

Section 10. Use Regulations in General Residential Zone (GRZ). A GR zone shall be

used principally for dwelling/housing purposes so as to maintain peace and quiet of

the area within the zone. The following are the allowable uses:

1. Detached family dwelling

2. Multi-family dwelling e.g. row-houses, apartments

3. Residential Condominium

4. Apartment

5. Hometel

6. Pension House

7. Hotel Apartment or Apartel

8. Dormitory

9. Boarding House

10. Branch libraries and museums

125 | P a g e
 11. Customary accessory uses like:

a) Servants Quarter

b) Private Garage

c) Guard House

12. Home occupation for the practice of one’s profession or for engaging home

business such as dressmaking, tailoring, baking, running a sari-sari store and

the like provided that:

a) The number of persons engaged in such business/industry shall not

exceed five (5), inclusive of the owner;

b) There shall be no change in the outside appearance of the building

premises;

c) No home occupation shall be conducted in any customary

accessory uses cited above;

d) No traffic shall be generated by such home occupation which in

greater volume than would be expected in a residential

neighborhood and any need for parking generated by the conduct of

such home occupation shall be met off the street and in place other

than required front yard;

e) No equipment or process shall be used in such home occupation

which creates noise, vibration, glare, fumes, odors and electrical

interference detectable to the normal senses and visual or audible

interferences in any radio or television receiver or causes fluctuation

in line voltage of the premises.

126 | P a g e
 13. Home Industry Classified as cottage industry provided that:

a) Such home industry shall not occupy more than thirty percent (30%)

of the floor area of the dwelling unit. There shall be no change or

alteration in the outside appearance of the dwelling unit and shall

not be a hazard or nuisance.

127 | P a g e
 b) Allotted capitalization shall not exceed the capitalization as set by

the Department of Trade and Industry (DTI).

c) Such shall consider same provisions as enumerated in letter c, d

and e number 12, of this section.

14. Recreational facilities for the exclusive use of the members of the family

residing within the premises, such as:

a) Swimming Pool

b) Pelota Court

c) Others

15. Nursery/Elementary School

16. High School

17. Vocational School

18. Sports Club

19. Religious Use

20. Multi-purpose hall/barangay hall

21. Clinic, nursing and convalescing home, health center

22. Plant Nurseries

128 | P a g e
Section 11. Use Regulations in Socialized Housing Zone (SHZ). A SHZ shall be

used principally for socialized housing/dwelling purposes for the underprivileged and

homeless as defined in RA 7279. Allowable uses:

 All uses allowed in General Residential Zone

Section 12. Use Regulations in General Commercial Zone (GCZ). A GCZ shall be for

business/trade/service uses. Within the zone the following types of establishment

shall be allowed:

1. Offices like:

a) Office building

b) Office condominium

2. General retail stores and shops like:

a) Department store

b) Bookstore and office supply shop

c) Home appliance center

d) Car shop

e) Photo shop

f) Flower shop

3. Food markets and shops like:

a) bakery and bake shop

b) wine store

c) Grocery

129 | P a g e
 d) Super market

4. Personal service shops like:

a) Beauty parlor

b) Barber shop

c) Sauna bath and massage clinic

d) Dressmaking and tailoring shops

5. Recreational center/establishments like:

a) Movie houses/theater

b) Play court e.g. tennis court, bowling lane, billiard hall

c) Swimming pool

d) Day and night club

e) Stadium, coliseum, gymnasium

f) Other sports and recreational establishment

6. Restaurants and other eateries

7. Short term special education like:

a) Dance schools

b) School for self defense

c) Driving schools

d) Speech clinics

130 | P a g e
 8. Storerooms but only as may be necessary for the efficient conduct of the

business

9. Commercial condominium (with residential units in upper floors)

10. Commercial housing like:

a) hotel

b) apartment

c) apartel

d) boarding house

e) dormitory

f) pension house

g) club house

h) motel

11. Embassy/ consulate

12. Library museum

13. Filling Station/ service station

14. Clinic

15. Vocational/technical school

16. Convention Center and related facilities

17. Messengerial Service

18. Security agency

19. Janitorial services

20. Bank and other financial institutions

21. Radio and television station

22. Building garage, parking lot

131 | P a g e
 23. Bakery and baking of bread, cake, pastries, pies, and other similar perishable

products

24. Custom dressmaking shop

25. Custom tailoring shop

26. Commercial and job printing

27. Typing and photo engraving services

28. Repair of optical instruments and equipment and cameras

29. Repair of clocks and watches

30. Manufacture of insignia, badges and similar emblems except metals

31. Transportation terminals/garage with or without repair

32. Repairshops like:

a) house appliances repair shops

b) motor vehicles and accessory repair shops

c) home furnishing shops

33. Printing/publishing

34. Machinery display shop/center

35. Gravel and sand

36. Lumber/hardware

37. Manufacture of ice, ice blocks, cubes, tubes, crush except dry ice

38. Printing and publishing of books and pamphlets, printing cards and stationary

39. Manufacture of signs and advertising displays (except printed)

40. Chicharon factory

41. Manufacture of wood furniture including upholstered

42. Manufacture of rattan furniture including upholstered

43. Manufacture of box beds and mattresses

132 | P a g e
 44. Welding shops

45. Machine shops service operation (repairing/rebuilding, or custom job orders)

46. Medium scale junk shop

47. Repair motorcycles

48. Lechon or whole pig roasting

49. Biscuit factory-manufacture of biscuits, cookies, crackers and other similar

dried bakery products.

50. Doughnut and hopia factory

51. Other bakery products not elsewhere classified (n.e.c)

52. Repacking of food products e.g. fruits, vegetables, sugar and other related

products

53. Plant nursery

54. Funeral parlors, mortuaries and crematory services and memorial chapels

55. Parking lots, garage facilities

56. Other commercial activities not elsewhere classified

57. Computer shops

133 | P a g e
Section 13. Use Regulations in General Institutional Zone (GIZ). In GI Zone, the

following uses shall be allowed:

1. Government center to house, regional or local offices in the area.

2. Colleges, universities, professional business schools, vocational and trade

schools, technical schools and other institutions of higher learning.

3. General hospitals, medical centers, multipurpose clinics.

4. Scientific, cultural and academic centers and research facilities except nuclear

radioactive, chemical and biological warfare facilities.

5. Convention centers and related facilities.

6. Religious structures e.g. church, seminary, convents.

7. Museums

8. Embassies/consulate

9. Student housing e.g. dormitories, boarding house.

Section 14. Use Regulation in Parks and Recreation Zone (PRZ). The following uses

shall be allowed in Parks and Recreation Zones;

1. Parks/gardens

2. Resort Areas, e.g. beaches, including accessory uses.

3. Open air or outdoor sports activities and support families, including low rise

stadia, gyms, amphitheaters and swimming pools.

4. Golf courses, ball courts, race tracts and similar.

5. Memorial/shrines monuments, kiosks and other park structures.

6. Sports Club

7. Underground Parking Structures/Facilities.

134 | P a g e
 8. Functional wetlands, easement and buffer areas

 All residential, commercial, industrial and mixed-use subdivisions are required

to provide tree-planting strips along its internal roads having spacing of not

more than ten (10) meters.

 Similar development with total contiguous land areas greater than ten (10)

hectares are required to provide, in addition to the above, adequate

landscaped forest parks for the use of the occupants and/or the general

public.

Section 15.Use Regulations in Residential-Commercial Zone (GCZ). An R-C Zone

shall be within the urban area (Poblacion) of this municipality for dwelling,

business/trade/service uses. Within the zone the following types of establishment

shall be allowed:

1. All uses allowed in General Residential Zone

2. Selected business/trade/service uses allowed in General Commercial Zone

with a clearance of barangay council through resolution except the uses which

creates loud sound, vibration, foul odors, and electrical business/service that

causes fluctuation in line voltage of the premises, and high scale welding

shops.

Section 16. Use Regulations for Agricultural Zone (AGZ). In Agricultural Zone the

following uses shall be permitted:

135 | P a g e
 1. Cultivation, raising and growing of staple crops such as rice, corn, camote,

cassava, ginger and the like.

2. Growing of diversified plants and trees such as fruit and flower bearing trees,

coffee, tobacco, etc.

3. Silviculture, mushroom culture, fishing and fish culture, snake culture,

crocodile farm, monkey raising and the like.

4. Customary support facilities such as palay driers and rice thresher , storage

barns, and warehouse.

5. Ancillary dwelling units/farmhouses for tillers and laborers.

6. Agricultural research and experimentation facilities such as breeding stations,

fish farms, nurseries, demonstration farms, etc.

7. Pastoral activities such as goat raising and cattle fattening.

8. Backyard raising of livestock, fowl, and poultry provided that:

a) For livestock - a maximum of 10 heads have proper waste disposal

facilities.

b) For fowls - 501 birds to 3,000 birds have proper waste disposal system.

c) For poultry - 1,000 heads to 2,000 heads have proper waste disposal

system.

9. Profitable business raising of livestock, fowl, poultry farm and piggery farm

provided that:

a) For livestock - 11 heads to a maximum of 1,000 heads required proper

waste disposal facilities.

b) For fowls - 501 birds to 10,000 birds required proper waste disposal

system.

136 | P a g e
 c) For poultry farm - 2,001 heads to 10,000 heads required proper waste

disposal system

d) For piggery farm - 11 heads to 1,000 heads required BIOGAS waste

treatment facilities

10. Other accessory uses incidental to the improvement of crops and livestock

productions.

Section 17. Use Regulations for Water-Protection Zone (WPZ). The land uses within

WPZ must complement each other to promote balance between ecological and

social concerns (e.g., biological diversity) and to optimize benefits.

1. In Water-Protection Zone the following uses shall be permitted:

a) Bathing, washing and fishing

b) Planting of trees

2. In Water-Protection Zone the following uses are prohibited:

a) Cutting of trees

b) Kaingin farming

c) Other unsustainable agricultural practices

 The management of water-protection zone and rivers is a shared

responsibility between and among the national government, the local

governments, the private sector, and local communities.

137 | P a g e
  The utilization of water resources for domestic and industrial use shall be

allowed provided it is in consonance with the development regulations of

DENR, provisions of the Water Code and the Revised Forestry Code of the

Philippines, as amended, and provided further, that it is subjected to an

assessment of its carrying capacity, environmental impact and vulnerability

assessment prior to the approval of its use. Such bodies of water shall include

rivers, streams, lakes and seas.

 Designation of the Cañas and Malimango rivers as water quality management

area.

ARTICLE VII

GENERAL DISTRICT REGULATIONS

Section 18. Development Density. Permitted density shall be based on capacity to

support development.

 Decision to reduce land use density must not impair on the rights of the

property/land owner. The Zoning Officer’s decision on allowed density must

be balanced with public safety considerations especially if the proposed

development is to be located within hazard prone areas.

138 | P a g e
  The Zoning Officer initial evaluation of the proposed development is grounded

on the intent or objective to ensure that the proposed development meets the

building code standards to reduce the vulnerability of individuals, buildings

and structures to hazards such as flooding, storm surge, or wind damage.

Section 19. Height Regulations.

Building height must conform to the height restriction and requirements of the

Air Transportation Office (ATO) as well as the requirements of the National Building

Code, the Structural Code as well as all laws, ordinances, design standards, rules

and regulation related to the land development constructions of the various safety

codes.

Section 20. Area Regulations. Area regulations in all zones shall conform to the

minimum requirement of the existing codes such as:

1. P.D. 957 - the “Subdivision and Condominium Buyer’s Protective Law” and its

revised implementing rules and regulations

2. B.P. 220 - “Promulgation of Different Levels of Standards and Technical

Requirements for Economic and Socialized Housing Projects” and its revised

implementing rules and regulations.

3. P.D. 1096 - National Building Code

4. Fire Code

5. Sanitation Code

6. Plumbing Code

7. Structural Code
139 | P a g e
 8. Executive Order No. 648

9. Other relevant guidelines promulgated by the national agencies concerned.

Section 21. Road Setback Regulations. The following road setback regulations shall

be applied:

ROAD SETBACK

Major thoroughfare 30m Tertiary Road

Zoning above Secondary Road 6m and below
Classification Diversion/Railways Provincial/City Mun./Brgy/Subd,
Residential 10 m 10 m 3m
Commercial 20 m 20 m 7m
Industrial 30 m 25 m 10m
Agriculture 20 m 20 m 7m
Agro-industrial 30 m 25 m 10m
Institutional 20 m 20 m 10m
Parks & Recreations 10 m 10 m 3m
Forest 30 m 25 m 10m

Section 22. Easement. Pursuant to the provisions of the Water Code:

1. The banks of rivers and streams and the shores of the seas and lakes

throughout their entire length and within a zone of three (3) meters in urban

areas, twenty (20) meters in agricultural areas, and forty (40) meters in forest

areas along their margins, are subject to easement of public use in the

interest of recreation, navigation, floatage, fishing and salvage.

140 | P a g e
 2. No person shall be allowed to stay in this zone longer than what is necessary

for space or recreation, navigation, floatage, fishing or salvage or to build

structures of any kind.

3. Natural waterways shall be assigned as a green easement that is landscaped

or planted with grass, ornamentals and trees and free of permanent

structures. Should there be a change in the existing shoreline or banks of the

rivers, the easement shall be construed as moved and adjusted with the

actual riverbanks or shorelines.

4. Trees that shall be planted along the buffer zones shall consider varieties that

have very good water retentive capacity.

5. The above easement regulations shall be the minimum as provided for by PD

1067 and shall be increased or enlarged subject to climate change and

disaster risk reduction management studies.

6. Mandatory five-meter easement (minimum) on both sides of a fault trace as

identified by the PHIVOLCS.

141 | P a g e
Section 23. Buffer Regulations. A minimum buffer of 4 meters shall be provided

along entire boundary length between two or more conflicting zones (allocation 1.5

meters) allocating equal distances from each side of the district boundary. Such

buffer strip should be open and not encroached upon by any building or structure

and should be a part of the yard or open space.

 The developer of a more intense use shall provide the required buffer to

protect a lesser intense/density use.

142 | P a g e
Section 24. Specific Provisions in the National Building Code. Specific provisions

stipulated in the National Building Code (P.D. 1096) as amended thereto relevant to

traffic generators, advertising and business signs, erection of more than one

principal structure dwelling groups, which are not in conflict with the provisions of the

Zoning Ordinance, shall be observed.

___________________________________________________________________

ARTICLE VIII INNOVATIVE TECHNIQUES

Section 25. Innovative Techniques or Designs. For projects that introduce flexibility

and creativity in design or plan such as but not limited to Planned Unit Development,

housing projects covered by New Town Development under R.A. 7279, BLISS

Commercial Complexes, etc., the Zoning Administrator/Zoning Officer shall on

grounds of innovative development techniques forward application to HLURB for

appropriate action, unless the local government unit concerned has the capacity to

process the same.

___________________________________________________________________

ARTICLE IX MISCELLANEOUS PROVISONS

Section 26. Projects of National Significance. Projects may be declared by the NEDA

Board as projects of national significance pursuant to Section 3 of EO 72. When a

project is declared by the NEDA Board as a project of national significance, the

locational clearance shall be issued by HLURB pursuant to EO 72.

143 | P a g e
Section 27. Environmental Compliance Certificate (ECC). Notwithstanding the

issuance of the Locational Clearance under Section of this Ordinance, no

environmentally critical projects nor projects located in environmentally critical areas

shall be commenced, developed or operated unless the requirements of ECC have

been complied with.

Section 28. Subdivision Projects. All owners and/or developers of the subdivision

projects shall be addition to securing a Locational Clearance under Section of this

ordinance be required to secure a development permit pursuant to provisions of PD

957 and its Implementing Rules and Regulations or BP 220 and its Implementing

Rules and Regulations in the case of socialized housing projects in accordance with

the procedures laid down in EO 71, Series of 1993. All subdivision developers shall

provide a centralized sewerage treatment, retarding basin, rain harvester, solar

panel for house and lot packages.

___________________________________________________________________

ARTICLE X MITIGATING DEVICES

Section 29. Deviation. Exceptions, variances or deviations from the provisions of this

Ordinance may be allowed by the Local Zoning Board of Adjustment and Appeals

(LZBAA) only when the following terms and conditions are existing:

1. Variance

1. The property is unique and different from the other properties in the adjacent

locality and because of its uniqueness; the owners/cannot obtain a

144 | P a g e
 reasonable return on the property. This condition shall include at least 3 of the

following provisions;

a) Compliance to the provision of this Ordinance will cause undue

hardship on the part of the owner or occupant of the property due to

physical conditions of the property (topography, shape, etc.) which is

not self created.

b) The proposed variance is the minimum deviation necessary to permit

reasonable use of the property.

c) The variance will not alter the physical character of the district or zone

where the property for the variance is sought is located, and will not

substantially or permanently injure the use of the other properties in

the same district or zone.

d) That the variance will not weaken the general purpose of the

ordinance and will not adversely affect the public health, safety or

welfare.

e) The variance will be in harmony with the spirit of this Ordinance.

A. Exceptions:

1. The exception will not adversely affect the public health, safety or welfare and

is in keeping with the general pattern of development of the community.

2. The proposed project shall support economic based activities, provide

livelihood, vital community services and facilities while the same time posing

no adverse effect on the zone/community.

145 | P a g e
 3. The exception will not alter the essential character and general purpose of the

district where the exception sought is located.

Section 30. Procedures for Granting Exceptions and Variances. The procedure for

granting of exception and/or variance is as follows:

1. A written application or variance shall be filed with the Local Zoning Board of

Adjustment and Appeals (LZBAA) citing the section of this Ordinance under

which the same is sought and stating the ground/s thereof.

2. Upon filing of the application, a visible project sign (indicating the same and

nature of the proposed project) shall be posted at the project site.

3. The Local Zoning Board of Adjustment and Appeals shall conduct preliminary

studies on the application.

4. A written affidavit of non-objection of the project by the owners of the

properties adjacent to the project shall be filed by the applicant with the

LZBAA at least fifteen (15) days prior to the decision for exception or

variance.

5. In case of objection, the LZBAA shall hold public hearing.

146 | P a g e
 6. At the hearing, any party may appear in person, or be represented by agent/s.

All interested parties shall be accorded the opportunity to be heard and

present evidences and testimonies.

7. The LZBAA shall render a decision within thirty (30) days from the filing of the

application, exclusive of the time spent for the preparation of written affidavit

of non- objection and the public hearing in case of any objection of the

granting of exception/variance.

___________________________________________________________________

ARTICLE XI ADMINISTRATION AND ENFORCEMENT

Section 32. Locational Clearance. All owners/developers shall secure Locational

Clearance from the Zoning Administrator/Zoning Officer or in cases of variances and

exemptions, from the Local Zoning Board of Adjustment and Appeals (LZBAA) prior

to conducting any activity or construction on their property/land.

Section 33. Building Permit. No building permit shall be issued by the Local Building

Officer without a valid locational clearance in accordance with this Ordinance.

147 | P a g e
Section 34. Non-User of Locational Clearance. Upon issuance of a Locational

Clearance, the grantee thereof shall have one year within which to commence or

undertake the use.

Section 35. Certificate of Non-Conformance. A certificate of non-conformance shall

be applied for by the owner of the structure or operator of the activity involved within

six (6) months from the ratification of the zoning ordinance by the Sangguniang

Panlalawigan (SP). Failure on the part of the owner to register/apply for a Certificate

of Non-Conformance shall be considered in violation of the Zoning Ordinance and is

subject to fine/penalties.

Section 36. Existing Non-Conforming Uses and Building. The lawful uses of any

building, structure or land at the time of the adoption or amendment of this

Ordinance may be continued, although such uses do not conform with the provisions

of this Ordinance, provided:

1. That no such non-conforming use shall be enlarged or extended to occupy a

greater area of land that already occupied by such use at the time of the

adoption of this Ordinance or moved in whole or in part, to other any portion of

the lot or parcel or land where such non-conforming use which exist at the

time of the adoption of this Ordinance.

148 | P a g e
 2. That no such non-conforming use, this has ceased operation for more than

one (1) year be again revived as non-conforming use.

3. An idle/vacant structure may not be used for non-conforming activity.

4. That any non-conforming structure, or structure under one ownership which

has been damaged maybe reconstructed and used as before provided that

such reconstruction is not more than fifty percent (50%) of the replacement

cost.That should such non-conforming portion of structure be destroyed by

any means to an extant of more than fifty percent (50%) of its replacement

cost at the time of destruction, it shall not be reconstructed except in

conformity with the provisions of this Ordinance.

5. That no such non-conforming use maybe moved to displace any conforming

use.

6. That no such non-conforming structure may be enlarged or altered in a way

which increases its non- conformity, but any structure or portion thereof

maybe altered to decrease its non-conformity.

7. That should such structure be moved for any reason to whatever distance, it

shall thereafter conform to the regulation of the district in which it is moved or

149 | P a g e
 relocated. In addition, the owner of a non-conforming use shall program the

phase-out and relocation of the non-conforming use within ten (10) years of

this ordinance.

Section 37. Responsibility for Administration and Enforcement. This ordinance shall

be enforced and administered by the Local Chief Executive through the Zoning

Administrator/Zoning Officer who shall be appointed by the former in accordance

with the existing rules and regulations on the subject.

Section 38. Powers and Functions of a Zoning Administrator/Zoning Officer.

Pursuant to the provisions of EO 72 implementing RA 7160 in relation to Sec. 5,

paragraph a and d, and Sec. 7 of Executive Order No. 648 dated 07 February 1981,

the Zoning Administrator/Zoning Officer shall perform the following functions, duties

and responsibilities.

A. Enforcement

1. Act on all applications for locational clearances for all projects.

o Issuance of locational clearance for projects conforming with zoning

regulations.

o Recommend to the Local Zoning Board of Adjustment and Appeals (LZBAA)

the grant or denial of application for variances and exemptions and the

issuance on Non- Conformance for non-conforming projects lawfully existing

at the time of the adoption of the zoning ordinance, including clearances for

150 | P a g e
 repairs/renovations on non- conforming uses consistent with the guidelines

thereof.

2. Monitor on-going/existing projects within their respective jurisdictions and

issue notices of violation and show cause order to owners, developers, or

managers of projects that are violative of zoning ordinance and if necessary,

pursuant to Sec. 3 of EO 72 and Sec. 2 of EO 71 refer subsequent actions

thereon to the HLRB.

3. Call and coordinate with the Philippine National Police for enforcement of all

orders and processes issued in the implementation of this ordinance.

4. Coordinate with the Fiscal/Municipal Attorney for other legal actions/remedies

relative to the foregoing.

B. Planning

1. Coordinate with the Regional Office of the HLRB regarding proposed

amendments to the zoning ordinances prior to adoption by the Sangguniang

Bayan.

Section 39. Action on Complaints and Oppositions. A complaint for violations of any

provision of zoning ordinance or of any clearance or permits issued pursuant thereto

shall be filed with the LZBAA.

151 | P a g e
 However, oppositions to application for clearance, variance or exception shall

be treated as a compliant and dealt with in accordance with the provision of this

section.

Section 40. Functions and responsibilities of the Local Zoning Board of Adjustment

and Appeals. There is hereby created a LZBAA which shall perform the following

functions and responsibilities:

A. Act on applications of the following nature:

1. Variances

2. Exceptions

3. Non-conforming Uses

4. Complaints and opposition to application

B. Act on Appeals on grant or denial of Locational Clearance by the Zoning

administrator/Zoning Officer.

 Decisions of the Local Zoning Board of Adjustment and Appeals shall be

appealable to the HLURB.

Section 41. Composition of the Local Zoning Board of Adjustment and Appeals

(LZBAA). The City/Municipal Development Council shall create a sub-committee

which shall act as the LZBAA composed of the following members:

152 | P a g e
 1. Municipal Mayor as Chairman

2. Municipal Legal Officer

3. Municipal Assessor

4. Municipal Engineer

5. 5.Municipal Planning and Development Coordinator (if other than the Zoning

Administrator)

6. Municipal Agrarian Reform Officer (MARO)

7. Municipal/City Environment and Natural Resources Officer(MENRO)

Two (2) representatives of the private sectors, nominated by their respective

organizations and confirmed by the municipal mayor. In the event of non-availability

of any of the officials enumerated above, the Sangguniang Bayan shall elect the

number of its members as may be necessary to meet the total number above set

forth, as representatives.

8. Two (2) representatives from non-government organizations and confirmed by

the municipal mayor. In the event of non-availability of any of the officials

enumerated above, the Sangguniang Bayan shall elect the number of its

members as may be necessary to meet the total number above set forth, as

representatives.

 For purposes of policy coordination, said committee shall be attached to the

municipal development council.

153 | P a g e
Section 42. Interim provision. Until such time that the Local Zoning Board of

Adjustment and Appeals shall have been constituted, the HLURB shall act as the

Local Zoning Board of adjustment and Appeals. As an appellate Board, the HLURB

shall adopt its own rules of procedure to govern the conduct of appeals arising from

the administration and enforcement of this Ordinance.

Section 43. Review of the Zoning Ordinance. The Municipality Development Council

shall create a sub- committee, the Local Zoning Review Committee (LZRC) that shall

review the Zoning Ordinance considering the Comprehensive Land Use Plan, as the

need arises, based on the following reasons/situations:

1. Change in local development plans

2. Introduction of projects of national significance

3. Petition for rezoning

4. Other reasons which are appropriate for consideration

Section 44. Composition of the Local Zoning Review Committee (LZRC). The Local

Zoning review Committee shall be composed of sectoral experts.

These are the Local Officials/Civic Leaders responsible for the operation,

development and progress of all sectoral undertakings in the locality.

1. Municipal Planning and Development

Coordinator

2. Municipal Health Officer

154 | P a g e
 3. Municipal Agriculturist

4. President, Association of Barangay Captains

5. Municipal Engineer

6. Community Environment and Natural Resources

Officer (CENRO)

7. Municipal Agrarian Reform Officer (MARO)

8. District School Supervisor

9. Three (3) Private School Representatives (Local

Chamber of Commerce, Housing Industry and

Home Owner’s Association)

10. Two (2) Representatives

 For purposes of policy and program coordination, the LZRC shall be attached

to the municipal development council.

Section 45. Functions of the Local Zoning Review Committee. The Local Zoning

Review Committee shall have the following powers and functions:

A. Review the Zoning Ordinance for the following purposes:

1. Determine amendments or revisions necessary in the Zoning Ordinance

because of changes that might have been introduced in the Comprehensive

Land Use Plan.

2. Determine changes to be introduced in the Comprehensive Land Use Plan in

the light of permits given, and exceptions and variances granted.

3. Identify provisions of the Ordinance difficult to enforce or are unworkable.

155 | P a g e
B. Recommend to the Sangguniang Bayan necessary legislative amendments and

to the local planning and development staff the needed changes in the plan as a

result of the review conducted.

C. Provide information to the HLRB that would be useful in the exercise of its

functions.

Section 46. Amendments of the Zoning Ordinance. Changes in the Zoning

Ordinance as a result of the review by the Local Zoning review Committee shall be

treated as an amendments, provided that any amendments to the Zoning Ordinance

or provisions thereof shall be subject to public hearing and review evaluation of the

Local Zoning /review committee and shall be carried out through a resolution of three

fourths vote of the Sangguniang Bayan. Said amendments shall take effect only after

approval and authentication by HLRB or Sangguniang Panlalawigan.

Section 47. Violation and Penalty. Any person who violates of the provisions of this

Ordinance, shall, upon, conviction, be punished by fine not exceeding 2,500 pesos

or an imprisonment for a period not exceeding six (6) months or both at the

discretion of the Court. In Case of violation by a corporation, partnership or

association the penalty shall be imposed upon the erring officers thereof.

Section 48. Supplementory Effect of Other Laws and Decrees. The provisions of the

Ordinance shall be without prejudice to the application of other laws, presidential

156 | P a g e
decrees, letter of instructions and other executive or administrative orders vesting

national agencies with jurisdiction over specific land areas, which shall remain in

force and effect, provided that the land use decisions of the national agencies

concerned shall be consistent with the Comprehensive Land Use Plan of the locality.

Section 49. Separability Clause. Should any section or provision of this Ordinance be

declared by the courts to be unconstitutional or invalid, such decision shall not affect

the validity of the Ordinance as a whole or any part thereof other than the part

declared to be unconstitutional or invalid.

Section 50. Repealing Clause. All ordinances, rules or regulations in conflict with the

provisions of this Ordinance are hereby repealed; provided, that the rights that are

vested upon the effectivity of this Ordinance shall be impaired.

Section 51.Effectivity Clause. This Ordinance shall take effect upon approval by the

Sangguniang Panlalawigan.

157 | P a g e
THE SECTORAL STUDIES

This volume comprises the detailed sectoral studies that provided the basis

for the preparation of this CLUP. The study were presented in a sector analysis

matrix containing the technical findings/observations, implications and interventions.

The following are the major sectoral detailed analysis:

DEMOGRAPHY

The essential needs of the people such as food, education, health, housing,

recreation, safety and other social and cultural amenities, which the development

programs aims to provide cannot be realized without taking into account the

demography.

The demographic profile presented below gives general information of the

population size, composition and distribution which are essential for general public

services.

Population Size and Growth Rate

The population size and projected population are essential in assessing

housing adequacy and calculating future housing demand and likewise serve as a

guide for allocating land for various uses.

158 | P a g e
 Population in Indang increases due to births that occur and the influx of

migrants from other municipalities in search of employment and for a better quality of

life. Based on 2010 NSO Census of Population, Indang has a total population of

62,030 with a growth rate of 1.92 %. This represents a 2.01% of the total population

of Cavite which is 3,090,691 in the same census year. In 1995 census, the

municipality has grown by 1.74%, an increase of 3,583 residents over a period of 5

years (1990-95). From 1995 to 2000, a period of another five years, it grew doubled

with a high growth rate of 3.70% and slowed down for the period 2000-2010 with a

growth rate of 1.92% compared to the province growth rate with the gradual

decreased from 1990-2010.

The historical growth of the population in different census years of Indang and

Province of Cavite is shown below.

Table 23: Population Size and Historical Growth Rate Municipality of Indang and
Province of Cavite 1990-2010

Census Date Total Population Historical Growth Rate

Cavite Indang Cavite Indang
2010 3,090,691 62,030 4.12 1.92
2000 2,063,161 51,281 5.54 3.70
1995 1,610,324 42,765 6.46 1.74
1990 1,152,534 39,227
Source: NSO various population census

159 | P a g e
Population Density

Table 24 shows that the population of the municipality grew steadily from

42,765 in 1995 to 51,281 in 2000. This shows an average annual growth rate of 3.70

percent. Population figure went up to 62,030 thereafter for an annual rate of 1.92

percent in the year 2010. The municipal population is expected to increase to 75,032

by the year 2020.

The municipality of Indang has a population density of 6.95 persons per

hectare in 2010 with an urban population density of 52.92. This increase in

population density was primarily due to the strategic location of Indang in the upland

of Cavite which is 13.5 kilometer away from Trece Martires City and 12.8 kilometer

away from Tagaytay City.

For the planning year consideration, the estimated total population density will

increase to 8.41 persons per hectare with an urban-rural population density of 64.02

and 7.73 respectively.

Table 24: Population Density Urban-Rural CY 2000-2020

Total Population Rural Urban Total

Total Population 1995 37,921 4,844 42,765
Total Population 2000 46,021 5,260 51,281
Total Population 2010 56,287 5,743 62,030
Total Population 2020 68,084 6,948 75,032

160 | P a g e
 Density: Person/Hectare Rural Urban Total
Year 1995 4.30 44.63 4.79
Year 2000 5.22 48.47 5.75
Year 2010 6.39 52.92 6.95
Year 2020 7.73 64.02 8.41
Area( Has ) 8,811.47 108.53 8,920.00
Source: NSO various population census

Population Distribution

Indang has an estimated household of 13,061 based on 2010 census with the

average household size of 4.71. There are 2,406 households or 18.42% of total

household had a household size of 5 while the 4,130 households had a household

size of 6 & over. It shows that 31.62% of total household had more than the average

number of person per household. (see table 25)

The household population of the municipality increases from 61,515 to 74,409

from year-end of 2010 to 2020 (see table 26). It represents an increase of 12,894

over the ten-year planning period.

Table 25: Number of Household by Household Size, Year 2010

Number Household Size Average
of
Indang
Househol 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 and over HH Size
d
13,061 636 1,219 2,028 2,642 2,406 1,779 977 1,374 4.71
% of Total 100.00 4.87 9.33 15.53 20.23 18.42 13.62 7.48 10.52
HH

Table 26:

161 | P a g e
 Yearly Projected Household Population and Household, Year 2011-2020

(2010) Projected Population and Household

Data 2011 2012 2013 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2019 2020
HH 61,51 62,69 63,90 65,12 66,38 67,65 68,95 70,28 71,63 73,00 74,40
Population 5 7 1 9 0 6 6 1 0 7 9
No. of 13,06 13,31 13,56 13,82 14,09 14,36 14,64 14,92 15,20 15,50 15,79
Household 1 2 8 8 4 5 1 2 9 1 9
Source: NSO various population census

Rural-Urban Household Population

The municipality is composed of 36 barangays (4-urban & 32 rural).Table 27,

shows that among the 32 rural barangays, the Brgy. Alulod, Buna Cerca and Banaba

Cerca are the first three barangays giving the largest share for the increase of the

municipal population with 4,545, 3,908 and 3,204 respectively with the average

household size of 5.07. These barangays are almost adjacent to the Poblacion.

While the barangays with the smallest shares are Guyam Munti, Limbon, and Tambo

Balagbag with 521, 581 and 781 household population respectively, these are

located far away to the town proper and had an average household size of 4.17. The

urban barangays or town proper is composed of four (4) barangay with the total of

6,174 household population indicating the share of 9.48% of total household

population.

162 | P a g e
Table 27: Total Population, Household Population by Urban and Rural barangay and
Average Household Size, Year 2010

Household Number of Average

Population Household Household
Barangay Total
Size
Population
Urban
1 Poblacion 1 1,320 1,316 291 4.52
2 Poblacion 2 999 995 254 3.91
3 Poblacion 3 1,030 1,016 206 4.92
4 Poblacion 4 2,394 2,385 417 5.72
Sub – Total 5,743 5,712 1,168 4.89
Rural
1 Agus-os 1,386 1,381 302 4.58
2 Alulod 4,322 4,294 834 5.15
3 Banaba Cerca 2,982 2,919 576 5.07
4 Banaba Lejos 1,313 1,288 286 4.50
5 Bancod 2,434 2,418 498 4.86
6 Buna Cerca 3,473 3,461 692 5.00
7 Buna Lejos 1 1,812 1,800 382 4.71
8 Buna Lejos 2 2,048 2,041 421 4.85
9 Calumpang Cerca 2,820 2,796 584 4.79
10 Calumpang Lejos 2,543 2,514 526 4.78
11 Carasuchi 1,187 1,123 278 4.04
12 Daine 1 1,706 1,700 377 4.51
13 Daine 2 2,177 2,165 452 4.79
14 Guyam Malaki 2,411 2,403 506 4.75
15 Guyam Munti 589 587 145 4.04
16 Harasan 922 918 214 4.28
17 Kayquit I 1,401 1,396 302 4.62
18 Kayquit 2 1,810 1,799 388 4.64

163 | P a g e
 19 Kayquit 3 2,213 2,205 463 4.76
20 Kaytambog 1,225 1,221 273 4.48
21 Kaytapos 1,333 1,328 289 4.60
22 Limbon 565 558 133 4.21
23 Lum. Balagbag 961 958 225 4.25
24 Lum. Halayhay 1,402 1,395 315 4.43
25 Ma. Kahoy Cerca 1,700 1,694 367 4.61
26 Ma. Kahoy Lejos 869 866 206 4.20
27 Mataas na Lupa 2,894 2,885 580 4.97
28 Pulo 917 909 209 4.34
29 Tambo Balagbag 722 719 168 4.27
30 Tambo Ilaya 847 845 191 4.43
31 Tambo Kulit 1,466 1,391 306 4.54
32 Tambo Malaki 1,837 1,826 405 4.51
Sub – Total 56,287 55,803 11,893 4.69
TOTAL 62,030 61,515 13,061 4.71
Source: NSO various population census

Increasing the total population of the 36 barangays of this municipality in the

next 10 year by 75,032 with estimated household population of 74,409 as shown in

table 26& table 28 respectively, connotes an increasing demand for housing and

other basic needs and for allocating land for various uses.

164 | P a g e
 Table 28: Yearly Projected Total Population per Barangay Year 2011-2020

Total Partici Projected Population

Pop’n pation
Barangay 2011 2012 2013 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2019 2020
2010 Rate
Urban
Poblacion 1 1,320 0.0213 1,347 1,372 1,399 1,426 1,453 1,481 1,509 1,538 1,568 1,598
Poblacion 2 999 0.0161 1,018 1,037 1,057 1,077 1,098 1,119 1,141 1,163 1,185 1,208
Poblacion 3 1,030 0.0166 1,049 1,070 1,090 1,111 1,133 1,154 1,176 1,199 1,222 1,246
Poblacion 4 2,394 0.0386 2,440 2,488 2,535 2,584 2,633 2,685 2,736 2,788 2,842 2,896
Sub – Total 5,743 0.0926 5,854 5,967 6,081 6,198 6,317 6,439 6,562 6,688 6,817 6,948
Rural
Agus-os 1,386 0.0223 1,410 1,437 1,465 1,493 1,521 1,551 1,580 1,611 1,642 1,673
Alulod 4,322 0.0697 4,406 4,491 4,577 4,665 4,755 4,846 4,940 5,034 5,131 5,230
Banaba Cerca 2,982 0.0481 3,041 3,099 3,159 3,220 3,282 3,344 3,409 3,474 3,541 3,609
Banaba Lejos 1,313 0.0212 1,340 1,366 1,392 1,419 1,446 1,474 1,502 1,531 1,561 1,591
Bancod 2,434 0.0392 2,478 2,526 2,574 2,624 2,674 2,726 2,778 2,831 2,886 2,941
Buna Cerca 3,473 0.0560 3,540 3,608 3,678 3,748 3,821 3,894 3,969 4,045 4,123 4,202
Buna Lejos 1 1,812 0.0292 1,846 1,882 1,918 1,955 1,992 2,030 2,069 2,109 2,150 2,191
Buna Lejos 2 2,048 0.0330 2,086 2,126 2,167 2,209 2,251 2,295 2,339 2,384 2,429 2,476
Calumpang 2,820 0.0455 2,877 2,932 2,988 3,046 3,104 3,164 3,224 3,286 3,350 3,414
Cerca
Calumpang 2,543 0.0410 2,592 2,642 2,693 2,744 2,797 2,851 2,906 2,961 3,018 3,076
Lejos
Carasuchi 1,187 0.0191 1,208 1,231 1,254 1,278 1,303 1,328 1,354 1,380 1,406 1,433
Daine 1 1,706 0.0275 1,739 1,772 1,806 1,841 1,876 1,912 1,949 1,986 2,024 2,063
Daine 2 2,177 0.0351 2,219 2,262 2,305 2,349 2,395 2,441 2,488 2,535 2,584 2,634
Guyam Malaki 2,411 0.0389 2,459 2,507 2,555 2,604 2,654 2,705 2,757 2,810 2,864 2,919
Guyam Munti 589 0.0095 601 612 624 636 648 661 673 686 699 713
Harasan 922 0.0149 942 960 979 997 1,017 1,036 1,056 1,076 1,097 1,118
Kayquit I 1,401 0.0226 1,429 1,456 1,484 1,513 1,542 1,571 1,602 1,632 1,664 1,696

165 | P a g e
 Kayquit 2 1,810 0.0292 1,846 1,882 1,918 1,955 1,992 2,030 2,069 2,109 2,150 2,191
Kayquit 3 2,213 0.0357 2,257 2,300 2,345 2,390 2,436 2,482 2,530 2,579 2,628 2,679
Kaytambog 1,225 0.0197 1,245 1,269 1,294 1,319 1,344 1,370 1,396 1,423 1,450 1,478
Kaytapos 1,333 0.0215 1,359 1,385 1,412 1,439 1,467 1,495 1,524 1,553 1,583 1,613
Limbon 565 0.0091 575 586 598 609 621 633 645 657 670 683
Lum. 961 0.0155 980 999 1,018 1,038 1,057 1,078 1,098 1,120 1,141 1,163
Balagbag
Lum. 1,402 0.0226 1,429 1,456 1,484 1,513 1,542 1,571 1,602 1,632 1,664 1,696
Halayhay
Ma. Kahoy 1,700 0.0274 1,732 1,766 1,799 1,834 1,869 1,905 1,942 1,979 2,017 2,056
Cerca
Ma. Kahoy 869 0.0140 885 902 919 937 955 973 992 1,011 1,031 1,050
Lejos
Mataas na 2,894 0.0467 2,952 3,009 3,067 3,126 3,186 3,247 3,310 3,373 3,438 3,504
Lupa
Pulo 917 0.0148 936 954 972 991 1,010 1,029 1,049 1,069 1,089 1,110
Tambo 722 0.0116 733 747 762 777 791 807 822 838 854 870
Balagbag
Tambo Ilaya 847 0.0136 860 876 893 910 928 946 964 982 1,001 1,020
Tambo Kulit 1,466 0.0236 1,492 1,521 1,550 1,580 1,610 1,641 1,672 1,705 1,737 1,771
Tambo Malaki 1,837 0.0296 1,871 1,907 1,944 1,981 2,019 2,058 2,098 2,138 2,179 2,221
Sub – Total 56,28 0.9074 57,36 58,46 59,59 60,73 61,90 63,09 64,30 65,54 66,80 68,08
7 8 9 3 8 5 4 7 2 1 4

TOTAL 62,03 1.0000 63,22 64,43 65,67 66,93 68,22 69,53 70,86 72,23 73,61 75,03
0 2 6 4 6 2 3 9 0 8 2
Source: Municipal Planning & Development Office

166 | P a g e
Projected Household Population by Age Group, and by Sex

The population of Indang is expected to increase steadily during the next 10

years. The municipal household population is expected to increase to 74,409 by year

2020. The projected increase can be attributed to factors like urbanization and in-

migration wherein residents from other locality got married to local residents and

others acquired a job and lived in the municipality. With this expected increase in

population, the demands for jobs, land, housing, recreation and other facilities would

likewise increase. (see Table 29)

Table 29: Yearly Projected Household Population by Age-Group Year 2011-2020

HH
Part’n Projected Household Population
Rate
Age- Pop’n
(PR) 2011 2012 2013 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2019 2020
Group (2010)

TOTAL 61,515 1.0000 62,697 63,901 65,129 66,380 67,656 68,956 70,281 71,63 73,007 74,409
0

Under 1 1,332 0.0217 1,361 1,387 1,413 1,440 1,468 1,496 1,525 1,554 1,584 1,615

1-4 4,899 0.0797 4,997 5,093 5,191 5,290 5,392 5,496 5,601 5,709 5,819 5,730

5-9 6,337 0.1030 6,458 6,582 6,708 6,837 6,969 7,102 7,239 7,378 7,520 7,664

10-14 6,195 0.1007 6,314 6,435 6,558 6,684 6,813 6,944 7,077 7,213 7,352 7,493

15-19 6,091 0.0990 6,207 6,326 6,448 6,572 6,698 6,827 6,958 7,091 7,228 7,366

20-24 5,722 0.0930 5,831 5,943 6,057 6,173 6,292 6,413 6,536 6,662 6,790 6,920

25-29 5,332 0.0867 5,436 5,540 5,647 5,755 5,866 5,978 6,093 6,210 6,330 6,451

30-34 4,198 0.0683 4,282 4,364 4,448 4,534 4,621 4,710 4,800 4,892 4,986 5,082

35-39 4,419 0.0718 4,502 4,588 4,676 4,766 4,858 4,951 5,046 5,143 5,242 5,343

40-44 3,714 0.0604 3,787 3,860 3,934 4,009 4,086 4,165 4,245 4,326 4,410 4,494

45-49 3,329 0.0541 3,392 3,457 3,523 3,591 3,660 3,731 3,802 3,875 3,950 4,026

50-54 2,856 0.0464 2,909 2,965 3,022 3,080 3,139 3,200 3,261 3,324 3,388 3,453

167 | P a g e
 55-59 2,069 0.0336 2,107 2,147 2,188 2,230 2,273 2,317 2,361 2,407 2,453 2,500

60-64 1,378 0.022 1,404 1,431 1,459 1,487 1,515 1,545 1,574 1,605 1,635 1,667
4

65-69 1,247 0.0203 1,273 1,297 1,322 1,348 1,373 1,400 1,427 1,454 1,482 1,511

70-74 1,016 0.0165 1,034 1,054 1,075 1,095 1,116 1,138 1,160 1,182 1,205 1,228

75-79 661 0.0107 671 684 697 710 724 738 752 766 781 796

80 & 720 0.0117 734 748 762 777 792 807 822 838 854 871
over

Source: NSO various population census

Projected Population Composition

The projected population composition which is shown at table below indicates

the characteristics of the residents of Indang in the next 10 years in terms of age-

groupings and sex ratios. It also provides the basis for estimating population

services/opportunities for different segments of population such as child and youth,

productive or working-age population and the elderly.

Projected Population by School-Age, Working-Age, Dependent-Age

group and Sex
Age- 2010 Data
Group 2011 2012 2013 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2019 2020
School- Fe- Fe- Fe-
Age male male male
22,63 Male 23,06 23,50 23,96 24,42 Male 25,36 25,85 26,35 26,85 Male
Populati
1 6 9 1 1 9 6 3 9
on
Pre-
school
4,208 2,179 2,029 4,288 4,371 4,455 4,540 2,396 2,232 4,717 4,807 4,900 4,994 2,636 2,454
(3-6)
Element
ary (7-
7,548 3,885 3,663 7,693 7,841 7,991 8,145 4,273 4,028 8,461 8,623 8,789 8,958 4,699 4,431
12)
Seconda

168 | P a g e
ry (13- 4,933 2,509 2,424 5,028 5,125 5,223 5,324 2,760 2,666 5,530 5,637 5,745 5,855 3,035 2,933
16)
Tertiary
(17-21) 5,942 2,963 2,979 6,057 6,172 6,292 6,412 3,259 3,277 6,661 6,789 6,919 7,052 3,584 3,604
Working
age (15-
39,10 19,43 19,66 39,85 40,62 41,40 42,19 21,38 21,62 43,83 44,67 45,53 46,41 23,51 23,78
64)
5 9 6 6 2 3 8 0 9 5 8 5 1 4 8
Labor
Force
42,75 21,41 21,33 43,57 44,41 45,26 46,13 23,55 23,46 47,92 48,84 49,78 50,74 25,90 25,81
(15 &3 5 8 4 1 5 4 3 8 4 5 3 0 4 0
over)
Depende
nt
22,40 11,18 11,21 22,83 23,27 23,72 24,17 12,30 12,33 25,11 25,59 26,08 26,58 13,53 13,56
Populati
4 7 7 4 3 0 6 4 6 4 6 8 9 2 8
on
Young
(0-14)
18,76 9,713 9,049 19,12 19,49 19,86 20,24 10,68 9,952 21,03 21,43 21,84 22,26 11,74 10,94
2 2 0 4 6 3 2 6 7 7 9 6
Old
(65 & 3,642 1,474 2,168 3,712 3,783 3,856 3,930 1,621 2,384 4,082 4,160 4,241 4,322 1,783 2,622
over)

Table 30: Yearly Projected Population Composition by School-age, Working-age,

Dependent-age group and Sex, Year 2011-2020

Source: Municipal Planning & Development Office

Dependency Ratio

169 | P a g e
 The household population of Indang in 2010 is 61,515. Dependent age groups

are those with ages below 15 and above 64 years old. About 30.50% comprise the

child group (below 15 years old) and about 5.92% comprise the elderly (65 and

above). The productive or working age group which constitutes the potential labor

force (15 and 64 years old) is about 63.58%. This brings the dependency ratio to 57

which mean that for every 100 working age individuals there are 57 dependents (48

children & 9 elders). (See table below).

Table 31: Dependency Ratio, Year 2010

Child Dependency Ratio 48

Old-Age Dependency Ratio 9
Age Dependency Ratio 57
Source: NSO various population census

Religion

Based on the latest survey, majority of residents are still belongs to Roman

Catholic numbering around 50,561 or 81.51% of total population. The remaining

18.49% belong to the various Iglesia ni Cristo, Born-again Christian, Protestant,

Jehova’s Witness, Islam, Seventh day Adventists and other religious sects.

170 | P a g e
 Table 32: Religious Affiliation, Year 2010

Religious Affiliation Number Percent

Roman Catholic 50,561 81.51%
Iglesia ni Cristo, Born-again Christian, 11,469 18.49%
Protestant, Jehova’s Witness, Islam,
Seventh day Adventists and other religious
sects
TOTAL 62,030 100.00%
Source: NSO various population census

Labor and Employment

In 2010, the municipality of Indang has a labor force population of 42,753 with

the age of 15 years old and over. The 39,141 or 91.55% are in the labor force

whereas 3,612 are not in the labor force. Within the labor force, the 36,821 or

94.07% are economically active while 2,320 are unemployed.

Table 33 shows that 18,734 or 50.88% of those employed in the labor force

are male while the remaining 49.12% are female. This brings that the ratio is for

every 100 employed person there are almost 49 of them are female.

Table 33: Labor Force Population by Sex and Employment Status, Year 2010

Population 15 Labor Force Not in the

yrs and Over Labor Force
Indang Employed % Unemployed %
Male 21,415 18,734 50.88 1,171 50.47 1,510
Female 21,338 18,087 49.12 1,149 49.53 2,102
TOTAL 42,753 36,821 100.00 2,320 100.00 3,612
Source: Municipal Planning & Development Office

171 | P a g e
Projected Labor Force

In the year 2020, the projected household population with the age of 15 years

old and over will registered at 51,714 and the 47,318 of them are in the labor force. It

will expect also that 23,233 in the labor force are women while 24,085 are male. (see

table below)

Table 34: Projected Labor Force by Sex Year 2011-2020

Part’
n
2010 Projected Household Population 15 yrs & over
Rate
Data (PR) 2011 2012 2013 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2019 2020
HH
Pop,n 15
42,75 1.000 43,57 44,41 45,26 46,13 47,02 47,92 48,84 49,78 50,74 51,71
yrs &
3 4 1 5 4 1 4 5 3 0 4
over
In the
labor
39,14 0.915 39,87 40,63 41,41 42,21 43,02 43,85 44,69 45,55 46,42 47,31
force
1 0 6 7 3 4 0 3 1 7 8

Male 19,90 0.509 20,29 20,68 21,08 21,48 21,89 22,32 22,74 23,18 23,63 24,08
5 4 4 1 6 9 0 9 5 1 5

Female 19,23 0.491 19,57 19,95 20,33 20,72 21,12 21,53 21,94 22,36 22,79 23,23
6 6 2 6 7 5 0 4 6 6 3
Source: Municipal Planning & Development Office

172 | P a g e
 Analysis Matrix

Office/Person
Responsible
Findings/Observation Implications (Effects) Policy Options/Interventions

Presence of about 75,032 Built environment Update CLUP and CDP; MPDO, MDC
total population in year increases; &
Formulate spatial
2020;
Unbuilt development framework and SB members
environment eventually structure plan;
reduced;

Having a working-age Strengthen the Public

PESO
population of 47,302 in + Availability of sufficient Employment Service Office
2020; working force; (PESO);
Unemployment Create viable project
rate might be increase; utilizing local potential
products using local -MSWD,
manpower. MAO,MPDO

Having a Sex Ratioof

+ - Male are dominated
91(male/Female); Strengthening the program
by female in terms of
on GAD; GAD
number;
Promote gender equality Committee
and empower women;
In every 100 working age
individuals there are 57
Insufficient
dependents Provide government support
income to support family
mechanism to augment the MDC,PESO,
(48 children and 9 elders); needs; household income; MPDO,MSWD
, MAO
Strengthening the program
for senior citizens welfare; MSWD

Increasing the number of

young children aged from
+ Perceived increase of Strengthening the program
birth to 6 yrs old; on Early Child Care and
human resources; LCPC
Development;

Approximate 27,376
school- age population in Strengthening Local School
2020; Existence of Board; DECS,LSB
school facilities which
are non- conducive for Provide gov’t. support
learning; mechanism to attain the
standard “ classroom- DECS,LSB,
student- teacher ” ratio;

173 | P a g e
 MPDO
Strengthening the program
on out-of-school youth;
Nearly about 1% of
population with age 10-19
Lower DECS,LSB,
have not able to finished
employment opportunity; MPDO,MLCC
secondary level or
belongs to Out-of-School Higher
Youth; unemployment rate;
Strengthen/Mobilize the
Local Housing Board.
Presence of about 15,799 Increase the
household in year 2020; doubled-up households Local Housing
Board
and unacceptable
housing units

Physical environment

Indang is an inland municipality composed of 36 barangay with a total area of

8,920 hectares. It is centrally located in the upland of Cavite with a bearing of

12052’ longitude and 1411’ latitude. It is bounded on the north by the municipality

of Naic and Trece Martirez City, on the south by municipality of Mendez and

Tagaytay City, on the west by municipalities of Alfonso and Maragondon, and on the

east by the municipalities of Amadeo and Trece Martirez City.

The municipality is highly accessible from major points within the province and

to major market areas like Naic and Alfonso while it is only 12 kilometers from the

provincial capital, Indang is about 75 kilometers away from Metro Manila via

Tagaytay City and 55 kilometers through Trece Martirez City.

174 | P a g e
 The topography of Indang is characterized by gently sloping or rolling terrain.

Almost 40.36% of its total land area is within the slope grade of 3-8% while 2,135

hectares is within the slope range of 8-15% which is characterized by

undulating/sloping terrain. The land elevation ranges from 230 to 380 meters above

sea level. The land area is furthermore fairy well dissected by numerous creeks and

streams that are deeply cut, characterized by steep and abrupt banks. Rivers, creeks

and springs supply the water needed for both agricultural and household purposes.

These rivers and creeks also serve as natural drainage into which storm water is

discharged and flow in northern direction to discharge into either Manila Bay or

Laguna de Bay.

The municipality is blessed with six (6) major rivers with 88 natural springs

which are sources of household water supply. The water classification is within a

water Class “A” classification and therefore safe for drinking. All of the barangays

have existing waterworks utilities with level 3 (pipe-in) distribution system.

Most of the rural barangay have an abundant supply of bamboos where

numerous spring and rivers are located. These materials could be made or

processed into handicraft products like chairs and tables, baskets and other home

fixtures. Investment on this kind of industry may lead into an increase of non-

agricultural employment.

The major land use is agricultural which occupies 7,189.418 hectares. This

constitutes about 80.60 percent of the total land area. Agricultural areas consist of
175 | P a g e
agricultural croplands, agri-industrial and commercial farms raising such as swine &

broiler production, and other backyard livestock like cattle, piggery, and poultry. The

municipal government has existing agri-demo farm located at barangay Banaba

Lejos. It is design to capture the people’s interest on how agriculture works in the

upland area and to develop the farm technology to improve the crops, vegetable,

poultry, and livestock production. Likewise, the same will likely motivate the local

farmers and landowner to strengthen agriculture sector.

The LGU has established a Material Recovery Facility (MRF) in compliance to

the R.A. 9003 which is known as Ecological Solid Waste Management Act of 2000.

This facility is design to recover reusable and recyclable materials, and

biodegradable waste while the residual wastes are transported to accredited sanitary

landfill. In addition, the LGU are supportive in national government project in

cleaning-up and rehabilitation of Manila Bay.

Indang has 25.57 km. barangay roads, 4.982 km. municipal roads, 28.64 km.

provincial roads, 29.64 km. national roads, and 46.433 km. farm-to-market roads

within the municipality. The barangay roads primarily provide the delivery of goods,

and services, and bring improvement on the living condition of the rural populace. On

the other hand, the 85.36% of farm-to-market roads are not passable particularly

during rainy season. There are twenty-one (21) bridges connecting the nineteen (19)

barangay of this municipality, these are classified as national, provincial, municipal

and barangay bridges.

176 | P a g e
 Land transportation is the principal mode of transporting goods and services

in Indang and its neighboring municipalities. Vehicular routes going to other

municipalities are Indang-Tagaytay, Indang-Alfonso, Indang-Naic, and Indang-Trece

Martirez City-Dasmarinas to Baclaran and vice versa. There are several types of

vehicles transversing the place, but the most commonly used vehicles for public

conveyances are buses, jeepneys and a number of tricycles plying within the

Poblacion area and nearby barangays.

At present, there are available 130 buses routing to Baclaran, 749 jeeps with

routes to adjacent municipalities and cities, and 1066 tricycles steering around

Indang. These are supported by 19 transport groups and provided by the support of

six (6) gasoline stations and eight (8) auto supplies for their maintenance and

operational needs.

Radio and television sets in Indang have a good reception. These

communication channels make the populace of Indang well-informed and up-to-date

in terms of national and international issues. The Philippine Long Distance

Telephone Company (PLDT) and Digital Telecommunication Inc. (DIGITEL) are the

two leading telephone companies serving the municipality. On mobile

telecommunication, 18 mobile Base Station transceiver

177 | P a g e
towers are currently in place. Cellular phones are commonly used by the residents

especially in remote barangays wherein telephone landline services are not

available.

Typhoons are the common natural phenomena experienced by the

municipality of Indang. It occurs between the months of July to December and strikes

unexpectedly with storm winds and heavy rains which results to disastrous

consequences to the population. These cause landslides along the roads at

Barangay Lumampong Halayhay, Tambo Kulit, Tambo Ilaya, Tambo Malaki,

Kaytambog, Kayquit-2, Poblacion-4. It also threatens the lives of people, crops and

livestock, disturbance to the ecosystem, destruction of properties, disruption in

utilities such as waterworks system, power, communication and transportation.

Sometimes, there were incidental hazard like cases of dengue & other livestock

epidemic health problems.

Along the river of Indang, there are existing private resorts utilizing river bed

as swimming pool by constructing structures which is vulnerable to environmental

hazard while causing decrease of the quality of running water.

Based on Hazard Mapping and Assessment for Effective Community-Based

Disaster Risk Management conducted by PHILVOLCS-DOST, Indang is susceptible

on the Strong Ground Shaking when the earthquake intensity scale reached PEIS

Intensity VIII and above, but not susceptible on Earthquake-Induced landslide.

178 | P a g e
However, there are a possible landslide deposits along major rivers. Generally, the

municipality has low susceptibility on Rain-Induced landslide.

The existing educational facilities are scattered in different barangays of this

municipality. These are municipal day care center with 25 day care station, 26 public

elementary schools (district 1&2) with a total of 216 classrooms, 2-national high

schools with 45 classrooms, and Cavite State University (main campus) with 100

school buildings which caters pre-school, elementary, secondary(science-classes),

and tertiary education curriculum. However, there are still 9 elementary schools and

8 secondary schools operated by private entity with around 232 classrooms.

The municipal government and all barangays have to strengthen the capacity

of the local government bureaucracy, improve the public administrative support

infrastructure facilities and other utilities. While the 36 barangays have existing multi-

purpose hall on their respective areas to support their administrative functions, the

Spanish-type municipal hall which was constructed during Spanish period will no

longer accommodate the needs to support the required administrative services due

to inadequate space and limited parking area necessary in the normal business

transaction in the government. Thus, the construction of new municipal hall is

essential.

Social sector studies

A major task of the government is to improve the level of human development

in the community and strengthen its capability towards the effective delivery of basic

179 | P a g e
services. Analysis of social sub-sectors can pave the way for the municipal

government to achieve this intention.

Housing

Housing symbolizes the physical structure where family dwells and

strengthened as the basic foundation of the society.Based on 2010 Census of

Population and Housing and other various censuses, Indang has 13,061 total

household with 12,962 occupied housing units. However, the 81.59% of lot tenure

status are owned or being amortized, 7.34% are being rented, while the 10.40% are

rent-free with the consent of the owner, and almost 0.67% is rent-free w/out the

consent of the owner. See table 35.

Table 35: Household by Tenure Status of the Lot, (Year 2010)

Tenure Status of the Lot

Rent-free with Rent-free w/out

Total Occupied
Total Households Consent of Consent of
Housing Units Owned/Being Rented
Amortized Owner Owner
Indang

13,061 12,962 10,656 959 1,358 88

% of Total HH

100.00 - 81.59 7.34 10.40 0.67

Source: NSO various census

180 | P a g e
 The numbers of new housing units that will required for the planning period as

stated on table below shows the HU eventually depend on the projected size of the

population increase and the formation of new households.

Table 36: Current and Projected Housing Need (2011-2020)

Present Future Housing Need

Housing Needs
Needs 2011 2012 2013 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2019 2020

Housing backlog 298

Household Formation
due to Increase in
Population 173 176 180 184 186 190 194 198 202 205

Upgrading - - - - - - - - - - -

TOTAL 298 173 176 180 184 186 190 194 198 202 205

Office/Person
Findings/Observation Implications (Effects) Policy Options/Interventions Responsible

11.49% of occupied housing units

are made of light materials due to Local Housing
Provide government Board;
insufficient income(Households - Vulnerable to typhoon and
mechanism for job opportunity
income were prioritized for basic earthquake; MPDO,MSWD,
to augment their income;
necessities such as food, clothing, MAO, PESO
education and health care);

- Susceptible to eviction and Provision of lot/land security of

11.07% of lots occupied by - Local Housing
demolition order from the lot tenure by identifying lots for
households are rent-free; Board;
owners; socialized housing;

Settlements in Old roads at Brgy. - Susceptible to eviction and

Identification of lot for - Local Housing
Buna Lejos , Calumpang Lejos demolition order from the
relocation; Board;
and Agus-os; government;

181 | P a g e
 Presence of informal settlements Deterioration of water quality; Relocate squatters situated
- Local Housing
along river/creek in Brgy. Alulod, Vulnerable to environment along creek and river
Board;
and Poblacion (Brgy.2 & 3); hazard; easements;

- Exposure to environment Strengthen/Mobilize the Local

Current housing backlog is about hazard due to doubled-up Housing Board; - Local Housing
298 housing units. households and unacceptable Identify site for socialized Board;
housing units. housing

+ Decent, durable and

Update the community
Presence of Indang Habitat Village affordable houses;
development of the village - Local Housing
(satellite project of Habitat for + Local project affiliated to
Strengthen the Local Housing Board;
Humanity Foundation Inc.); Habitat for Community
Board;
Philippines;

+ Access to decent and

Presence of eight(8) residential Regulate the conversion of - Sangguniang
affordable housing
subdivision; land for residential subdivision; Bayan, MPDO
opportunities;

+ Added social responsibility Address the issues to

on the part of the LGU; Sangguniang Bayan;

State of Health and Nutrition in Indang (2008-2010):

State of Health and Nutrition 2008 2009 2010

Morbidity Rate (per 100,000 population)

- Tuberculosis 9.940 8.140 12.45

- Diarrhea (all age groups) 38.56 36.89 42.07

- Heart and vascular diseases 0.617 0.515 0.656

- Dengue infection 26.00 22.00 20.00

- HIV Prevalence No case No case No case

- Malaria -do- -do- -do-

Mortality Rate (per 1,000 population)

Maternal
No case 0.870 1.940
Infant
22.18 21.94 28.18
Under 5 years old (deaths among children 0-4 years old per
22.18 24.58 30.12
1,000 live births)

Crude Death Rate (incidence of death in all ages per 7.070 7.510 7.770

182 | P a g e
 1,000 population)

Percentage of children below normal weight (children with

Below 10% Below 10% Below 10%
aged 0-5 years old)

Analysis Matrix

Office/Person
Findings/Observation Implications (Effects) Policy Options/Interventions Responsible

Health services offered by MHO Some patients with high level Provide support mechanism for Local Health
are limited to; Primary Health of medication had to be the advancement of health Board
Care (basic curative service), transfer to provincial hospital or services, facilities and function;
Comprehensive Maternal and other private medical center;
Child Care, Maternity Services, Mobilize the Local Health Board;
Disease Control and
Environmental Sanitation; Local Health
Board chairman

Address immediately the cause

Occurrence of dengue out- break
Community apprehension; of epidemic;
and otherdeadly livestock
disease;
Local Health
Board
Inadequate health personnel and Health staff had forced to Provision of additional health
staff; extend their working hours; personnel;

Additional cost incurred for

personal services; Local Health
Board
Absence of rules and regulations Enact an ordinance in the
on the operation and Improper management operation and maintenance ;
maintenance of municipal resulting crammed positioning;
cemetery; Expansion of existing cemetery
Congested municipal on the appropriate sites; MPDO,MDC
cemetery;
Sang’g Bayan

Address the issues to

Existence of some commercial Breeding ground of diseases; Sangguniang Bayan by enacting
and backyard piggery disposing rules, regulation and policies;
liquid waste in the river/creek; Ground and surface water
contamination;
SB, MHO,
+ Local sufficiency on meat;
MENRO,
Periodic testing of water
Presence of contamination of sources;
sources of water supply; Exposure to disease;
Study the source of
Health risk to contamination and suggest
families/individuals; actions accordingly;
MHO, Sanitary
Inspectors
Strengthening the program on
Around 8.34% and 3.15% of total
environmental sanitation;
households have unsanitary and

183 | P a g e
 Unhygienic surrounding;
no-toilet facilities respectively;
Comply to Manila-Bay Clean-up
Household members are
project (Writ of mandamus) MHO, Sanitary
susceptible to diseases;
Inspectors,
MENRO
Some residents are still dispose Intensify campaign on proper
their garbage at the creek, river waste disposal;
or vacant lots; Ground and surface water
Strictly implemented the
contamination;
MHO, Sanitary
R.A. 9003;
Susceptible to diseases; Inspectors,
MENRO
Below 10% of total children with
Continuous implementation of
aged 0-5 years old are below
feeding program;
normal weight;
Prone to sickness;
MHO,MSWDO

Provide government support Local Health

mechanism for the sustainability Board
+ Compliant with the of BEMONC facilities.;
Presence of Basic Emergency
Millennium Development Goals
Maternal and Obstetric Neonatal
(MDGs) of the national Passed an ordinance
Care 24/7 services.
government.
prohibiting traditional (home) Sanguniang
birthservices; Bayan

Health Care Program

Brief Description - This program aims to ensure the residents with adequate

medical healthcare and assure the community of sanitation services. It also intends

to have a safe birth delivery services.

Programs:

 Comprehensive maternal and child health;

 Maternity services;

 Disease control;

 Environmental sanitation;

184 | P a g e
  Dental services; and

 Diagnostic and laboratory services.

Components:

 Manpower expansion;

 Maintenance/Improvement of municipal health center, facilities and utilities;

 Improvement of municipal health center as center of birthing place;

 Purchase of medicines, medical supplies and necessary equipment;

 Health and nutrition program & activities;

 Family planning;

 Strengthening Municipal Health Board;

 Acquisition of site for Municipal Hospital and construction;

 Sanitation and wastewater management;

 Expansion of municipal cemetery;

 Maintenance/Improvement of existing municipal cemetery;

 Medical mission; and

 Botika sa Barangays.

Proponents - Municipal, Provincial, National Government, PSO’s, NGO’s and PO’s

Beneficiaries - People of Indang, Indigent families, less privileged residents,

pregnant mothers and adjacent communities

185 | P a g e
Local Industry

The municipality major land use is agricultural which occupies 7,189.418

hectares. This constitutes about 80.60 percent of the total land area. They are

predominantly planted with various types of crops like coconut, banana, coffee, fruit

trees, and pineapple, while there are small portions of root crops, vegetables, dragon

fruit and corn. Most farmers are engaged in multi-cropping farming system. There

are also existence of commercial and backyard poultry and livestock production.

With the presence of different crops, poultry and livestock, there are existence

of small-scale livelihood businesses like “Kalamay Buna” & other Bibingka Making,

and other food & fruits processing. The government must take advantage on these

processing activities to complement and further augment or increase the output.

INFRASTRUCTURE & UTILITIES SECTOR STUDIES

This study entails the assessment of the current infrastructure facilities/utilities

to support the existing and future needs/demands of the locality and respond to the

efficient internal and external linkages particularly the equitable access to basic

social services, facilities, and economic opportunities towards the desired physical

growth and development.

Transportation

186 | P a g e
 The municipality is highly accessible from major points within the province and

to major market areas like Naic and Alfonso while it is only 12 kilometers from the

seat of provincial government at the city of Trece Martirez, Indang is about 75

kilometers away from Metro Manila via Tagaytay City and 55 kilometers through

Trece Martirez City.

Indang has 25.57 km. barangay roads, 4.982km. municipal roads, 28.64 km.

provincial roads, 29.64 km. national roads, and 46.433km. farm-to-market roads

within the municipality. The barangay roads primarily provide the delivery of goods,

services, and bring improvement on the living condition of the rural populace. On the

other hand, the 85.36% of farm-to-market roads are not passable by vehicles during

rainy season. There are twenty-one (21) bridges connecting the nineteen

(19)barangay of this municipality, these are classified as national, provincial,

municipal and barangay bridges.

Table 49: Inventory of Bridges Municipality of Indang CY 2010

LOCATION Type Length (m) Width (m)

(Barangay) Name of Bridge Condition

Alulod - Mataas na Lupa Alulod Concrete 21.00 8.50 Passable

Alulod - Kaytapos Saluysoy Concrete 49.00 9.00 Passable

Alulod - Limbon Limbon Concrete 15.00 8.00 Passable

Limbon - Amadeo Limbon-2 Bailey 18.00 3.50 Passable/Critical

Kaytapos Macanda Concrete 13.00 8.00 Passable

Kaytapos - Alulod Patillo-2 Concrete 16.00 8.00 Passable

Kaytapos - Poblacion-1 Banadero Box Culvert 16.00 9.00 Passable

Kayquit - Buna Cerca Kayquit Concrete 18.00 8.00 Passable

Kayquit-3 - Ma. Kahoy Cerca Italaro Concrete 43.00 8.50 Passable

187 | P a g e
 Poblacion-4 - Banaba Cerca Binambangan Concrete 30.00 9.50 Passable

Banaba Cerca - Kaytambog Kaytambog Concrete 21.00 8.50 Passable

Kaytambog - Tambo Malaki Lulungisan Concrete 13.00 8.50 Passable

Tambo Ilaya - Tambo Kulit Luksuhin Concrete 25.30 8.50 Passable

Tambo Kulit - Lum. Halayhay Lipa Concrete 21.00 8.50 Passable

Guyam Malaki - Alfonso Catmon Concrete 29.00 9.00 Passable

Guyam Malaki San Pascual Bailey 9.00 3.50 Passable/Critical

Guyam Malaki - Harasan Harasan Bailey 9.00 3.50 Passable/Critical

Pulo - Harasan Harasan-2 Box Culvert 3.50 4.50 Passable

Tambo Kulit - Lum. Balagbag Magabe Steel 28.00 3.50 Passable/Critical

Tambo Balagbag - Daine-1 Lamiyo Concrete 4.50 3.50 Passable

Calumpang Cerca - Bancod Bancod Steel 66.00 8.00 Passable

Analysis Matrix

Office/Person
Responsible
Findings/Observation Implications (Effects) Policy Options/Interventions

85.36% of Farm-to-Market road Unsafe and slowly transport of Farm-to-Market road DA, MAO,
are not passable by vehicles farm produced; improvement projects; DPWH, MEO
during rainy season;
Decreased of people interest on
farming.

Provide government fund for MPDO, MEO,

98.03% of total barangay roads + Easily access for the delivery road maintenance and DPWH
are all pavement access; of goods and services; improvement;

Insufficient fund for the

maintenance & improvement;
SB members;
Insufficient local support fund for Endorse/Pass a resolution
the maintenance and Poor road maintenance; requesting necessary funds for
improvement of the provincial provincial & national roads;
and national roads within Indang; Safety of commuters might put
at risk;

Four(4) existing bridges are

passable but still in critical Bridge rehabilitation and
MEO, DPWH,
condition; improvement projects;
Safety of commuters are MPDO
jeopardize;

No public transport terminal;

Acquire lot for Public Transport

188 | P a g e
 Existence of public utility Terminal; MPDO, MEO, SB
vehicles utilizing sides of roads
of the Poblacion as their Review, update and revise Local
passengers waiting Traffic Ordinance;
area/parking;

Traffic congestion;

Public deprived of access to

use the road safely;

Power

The Municipality of Indang is served by MERALCO with provincial office at

City of Dasmariñas, Cavite. The 36 barangays of this municipality have mostly been

energized giving a rate of 100percent energization. Consumers are classified into

commercial, residential, public buildings and streetlights. Socialized rate

classification is applied. The high power rate consumption is always expected

because of the unstable fuel adjustment in the world market. Presently, consumers

are expected to increase due to population growth of Indang. The expensive cost of

power has always been one of the major constraints in the industrialization, not only

of Indang but the whole province. However, part of the transmission line of

NAPOCOR had been crosses at the three (3) barangay of this municipality.

MERALCO provides round-the-clock services with occasional brownouts

brought about by line defects and other unavoidable circumstances like inclement

weather. However, these problems are easily undertaken in order to continue their

services to their consumers.

Analysis Matrix

Office/Person
Responsible

189 | P a g e
 Findings/Observation Implications (Effects) Policy Options/Interventions

3.50% of total HH were not able Normal household activities are Formulate government MPDO, PESO,
served by electricity due to jeopardize; sustainable policies for job MAO, MSWD
financial constraint; opportunity to augment their
household income;

Limited agricultural activities Provide sustainable government MAO, MPDO

Part of transmission line of nearest and along the policies to augment the income
NAPOCOR has been crossed in transmission line; of affected farmers;
the three (3) barangays of
Indang; Low agricultural production;

Tree planting program;

Destruction of natural habitat; -MAO, MENRO,
21.31% of total household are
MPDC
using firewood for cooking and
Declining the quality of
perhaps increasing;
environment;

Water

Water is the lifeblood of the environment, essential to the survival of all living

things. People need water to live, as well as to carry out various economic activities.

The increase in population requires more water for drinking, good manufacturing and

fabricating, food production, building construction, and recreational and institutional

purposes. The role of water as a tool for progress and development has become

increasingly important through the years. According to the 2006 UnitedNations

Human Development Report (HDR), “water for life in the household along with water

for livelihoods through production is considering two of the foundations for human

development.”

Considering the six (6) major rivers with 88 natural springs, Indang appears to

be a water-rich town of Cavite with class “A” water classification. However, the 19
190 | P a g e
natural springs are being utilized to augment the household requirement as well as

to carry out different economic activities of the residents. All of the barangays of this

municipality have existing waterworks utilities with level III (piped-in) distribution

system, however, some barangays have experiencing scarcity of water supply during

summer.

The major sources of spring water of Indang Water District are the several

springs along the Ikloy River. It is located between barangay Kayquit and barangay

Kaytambog. Water from these sources is being distributed to barangays managed by

Water District.Additional pumps, pipes, elevated water tanks, expansion of

waterlines, and improvement of spring box were required to sustain the domestic

water requirement of growing populace of the municipality.

With the existence of six (6) major rivers connecting to several water

tributaries, the local government is planning to utilize the surface water resources for

water administration and investment proposal for water/energy sector development

projects.

Analysis Matrix

Office/Person
Responsible
Findings/Observation Implications (Effects) Policy Options/Interventions

191 | P a g e
 Existence of large volume of + Piped-in water supply Investment proposal for water SB member
water from 6 major river and 88 distribution (Level III) in all HH and energy sector development;
natural springs; at all barangays;

- + Excess water are being flow

to Manila bay;
Provide government support
19 natural spring are utilize for program for the preservation and
water domestic demands of the + Clean, hygienic, and healthy protection of the river and natural
MENRO &
barangays; community; springs;
MPDO

Existence of 29 pumps that + Clean & hygienic community; Enact a policy to regulate the - SB member,
support the community extraction of underground water; MENRO,MPDO
- Decrease the underground
needs to attain Level III water water level; Tree planting program;
supply;

Communication and Computer Technology

Newspapers, magazines, and other related reading materials reach the

municipality. Likewise, radio and television sets have a good reception. All these

forms of communication channels make the populace of Indang well-informed and

up-to-date in terms of national and international issues. The Philippine Long

Distance Telephone Company (PLDT) and Digital Telecommunication Inc.

(DIGITEL) are the two leading telephone companies serving the municipality. On

mobile telecommunication, SMART Communication, Inc., GLOBE Telecom, Inc. and

Sun Cellular had installed their Mobile Base Transceiver Stations and

Telecommunication Antenna Tower in the locality. The SMART currently has five (5)

mobile Base Station Towers while GLOBE has eight (8) and Sun cellular has five (5)

mobile transceiver utilities. Cellular phones are commonly used by the residents

especially in remote barangays where telephone landline services are not available.

192 | P a g e
We have also Postal Service office, and five (5) money transfer outlets. There are

existence of several computer shops that cater educational and business research

activities, and computer games.

Analysis Matrix

Office/Person
Findings/Observation Implications (Effects) Policy Options/Interventions Responsible

+ Better telecommunication SB members &

Existence of 18 mobile base Formulate government policy to
signal and reception; Private sector
transceiver station tower; sustain better signal and
+ Facility/utility for investment reception;
promotion;

Presence of computer shops in Formulate policies to regulate the SB members,

- Students are engage or operation of computer shops Brgy. Officials,
close proximity to learning
tempted to play computer offering video games; and School
institution;
games even in school hours; authorities

Infrastructure and Utilities support programs

Brief Description - The programs and projects under this sector deals with the built

environment such as infrastructure building program and the land acquisition

required as right-of-way or easements of public facilities. It also include physical

development proposals for the redevelopment of old and declining sections of the

municipality, opening of new settlement areas and development of new growth

centers. It lays the physical base of social and economic development of the area as

well as provide infrastructure support requirement of other development sectors.

Economic Support Infrastructure program

193 | P a g e
Brief Description - This program aims to enhance the socio-economic infrastructure

support facilities that will help accelerate local economic transformation of Indang as

a place conducive for business and investments, along with the improvement of state

of well-being of the residents.

Programs:

 Agricultural infrastructure development projects;

 Infrastructure support building program & land acquisition;

 Physical development program;

 Tourism infrastructure investment projects;

 Infrastructure program for future economic activities;

 Surface water resources utilization program and potable water development;

 Public administrative Infrastructure support program

194 | P a g e
Components:

 Installation of Deepwells/Water reservoirs for crops & livestock production;

 Construction and improvement of Farm-to-Market road;

 Construction of post-harvest facilities;

 Improvement of Municipal Agri-Demo farm;

 Improvement/Maintenance of public market facilities;

 Redevelopment of old and declining road sections;

 Maintenance/Improvement of roads and construction of bridges:

 Land acquisition of right-of-way for and establishment of new growth area;

 Construction of livelihood training center;

 Public Transport Terminal site acquisition and construction;

 Implementation of infrastructure investment projects;

 Natural springs preservation projects and river protection projects;

 Support-infrastructure for sanitation and wastewater management;

 Facilities and utilities for potable water development; and

 Maintenance/Improvement of existing public administrative, social, and

economic support infrastructure facilities and utilities.

 Proposed and On-going projects of Department of Public Works and

Highways

 Construction of Slope Protection along Indang-Alfonso via Luksuhin Road,

location - Indang, Cavite

 Widening of Alulod Bridge, location - Brgy. Alulod Indang, Cavite

 Road Widening including Drainage, location - Brgy. Alulod Indang, Cavite

 Asphalt overlay along Indang-AlfonsoRoad, location - Brgy. Tambo Malaki,

195 | P a g e
 Indang, Cavite

 Asphalt Overlay along Naic- Tagaytay Road, location - Brgy. Calumpang

Lejos, Indang, Cavite

 Application of Thermoplastic Pavement Markings along National Secondary

Road Naic-Tagaytay Road, location - Indang section

 Repair/Rehabilitation/Improvement (Asphalt Overlay) along Naic-Tagaytay

Road, location - Brgy. Calumpang Cerca and Poblacion -1, Indang, Cavite

 Road Widening along Naic- Tagaytay Road, location - Brgy. Mahabang Kahoy

Cerca, Indang, Cavite

 Construction of Flood Control, location - Brgy. Buna Lejos (Ligas section),

Indang, Cavite

 Construction of Magabi Bridge, location - Brgy. Lum. Balagbag to Daine,

Indang, Cavite

 Construction of Multi-purpose Covered Court, location - Brgy. Kaytapos,

Indang, Cavite,

 Construction of Multi-purpose Covered Court, location - Brgy. Daine-II,

Indang, Cavite,

Social Support Infrastructure program

Brief Description - The program involves the provision of appropriate social support

infrastructure facilities toward the improvement of state of well-being of the residents

and upgrading the quality of social services such as education, health, housing,

welfare, protective/public safety.

196 | P a g e
Programs:

 Schools and facilities improvement program;

 Municipal health center and barangay health station and facilities;

 Sports and recreation development programs;

 Provision of local socialized housing basic facilities & utilities;

 Facilities for the aged and disadvantaged sectors; and

 Facilities for protective and public safety.

Components:

 Construction of additional classroom;

 Maintenance/Improvement of existing school buildings and other facilities;

 Extension of Municipal Health Center to 2nd floor;

 Maintenance/Improvement of existing Municipal Health Center and Barangay

Health Station and facilities;

 Provision of sports and recreation facilities;

 Maintenance/improvement of socialized housing basic facilities & utilities;

 Maintenance/improvement of Senior Citizen building;

 Provision of facilities for disadvantaged sectors;

 Provision of barangay tanod outpost;

 Installation of municipal radio base (VHF/UHF) tower;

 Maintenance/improvement of other existing social buildings & facilities;

 Maintenance/improvement of waterwork system and support facilities;

 Drainage, sewerage and flood control; and

197 | P a g e
  Traffic signals and road signs.

Proponents - LGU in partnership with other government agencies, Private and

Business sectors

Beneficiaries - People of Indang, visitors, indigent families & less-

fortunate individuals, students and out-of-school youths

Public Administrative Support Infrastructure program

Brief Description - The program entails the provision of appropriate public

administrative support infrastructure facilities to ensure efficient and effective local

governance and bringing-up the quality of public service.

Programs:

 Government administrative support structures building program;

 Parks and playground improvement and expansion.

Components:

 Construction of new Municipal Hall;

 Construction of BFP building/office;

 Improvement/maintenance of existing public administrative support buildings

& infrastructure;

 Improvement/maintenance of Heroes park, Rizal park, and Bonifacio shrine;

and

198 | P a g e
  Acquisition of new lot for park and playground and development.

Proponents - LGU in partnership with other government agencies, Private and

Business sectors

Beneficiaries - Resident of Indang, visitors, indigent families & less-

fortunate individuals, students and out-of-school youths

ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT SECTOR

The Philippine Constitution under Article II, Section 16… “The state shall

protect and advance the right of the people to a balance and healthful ecology in

accordance with the rhythm and harmony of nature.”

Indang is a typical upland agricultural town with gently sloping or rolling

terrain. Almost 40.36% of its total land area is within the slope grade of 3-8% while

2,135 hectares is within the slope range of 8-15%. In short, this area is a better

suitable site for upland crops and livestock production. With a total area of around

8,920 hectares, 80.60% remains agricultural.

However, along the river of Indang, there are existing resorts utilizing river

bed as swimming pool by constructing structures which are vulnerable to

environmental hazard while causing decrease of the quality of running water.

199 | P a g e
 The municipal government top priority program is the protection and

preservation of freshwater resources. It includes, but not limited to, the preservation

of fertile soil, protection of rivers and natural springs, and conservation of our

agricultural land.

Moreover, Indang has a Material Recovery Facility (MRF) in compliance to the R.A.

9003 which is known as Ecological Solid Waste Management Act of 2000. This

facility is design to recover reusable and recyclable materials, and biodegradable

waste while the residual wastes are transported to accredited sanitary landfill. In

addition, the LGU are supportive in national government project in cleaning-up and

rehabilitation of Manila Bay.

200 | P a g e
Analysis Matrix

Office/Person
Findings/Observation Implications (Effects) Policy Options/Interventions Responsible

Susceptible to diseases;

Ground and surface water

contamination; Intensify campaign on proper
waste disposal; Brgy. Officials,
Some residents are still dispose
MENRO
their garbage at the creek, river Strict implementation of R.A.
or vacant lots; 9003;
+ Proper waste management;

+ Clean surrounding; Brgy. Officials,

Provide government support
mechanism in sustaining solid MENRO, SB
Existence of municipal Material
Recovery Facility; waste management program;
members

Risk of burials spilling on

adjoining properties; Expansion of existing municipal
cemetery on the appropriate
Congested municipal cemetery; sites; MPDO, MEO,

Sanitary
Improper management resulting Inspector
Enact rules, regulation and
crammed positioning; policies on operation and
Absence of rules and regulations maintenance;
on the operation and Sangguniang
maintenance of municipal Bayan
cemetery;
Breeding ground of diseases;
Enact rules, regulation and
Ground and surface water
Existence of some commercial policies;
contamination; Sangguniang
and backyard piggery disposing
liquid waste in the river/creek; + Local sufficiency on meat; Bayan

Existence of illegal resorts Enforce environmental laws and

Destruction of natural habitat;
wherein the swimming structures other building code and
Exposure to environmental regulations; SB members,
were built in the river bed
hazard; MEO, MENRO,
causing obstruction of river flow. Address issues to Sangguniang MPDO
Reduce the quality of running Bayan;
water;

+ Generate jobs.

201 | P a g e
Environmental Management and support programs

The programs under this sector provide mitigating and preventive measures

for the anticipated impacts on the environmental implications of all development

proposals and activities in Indang. It also embodies projects for the protection of the

watershed areas, maintaining and preserving the quality of natural resources to

sustain the requirements of economic development and ecological balance across

generations. It also includes measures to minimize the vulnerability of the residents

to natural hazard and disasters.

Natural Resources Management program

Brief Description - This program provides mitigating and preventive measures in

safeguarding the watershed areas, maintaining and preserving the quality of land

and freshwater resources to support the requirements of socio-economic

development and activities. It also includes the projects to reduce the effects of

natural hazard and disasters.

Programs:

 Freshwater ecosystem management; and

 Land ecosystem management.

Components:

 Projects for the maintenance and improvement of water quality (both surface

& underground);

 Tree planting project;

 Implementation of Local Environmental Code;

202 | P a g e
  Enactment of Health and Sanitation Code;

 Slope protection projects;

 Climate Change mitigating projects;

 Implementation of Land-use Plan & Zoning Ordinance;

 Natural springs preservation projects;

 River protection projects;

 Implementation of Philippine Clean Water Act (RA 9275) and its IRR;

 Sanitation and wastewater management; and

 Solid waste management.

Proponents - LGU in partnership with other government agencies, Private and

Business sectors

Beneficiaries - Resident of Indang, visitors, farmers, business sectors,

students and academe

203 | P a g e
DISASTER RISK REDUCTION AND MANAGEMENT

Typhoons are the common natural phenomena experienced by the

municipality of Indang. It occurs between the months of July to December and strikes

unexpectedly with storm winds and heavy rains which results to disastrous

consequences to the population. These cause landslides along the roads at

Barangay Tambo Kulit, Tambo Ilaya, Tambo Malaki, Kaytambog, Poblacion-4. It also

threatens the lives of people, crops and livestock, disturbance to the ecosystem,

destruction of properties, disruption in utilities such as waterworks system, power,

communication and transportation. Sometimes there were incidental hazard like

cases of dengue & other livestock epidemic health problems, grass fire and other

structural fire.

Along the river in few barangays are existing resorts utilizing river bed as

swimming pool by constructing structures which are vulnerable to environmental

hazard while causing decrease of the quality of running water.

Based on Hazard Mapping and Assessment for Effective Community-Based

Disaster Risk Management conducted by PHILVOLCS-DOST, Indang has high

susceptibility on the Strong Ground Shaking when the earthquake intensity scale

reached PEIS Intensity VIII and above, but not susceptible on Earthquake-Induced

landslide. However, there are a possible landslide deposits along major rivers.

Generally, the municipality has low susceptibility on Rain-Induced landslide.

204 | P a g e
Analysis Matrix

Office/Person
Findings/Observation Implications (Effects) Policy Options/Interventions Responsible

Comply with the National

Merely susceptible on strong + People are safe along with
Building Code.
ground shaking when the dwelling structures;
MEO and
earthquake reachedPEIS
+ Better place for living; Building Official
Intensity 8 and above;

Organize emergency response

Occurrence of rain-induced team;
landslides along Indang- Alfonso Disastrous consequences to the LDRRMO
road; Update LDRRM plan;
delivery of goods and services;

Existence of resorts utilizing river Decrease/reduce the quality of Enforced environmental laws
bed as swimming pool by and regulations; MENRO, MEO,
running water;
constructing structures;
Address the issues to SB members
Destruction of natural habitat;
Sangguniang Bayan;
+ Generate jobs;

Occurrence of incidental hazard Organize emergency response

team; LDRRMO
like cases of dengue, livestock Disastrous consequences to the
epidemic health affected household;
Update LDRRM plan;

problems, grass fire and other

structural fire;

Local Disaster Risk Reduction and Management and support programs

The sector program and projects addresses specific hazards and specific

actions to be taken should the hazard occur. It will describe the systematic approach

and procedure to reduce the risk and managed the effects of the disaster on the

lives, properties, crops and livestock, infrastructure, buildings, houses and utility

services which hampering the normal living condition and quality of life of the people.

205 | P a g e
This also includes measures to minimize the vulnerability of the residents to natural

hazard and disasters.

Pre-disaster preparedness

Brief Description - This program involves pre-disaster actions and measures being

undertaken within the context of disaster risk reduction and management.

Programs:

 Disaster mitigation and prevention;

 Disaster preparedness;

 Disaster response;

Components:

 Utilizing the DRRM Fund

 Risk assessment and analysis;

 Application of DRR measures;

 Purchasing life-saving rescue equipment, supplies and medicines;

 Public commitment and community actions;

 Education and training; and

 Research and information.

Proponents - LGU in partnership with CSO’s & PSO’s, provincial, national and

other government agencies

206 | P a g e
Beneficiaries - Resident of Indang, visitors, farmers, business sectors,

students and academe

Post-disaster activities

Brief Description - It involves post-disaster recovery activities which consist of

programs and projects for the restoration and improvement of facilities, livelihood,

and living conditions of disaster-affected communities, including efforts to reduce

disaster risk factors.

Program: Rehabilitation and recovery

Components:

Restoration of normal level of functioning; and

Rebuilding livelihood and damaged infrastructures.

Proponents - LGU in partnership with CSO’s & PSO’s, provincial, national and

other government agencies

Beneficiaries - Resident of Indang, visitors, farmers, business sectors,

students and academe

Quick response program

Brief Description – The program entails projects and activities for the provision of

assistance or intervention during or immediately after a disaster to meet the life

preservation and basic subsistence needs of those people affected and in the

restoration of essential activities and facilities.

207 | P a g e
Program: Relief and recovery

Components:

 Quick respond fund utilization;

 Incident command system;

 Damage assessment and need analysis;

 Search and rescue;

 Temporary shelter;

 Provision of basic subsistence needs; and

 Restoration of essential facilities.

Proponents - LGU in partnership with CSO’s & PSO’s, provincial, national and

other government agencies

Beneficiaries - Resident of Indang, visitors, farmers, business sectors,

students and academe

CROSS-SECTORAL ANALYSIS

The structure in analyzing the situation of the whole municipality of Indang

has been evaluated by the Municipal Planning and Development Office (MPDO)

through cross-sectoral techniques. The methods used are proper matching of

sectoral elements with 4-steps assessment process, namely; 1.) Observation. 2.)

208 | P a g e
Explanation. 3.) Implications. 4.) Policy Options/Interventions. This focuses on the

intersectoral issues and concerns of different sectors.

209 | P a g e
Social - Environmental Intersectoral Issues

Observations Explanations Implications Policy Options/Interventions

Intensify campaign on proper

Ground and surface water waste disposal;
Some residents are still contamination;
dispose their garbage at the Strictly implemented the
Most of the barangay Susceptible to diseases;
creek, river or vacant lots;
residents have not yet fully R.A. 9003;
supported the campaign of
barangay officials on proper
waste disposal;

Cutting of trees are still

Enforced environmental laws
exist due to weak
monitoring and Migrant workers/ farmers Destruction of natural habitat; and regulations;
enforcement of laws; augment their income by
Depletion of underground Provide support mechanism to
making charcoal for trading;
water level; augment the household
income;

Decrease/reduce the quality

Existence of resorts in the
These resorts had no of running water; Enforced environmental laws
areas vulnerable to
building permit, location and other regulations;
environment hazard; Destruction of natural habitat;
clearance, and permit to
Address the issues to
operate; + Generate jobs; Sangguniang Bayan;

Presence of eight(8) + Access to decent and Regulate the conversion of

residential subdivision; affordable housing
Strategic location of Indang land for residential
opportunities; subdivision;
in upland Cavite;
Added social responsibility on Address the issues to
the part of the LGU; Sangguniang Bayan;

21.31% of total household Financial limitation and

Destruction of natural habitat; Tree planting program;
are using firewood for constraint;
cooking and perhaps Declining the quality of
increasing; environment;

8.34% and 3.15% of total Unsanitary/unhygienic

households have surrounding;
Financial constraint;
unsanitary and no- toilet
facilities respectively; Health and sanitation are put Provide support mechanism
at risk; for the provision of sanitary
toilet facilities;

210 | P a g e
Social - Institutional Intersectoral Issues

Observations Explanations Implications Policy Options/Interventions

About 11.49% of total Lower household income; - Vulnerable to typhoon/

earthquake; Address housing concern;
housing unit are made of Most of them are migrant
light construction materials; workers Provide support mechanism to
augment household income;

Regulate the conversion

Presence of eight(8) Geographical location + Access to decent housing

211 | P a g e
 residential subdivision; of Indang with 9 entry and opportunities;
exist point;
Added social responsibility on of land for residential
Good and fair climatic the part of the LGU; subdivision;
condition;

Increase the number of

Insufficient support fund for
poor families/HHs in the Increase the number of poor
their families lower Enhance the financial
locality; families/HHs that needs social capability of the government;
employment opportunity;
welfare assistance;
Address social concern;

Growth rate of 1.92%;

Limited services and projects
Increasing the number of
Financial constraint; for social welfare and Strengthening the programs
out-of-school youth;
development; for out-of- school youth;
Migration factor;

Inadequate classroom and Strengthening the program on

Growth rate of 1.92%; teachers; education;
Increasing the number of
school-age population; Migration factor;

Having a Sex Ratio of

+ - Male are dominated by Strengthening the program on
91(male/Female);
female in terms of number; GAD;
Having of about 91 male
living in the community Promote gender equality and
while there are existence of empower women;
100 number of female;

Increasing the number of

Having a growth rate of + Perceived increase of
young children aged from
1.92%; human resources; Strengthening the program on
birth to 6 yrs old;
Early Child Care and
Migration factor; Development;

Below 10% of total children

aged 0-5 yrs old are below Financial constraint; Prone to sickness; Constant implementation of
normal weight;
Slow learner feeding program;

Indangeños culture and arts

not given preferential
attention; Formulate historical book and
Non-existence of Indang Culture and arts of
Historical Committee; Indangeños were not valued establish municipal museum ;
and protected;
3.15 % of total household
had no toilet facilities; Provide support mechanism
Financial constraint;
Unsanitary/unhygienic for the provision of sanitary
surrounding; toilet facilities;

Government personnel or
Provide support mechanism to
staff assigned on social and
augment personnel and staff;
other frontline services are
Personal services limitation Social and other frontline
inadequate; based on RA 7160; services are jeopardize;

212 | P a g e
Social - Economic Intersectoral Issues

Observations Explanations Implications Policy Options/Interventions

Extend government support

Most of them are farmers, and
mechanism to other livelihood
migrant workers; Indecent family living;
opportunities to increase HH
16.09 % of total household are
income;
living below poverty threshold; Most household with six(6) or Children education, health and
more members have no nutrition are jeopardize;
Enhance the socio- economic
sufficient income;
development;

The main source of income of + Accessibility of vehicles in time

18.49% of total household are Unexpected increase of public of needs; Revisit, review all local legislation
earnings from transport utility vehicles like tricycles, on PUV’s;
services; jeeps, and buses traversing Traffic build-up along main street
Indang along with adjacent in town proper;
town;

Presence of non- Indangeño Indang is centrally located in

Unemployment rate eventually
capitalists and investors; upland Cavite;
decrease among local residents;
Area of convergence for social Provide skills training on “high
Leakage out of capital from the demand jobs” for Indangeños to
and agri- economic activities;
local economy; be more competitive;
+ Jobs Generation; Extend financial assistance to
Indangeños for SME’s;
+ Higher income to LGU;
Enact Local Investment and
Incentive Code;
Existence of untapped potential
tourist spots;

Tourism potentials not fully Less income from tourism; Identify, develop and promote
developed; potential tourism resources;
Less jobs opportunities;
Most of Indangeñosnow are
worked in service industry and
other are OFWS;
Provide Institutional support to
agriculture, farmers & land
Indangeños interest on farming owners;
Decreasing farm output/
are gradually decreasing; Due to strategic location of production;
Indang;
Supply of local foods are put at
Existence of residential risk;
-commercial building along Create traffic management office;
Traffic experience in Poblacion main roads and
due to existence of CvSU main
Traffic congestion on rush hour; Review, update and amend Local
campus and other secondary streets; Traffic Ordinance;
campuses; Inconvenience to the pedestrian;

213 | P a g e
Social - Infrastructure/Land Use Intersectoral Issues

Observations Explanations Implications Policy Options/Interventions

Traffic congestion;
Maximize the area into Regulate building height and
Shift from residential land-
income generating land- + Higher income for the LGU; density;
use to mixed-use
(commercial- residential) uses; Enforce building and fire code
+ More active economy;
along major road in the regulation;
Owners maximize use of
Poblacion area;
property; Strengthen but regulate
Mixed-use preferred by mixed-use development;
business sectors;

Presence of informal + Human resource increase;

settlements along river
Migration in Indang due to Exposure to environmental Enforce Anti-squatting laws;
easement at Brgy. Alulod,
livelihood opportunities; hazard;
Buna Cerca, & Poblacion 3;
Enforce building, fire code and
Increase expenditures for land-use regulations;
social services;
Reclassified land for
residential subdivision were LGU had issued Address the issues to
exist but still no development permit more Limited agricultural activities; Sangguniang Bayan by
development in the area in than five(5) preceding years
enacting rules, regulation and
more than five but still undeveloped; Decrease agricultural
policies;
production;
(5) years;

Public utility vehicles No Public transport Review, update and

Traffic congestion;

such as Buses, Jeeps, and terminal; Public deprived of access to revise Local Traffic
Tricycles are utilizing sides use the road safely; Ordinance;
of road in Poblacion as their Different transport groups
passengers waiting had been designated their Inconvenience to the public; Address road hazard and
area/parking; waiting areas scattered safety of pedestrian and riding
within the roads with the public;
consent of barangay
officials;

Existence of old social

infrastructure, building, and Inadequate fund for urgent
utilities; maintenance and Non-conducive for working
Address social building safety;
improvement; condition;
Allocate funds for
Inconvenience for public ;
maintenance improvement;

Inadequate social support

facilities and utilities for the Having a growth rate of
Provide additional social
next 1.92%;
Social services and welfare facilities for future
succeeding years; Migration factor; are jeopardize; requirements;

214 | P a g e
Economic - Environmental Intersectoral Issues

Observations Explanations Implications Policy Options/Interventions

Enforce environmental laws and

regulations;
Existence of illegal resorts These resorts had no building Decrease/reduced the quality of
located within the areas permit, location clearance, and running water; Address issues to Sangguniang
vulnerable to environmental permit to operate; Bayan;
Destruction of natural habitat;
hazard;
+ Generate jobs;

Destruction of natural habitat;

Augment the family income; Enforce environmental laws and
Depletion of underground water
Cutting of trees converting into regulations;
Weak monitoring and level;
charcoal for trading are still
enforcement of laws; Provide support mechanism to
exist; Deterioration of quality of natural augment the household income;
resources;

Reduce coconut production;

Cutting of coconut trees for Shortage of landowner income; Lessen the quality of
environment; Enforce related policies, laws and
commercial purposes are still Weak monitoring and
exist; regulations on cutting of trees;
enforcement of laws;
Provide support mechanism to
augment the landowner income;
Reduced the quality of soil;

Sudden increase of farm Deterioration of quality of natural Conduct soil testing activities and
produce; resources;
Many of the farmers are using recommend effective fertilizers;
synthetic/ commercial fertilizer Deteriorating soil quality; Promote the use of organic
fertilizer;

Breeding ground of diseases;

Existence of some commercial Address the issues to
Weak monitoring and Ground and surface water
and backyard piggery Sangguniang Bayan by enacting
enforcement of laws; contamination;
disposing liquid waste in the rules, regulation and policies;
river/creek;

Health and sanitation are

jeopardize;
Existence of some unsanitary
commercial Address the issues to
Foul odor
Weak monitoring and Sangguniang Bayan by
and backyard poultry facilities; enforcement of laws; Unsanitary/unhygienic
enacting rules, regulation and
policies;

surroundings;
+ Generate jobs and
income;

215 | P a g e
Economic - Institutional Intersectoral Issues

Observations Explanations Implications Policy Options/Interventions

Absence of Local Legislator has not yet Slow economic growth; Prioritize the enactment of
Investment and Incentive prioritize to enact an Code containing investment
Code; ordinance to attract investor Limited employment incentives and economic
& investment; opportunities; promotion;

Perceived presence of Reduced government Improve monitoring capacity

Fluctuating tax collection on unregistered business revenue; on revenue collection;
business and real property; establishment;
Uncollected revenue; Review and revise the local
Perceived increase of Revenue Code;
Unrealized potential revenue;
delinquent tax payer on
business and real property ; Improve database system;

The record on yearly actual Institutionalize the system in

Projects proposal for
production data in every measuring the actual
Absence of systematic agricultural development
production of crops and
monitoring of actual volume barangay on crops and programs and marketing
livestock are not yet livestock;
of production of crops and might be ineffective;
livestock; available;

Inconvenience to buying
Presence of different buy- public; Institutionalize proper
products in undesignated
sectioning;
Absence of proper area of the market;
sectioning in Municipal
Public Market;
Inadequate fund for Health and safety is
immediate improvement; jeopardize;

Risk of infection or bacteria Allocate sufficient fund for the

Public market and transmission; maintenance and
Slaughter house is in need improvement of Public Market
of general touch- up; & Slaughter house;
The annual income of
market are below annual Market division eat up a big
operating expenses; lump of general fund;
Strictly enforce the provision
Shortfall/decrease of
of market fees as per revenue
The Public Market had market revenue collection;
code;
Annual Profitability rate of
negative 30% and negative Revision of Market Code;
10% in CY 2009 & 2010
There are untapped
respectively; potential tourist spots which
can be develop and
promoted;
Less income from tourism;

Less jobs opportunities; Identify, develop and promote

Tourism potential not fully This office is local potential tourism projects;
developed; counterpart of Dept. of
Labor & Employment
(DOLE);

216 | P a g e
 Existence of municipal + Jobs promotion and Provide intitutional support
Public Service Employment employment; mechanism to PESO
Office (PESO); programs and projects;
+ Unemployment rate
perceivable reduced;

Economic - Infrastructure/Land Use Intersectoral Issues

Observations Explanations Implications Policy Options/Interventions

217 | P a g e
 Government site for priority
development;

Site for new Municipal + Conducive working site; Site improvement is a priority;
Center for Administration;
Existence of lot for propose + Alternative site for social Pursue construction of new
New Municipal Hall; and economic opportunities Municipal Hall;
on the adjacent areas;
No public transport
terminal;

Different transport groups Traffic congestion;

Existence of public utility have designated their Acquire lot for Public
vehicles utilizing sides of waiting areas scattered Inconvenience to walking Transport Terminal;
roads of the Poblacion as within the roads; public;
Review, update and revise
their passengers waiting
Public deprived of access to Local Traffic Ordinance;
area/parking;
use the road safety;
Area on Techno-Demo
farming practices on crops,
vegetables and livestock
development; Provide support mechanism to
Existence of site of
+ Best farming practices institutionalize the best
Municipal Agri-Demo Farm;
showcase; farming practices/system;
Maximize the area into
income generating land- + Increase farm production
uses; output;
Regulate building height and
Shift from residential use to density;
commercial along major
Traffic congestion; Enforce building and fire code
road in the Poblacion area;
regulation;
Owners maximize use of + Higher income for the LGU;
property;
Rise of mixed-use
Strengthen but regulate
(residential- commercial) Mixed-use preferred by + More active economy; mixed-use development;
along major road in business sectors;
Poblacion area; + Higher income for the LGU;

Existence of total
85.36% of total FMR are
135.26 km. roads (National- not fully passable during + Access road in the easy Provide institutional support
29.64 km; Provincial-28.64 rainy season; transport of farm produced; for the widening, improvement
km; Municipal-4.98 km; and concreting of FMR;
Barangay-25.57 km; and Four (4) existing bridges (3- + Fast, safe & easy access for
Farm to Market road-46.43 Bailey and 1- Steel) the delivery of goods and Allocate sufficient fund for the
km) and 21 bridges; requires repair & services; road maintenance, &
rehabilitation; improvement and other
+ More active economy; related support projects;
Existing roads requires
improvement and
maintenance;

218 | P a g e
Institutional - Infrastructure/Land Use Intersectoral Issues

Observations Explanations Implications Policy Options/Interventions

Increase number of clients, Decreasing work productivity;

Existing offices in the staff/personnel, supplies & Construction of new Municipal
Municipal Hall have equipment; Not conducive for working Hall;
inadequate working spaces; environment;

Existence of public utility Traffic congestion;

No public transport Acquire lot for Public
vehicles utilizing sides of Inconvenience to walking
terminal; Transport Terminal;
roads of the Poblacion as public;
their passengers waiting Different transport groups Review, update and revise
area/parking; waiting areas scattered Public deprived of access to Local Traffic Ordinance;
within the roads; use the road safely;

Presence of total Inadequate fund for the Road public safety are
jeopardize; Allocate adequate fund in the
road maintenance/
135.26 km. of roads in the improvement/rehabilita tion; maintenance, improvement
municipality; + Enhance mobility and and rehabilitation of roads;
access to major functional
activity areas;

+ Improve socio-economic
activities;
Existing drainage system
are overflow during rainy Prioritize improvement of
season; Road damage; existing drainage;
Flooding persist along
Mabini St. corner Increase of road cost
Evangelista St. in Brgy. 2&3 maintenance;
(Poblacion);
Inadequate fund for the Address social building safety;
maintenance and Non-conducive for working
Existence of old social improvement; condition; Allocate funds for
facilities buildings, improvement;
infrastructure, and utilities; Quality of facilities is
jeopardize;

Uncontrol expansion; Enact an ordinance on

Existence of eight (8) burial
Risk of burials spilling on moratorium;
facilities;
adjacent properties;

BFP temporarily occupied Provide permanent site for

No permanent site for BFP; Loss the morale of BFP BFP station;
the SK Federation building
as Fire Station; personnel;

Parking space in-front of Part of the space are utilize

municipal hall is Identify possible local PNP
as local PNP vehicles Clients deprived of access to vehicles impounding area;
inadequate; impounding area; park properly;

219 | P a g e
Environmental - Infrastructure/Land Use Intersectoral Issues

Observations Explanations Implications Policy Options/Interventions

Some resorts illegally Destruction of natural habitat;

Swimming structures were Enforce environmental laws
operating are within the built within the river bed Exposure to environmental and other regulations;
areas vulnerable to causing obstruction of river hazard;
environmental hazard; flow; Address issues to
Reduce the quality of running Sangguniang Bayan;
Those resorts had no water;
building permit, location
clearances, and permit to + Generate jobs;
operate;

Lack of discipline among

the residents; Breeding ground of diseases;
Penalize throwing of garbage
Drainage system gets
Obsolete design of Road damage; into drainage system;
clogged by garbage;
drainage system;
Increase of road cost Improve design of drainage
maintenance; system;

Inconvenience to Traffic congestion; Increase road network;

Outdated design of existing pedestrian;
Road safety are jeopardize; Create urban nodes in other
roads in the Poblacion
cluster to disperse activities;
areas;

The garbage collected & Strictly implement the R.A

Existence of Municipal Breeding ground of diseases
recovered were not 9003;
Material Recovery with foul odor;

Unsanitary/unhygienic
surroundings;

Facility; Ground water contamination;

totally segregated; Intensify campaign on waste
segregation at source;
Risk of burials spilling on
adjoining properties;

Congested municipal Expansion of municipal

cemetery; Limited area/space; cemetery in the appropriate
sites;
+ Increase of human
resources;

Exposure to environmental Enforce Anti-squatting laws;

Presence of informal Migration to Indang due to hazard;
settlements along river livelihood and employment Enforce building, fire code and
easement at Brgy. Alulod, opportunities; Increase in municipal land-use regulations;
Buna Cerca, & Poblacion 3; expenditures for social
services;

Destruction of natural habitat;

220 | P a g e
Institutional - Environmental Intersectoral Issues

Observations Explanations Implications Policy Options/Interventions

Ground and surface water Intensify campaign on proper

Some residents are still contamination;
dispose their garbage at the waste disposal;
Most of the barangay
creek, river or vacant lots; officials have not yet Susceptible to diseases; Strictly implement the
implemented R.A. no. 9003
particularly the waste R.A. 9003;
collection at
source(household);
Cutting of trees are still
exist due to weak
monitoring and Destruction of natural habitat; Enforced environmental laws
enforcement of laws; Migrant workers/farmers and regulations;
augment their income by Depletion of underground
making charcoal for trading; water level; Provide support mechanism to
Deterioration of quality of augment the household
natural resources; income;
Existence of illegal resorts
located within the areas
vulnerable to environmental Those resorts had no
building permit, location Decrease/reduce the quality
hazard; of running water;
clearance, and permit to Enforced environmental laws
operate; Destruction of natural habitat; and other regulations;

+ Generate jobs; Address the issues to

Sangguniang Bayan;
Existence of backyard &
commercial piggery
disposing liquid waste into Weak monitoring and Breeding ground of diseases;
the river/creek; enforcement of laws; Address the issues to
Ground and surface water Sangguniang Bayan by
contamination; enacting rules, regulation and
policies;
+ Food/meat sufficiency;

Unsanitary commercial &

backyard poultry facilities Weak monitoring and
were exist; Health and sanitation might
enforcement of laws; be jeopardize; Address the issues to
Sangguniang Bayan by
Unsanitary/unhygienic enacting rules, regulation and
Lack of discipline among surroundings; policies;
the residents; + Generate jobs and income;

Drainage system gets Obsolete design of Breeding ground of diseases; Penalize throwing of garbage
clogged by garbage; into drainage system;
Road damage;

221 | P a g e
222 | P a g e
REVIEW OF RELATED LITERATURE

There were 119 level-3 hospitals in the Philippines as of December 31, 2022.

Among these, 59 hospitals were situated in the National Capital Region, sometimes

known as the Metro Manila area. Tertiary hospitals, or level-3 hospitals, are

equipped to offer a wide range of medical treatments. (Statista,2023)

The combination of top-notch educational institutions, affordable tuition, and a

generally high standard of living makes studying in the Philippines an excellent

option. The weather makes it possible for students to make the most of their vacation

time, and medical schools are regarded for having excellent academic programs.

In general the healthcare system in the Philippines maintains a commendable

standard. While medical professionals are highly skilled, the infrastructure of

healthcare facilities falls short compared to higher-end institutions in the US or

Europe. In the Philippines, the Department of Health takes quality assurance and

patient safety very seriously, especially after the 55th World Health Assembly in May

2002. An administrative order, AO No. 2008 - 0023, was introduced to make patient

safety a core principle of quality healthcare.

223 | P a g e
 The Department of Health (2008) requested additional study into a number of

areas, including risk factors, protective treatments, cost estimates, and damage

related to patient harm, due to the paucity of information surrounding patient safety.

Driven by this necessity, scientists carried out an initial assessment with the goal of

determining the extent to which certain National Patient Safety Goals (NPSGs) were

met in a few chosen tertiary hospitals.

Tertiary hospitals in the country have progressed in enhancing healthcare

provisions, yet specific areas still require attention. For instance, a study pinpointed

deficiencies in a private tertiary hospital related to equipment maintenance,

cleanliness, and staffing levels. These hospitals may be required in the Philippines'

provinces to meet a variety of healthcares, this study emphasizes the importance of

early detection and intervention in autoimmune encephalitis, emphasizing the need

for specialized care in tertiary hospitals.

Additionally, Savrun (2013) suggests that tertiary hospitals are expected to

have superior resources compared to other healthcare facilities in terms of

technology, staffing, and patient services, including intensive care units. Moreover,

this study illustrates the possibility of enhancing access to mental health services in

224 | P a g e
settings with limited resources, like post-disaster scenarios, by integrating mental

healthcare into primary and secondary care, a role that tertiary hospitals can support.

Lastly, Courtney and Kirsch's survey highlights knowledge gaps and obstacles to

care for urgent orthopedic injuries in provincial areas, indicating a necessity for

educational campaigns and access to higher levels of care, which tertiary hospitals

can offer.

Another study highlighted the absence of a dedicated health information

system for older persons, leading to fragmented healthcare information accessibility.

Furthermore, while patient safety goals were largely met in selected tertiary

hospitals, there's a need to further improve healthcare professionals' knowledge,

skills, and attitudes concerning patient safety.

Factors contributing to non-urgent visits to emergency departments in these

hospitals encompass socio-demographic, socio-economic, and psychosocial

dimensions. The Sin Tax Law has positively impacted government hospitals by

augmenting financial aid and enhancing healthcare services. However, challenges

persist in terms of manpower and infrastructure shortcomings. Patients seek

225 | P a g e
healthcare to address specific conditions, placing their trust in healthcare teams and

institutions, anticipating safety and recovery.

In hospitals worldwide, including both developed and developing countries,

patients can experience harm during their stay. In developed nations, around 7 out of

100 hospitalized patients face healthcare-associated infections (HCAIs), while the

number rises to 10 out of 100 in developing countries, according to the (World Health

Organization)

In Southeast Asia, there's a lack of awareness about patient harm, posing a

safety risk. Countries like Indonesia, Vietnam, the Philippines, and Laos often

witness HCAIs among specific groups like newborns, patients with prolonged

hospital stays, those undergoing invasive procedures, receiving antibiotics, or

admitted to intensive care units. Factors contributing to these infections include

limited knowledge, absence of written protocols, and reliance on verbal instructions.

Vietnam experiences increased surgical site infections despite preventive

measures, while the Philippines struggles with common HCAIs like ventilator-

associated pneumonia and catheter-related infections due to poor hand hygiene and

226 | P a g e
healthcare workers' non-compliance with infection-control policies. Issues such as

inappropriate antibiotic use and administration errors also contribute to patient harm.

These problems hinder the delivery of safe, effective, and timely care. The

World Health Organization has initiated global strategies to combat HCAIs, aiming to

reduce long-term disability, deaths, and expenses due to prolonged hospital stays

and drug resistance.

This study aims to highlight certain types of hospitals, such as tertiary

hospitals, which is the hospital connected to medical schools. Hospitals associated

with medical schools are dynamic institutions that play pivotal roles in the healthcare

and education sectors. These establishments serve as multifaceted hubs where

clinical expertise, academic research, and medical education converge to shape the

future of healthcare. At the core of these hospitals lies a symbiotic relationship

between medical education and healthcare delivery. They are purposefully designed

to cater to the diverse needs of patients while serving as comprehensive training

grounds for medical students, residents, and fellows. These hospitals typically offer a

wide spectrum of medical services, ranging from primary care to highly specialized

treatments and surgeries across various departments and specialties. (Gonzalo et

al., 2020)

227 | P a g e
 One of the primary distinguishing features of these hospitals is their affiliation

with academic institutions. This partnership fosters an environment where healthcare

professionals collaborate with educators and researchers to develop and implement

innovative medical practices. It's within these walls that medical students undergo

their clinical rotations, gaining invaluable hands-on experience under the guidance of

experienced physicians and healthcare professionals. Moreover, these hospitals

serve as centers for cutting-edge medical research. Here, scientists, physicians, and

students work collectively to explore new treatments, conduct clinical trials, and

delve into groundbreaking discoveries aimed at advancing the understanding and

treatment of various diseases and conditions. The integration of medical education

into the hospital's daily operations is integral to the learning experience. Medical

students get the opportunity to interact closely with patients, participate in diagnostic

procedures, observe surgeries, and engage in treatment plans under the supervision

of seasoned mentors. This immersive learning environment is crucial in shaping

future doctors and healthcare leaders, providing them with the skills, knowledge, and

empathy necessary for a successful medical career. Furthermore, these hospitals

often attract top-tier faculty and medical professionals, drawn by the opportunity to

work in a stimulating environment that values both patient care and academic

excellence.

228 | P a g e
 The collaboration between clinicians and educators fosters a culture of

continuous learning, ensuring that healthcare practices remain current and evidence-

based. In addition to their educational and clinical roles, these hospitals serve the

community by offering specialized care, outreach programs, and initiatives aimed at

promoting public health. They may also act as referral centers for complex cases,

attracting patients seeking specialized expertise and innovative treatments. Smith-

Barrow (2015) claims that students attending institutions connected to renowned

hospitals might have access to a wider variety of medical cases. In practically every

medical school, aspiring physicians get years of practical and didactic instruction to

make them ready for the workforce. However, attending a school connected to a

renowned hospital has its advantages

Following the mid-1900s, these hospitals started to focus more on treating

patients with really serious illnesses and doing research. There are now issues with

finances, education, and patient care as a result of this new direction. Medical

schools connected to community and veteran hospitals want to gain access to more

patients, as well as individuals with common illnesses.As a result, many of these

hospitals have started to resemble university hospitals. After 1950, medical schools

found themselves severely short-staffed in their traditional teaching hospitals. Few

229 | P a g e
beds were available in many university hospitals, or many of the beds were reserved

for faculty members' private patients. Rather than the usual problems required to

instruct medical students, patients enrolled for research reasons had serious or life-

threatening diseases. Due to their significant patient care responsibilities, public

hospitals connected to medical schools were able to scale down on their research

and teaching. Medical schools partnered with more community and public hospitals

in order to access more beds. (History of Hospitals, n.d.-b)

Historically, medical schools have been affiliated with public hospitals, which

have provided a large source of beds for their teaching and research activities. The

closeness of these relationships, however, has varied based on criteria such as the

medical school's power to appoint hospital staff, the amount of patients to teach, and

the sort of students. In 1962, there were 269 close or major links between 85

medical schools and hospitals, with 51 of these being university hospitals. Only 60 of

the 107 medical schools had one or more teaching hospitals in 1975, with an

average of 600 total beds. Public medical schools were more likely than private

schools to own hospitals, although they had fewer connected hospitals on average.

230 | P a g e
 Medical school can often be broken down into three sections: preclinicals

(MS1-2), clinical rotations (MS3), and electives/interviews (MS4). In this post, we’ll

go over the full timeline and what to expect during each year. (Jubbal, 2022)

The first year will be the most radical transition for most students. Gone are

the days of college, and now the rigors of medical school are thrust upon you. If

you’re in medical school, you’ve studied for tests and exams before; however, the

sheer volume of material will take some time to adjust to. It’s for this reason that

studying in medical school is often described as drinking out of a fire hydrant.

Additionally, understanding what information is essential in a sea of details and facts

is a skill that you will fine-tune as you progress through your schooling. The first few

weeks to months are challenging; however, you’ll soon get in the groove and learn

that your first year offers you the most free time. Content-wise, the material may vary

from school-to-school. Some schools have a traditional curriculum, where you learn

all of the physiology (or what’s normal) first across all organ systems, then learn

about how it can be abnormal (pathology), and then how to treat it (pharmacology).

Other schools have a systems-based approach, where you have blocks that

last several weeks dedicated to a specific organ system, such as cardiovascular,

231 | P a g e
pulmonary, gastrointestinal, etc. You will study physiology, pathophysiology, and

pharmacology unique to that specific organ system and repeat this format for the

next system block. There are several other disciplines sprinkled throughout your

curriculum. During this time, you should reassess and hone your study strategies,

figure out your routines, and work to optimize your efficiency in preparation for the

upcoming stages of medical school. Find your group of friends and figure out

whether or not they are people you can actually study with. Sometimes studying with

your closest friends is more distracting than motivating. You’ll remember the middle

and end of your first year as some of the best times in medical school. The stress is

comparatively low to the later stages, you have more free time, and you are bonding

with new people and solidifying lifelong friendships. You’ll be amazed by your

classmates, as medical students are some of the most impressive and diverse

people you’ll come across.

In the second year, you will have honed your study strategies and time

management, so you’ll be ready to increase the intensity of your studying.Medical

schools are going through major curriculum changes to account for Step 1 moving to

pass/fail. Most students take Step 1 in the spring at the end of their second year,

which concludes their preclinical studies. In the fall and winter of your second year,

you’ll hermit up and spend more time studying and less time socializing. The end of

232 | P a g e
winter and spring is when you’ll have your dedicated period and really go all out in

studying. Right after you take Step 1, you’ll begin third year. However, other schools

may schedule you to take Step 1 after your third year, arguing that spending some

time on the wards during your clinical rotation will provide perspective for the exam.

Note that some schools are changing their curriculum to progress from two years of

preclinicals to 1.5 years of preclinicals. With Step 1 moving to pass/fail, there is less

weight on making sure students get a competitive score. There’s more focus on

making sure students learn enough during their preclinicals before sending them off

to rotation, where they will receive their true clinical experience in the hospital.

Most students love third year, and some students hate it. It’s an

adjustment for everyone. Third year marks the beginning of your clinical years. While

the first two years take place mostly in the classroom, the latter two years are

primarily in the hospital or clinic. This is what you came to medical school for: to

become a doctor and take care of patients. Clinical rotations are particularly

challenging because for the first time in your life, you’re not just studying out of

books and taking tests. You still have to do that, but now most of your waking hours

are spent in the hospital or clinic, and the evaluations from your seniors hold

tremendous weight in your overall grade. It’s a different game entirely. Every medical

student has to take a series of core rotations before graduating. During your third

233 | P a g e
year, you’ll likely be rotating on internal medicine, family medicine, general surgery,

psychiatry, neurology, pediatrics, ob/gyn, and emergency medicine. At the end of

third year, you’ll be preparing for Step 2CK. Step 2 is similar to Step 1, except now

it’s testing the culmination of knowledge from your third year of medical school. The

most heavily tested concepts are from your internal medicine rotation.

Finally, MS4, the promised land! Hold your horses. Many people say that

fourth year is a dream, and that everything is smooth sailing. Not so fast. The first

half of fourth year is arguably the hardest part of the entire medical training process,

at least if you go into a competitive surgical subspecialty. Your core clerkships are

complete and most of your rotations around this time are electives, which usually

means they are no longer graded and are most likely pass/fail, though this varies by

school. They no longer carry as much weight as they once did, but that’s not to say

M4 will be easy. The first half of your fourth year is challenging for two main reasons:

sub-internships and preparing your residency application. Sub-internships, also

known as audition rotations, are rotations you perform at other institutions anywhere

in the country. You’re essentially performing a month-long interview, and you have to

be on your best behavior. Your sub-internship is an opportunity to show a program

that they should take you into their residency.

234 | P a g e
 To accomplish this, you must show up early, stay late, and work hard to make

the life of the residents easier. If you’re going into a specialty with a suboptimal

lifestyle, like surgery, expect long hours and high stress. Medical students apply to

residency using ERAS, which stands for the Electronic Residency Application

Service. The application usually opens around September 15th. It’s a single common

application, just like AMCAS, and you submit a personal statement, letters of

recommendation, and a work and activities section. It’s very similar to AMCAS, but

thankfully, you don’t have any secondaries to complete.

Medical schools frequently maintain connections with multiple hospitals

through which their students can gain hands-on experience in a variety of

specializations and patient populations. For instance, Harvard University maintains a

partnership with Brigham and Women's Hospital, which is ranked No. 6,

Massachusetts General Hospital, which is ranked No. 1, and other healthcare

facilities. Additionally, hospitals and many schools can form agreements. New York-

Presbyterian University Hospital of Columbia and Cornell, ranked No. 7, is affiliated

with both Cornell University and Columbia University. Students shouldn't believe it's

the end of the world if they attend a medical school that is linked with a more

community-based hospital rather than a large, highly regarded hospital, advises

235 | P a g e
Mehta, who is finishing a fellowship at Massachusetts General Hospital. Students

can gain a thorough understanding of medical practice at a small hospital.

At many schools, students also have the option of spending time at several

different kinds of medical centers, and they can get experience at hospitals that are

not partnered with their schools by doing what's called an away rotation. Prospective

students should consider a range of factors beyond a school's hospital affiliation,

experts say, when deciding where to go, such as what they might want to practice

and if they want a dual-degree program. "They should never choose a school just

based on rankings, whether it's based on the rankings of the school itself or based

on the hospital that they're affiliated with," says Mehta. "Choosing a school just

based on rankings is a recipe for disaster." There are over 140 U.S. medical schools

that award the MD to graduates. These schools train students in allopathic medicine.

(A smaller number of schools train students in osteopathic medicine and award the

DO to graduates). Allopathic schools train tomorrow's MDs with a common (and

rigorous!) core curriculum. But beyond that core, no two schools are exactly alike.

Each offers its own unique academic focus, teaching methods and research

opportunities.

Overall, hospitals connected to medical schools are essential to healthcare

delivery, education, and innovation in medicine. Their dedication to providing high-

236 | P a g e
quality patient care, education, and research is reflected in their exemplary

contributions to the field of medicine and the betterment of society at large.

Hospitals affiliated with medical schools are vibrant pillars in the healthcare

space, skillfully merging clinical, research, and educational aspects. Their different

functions are essential to medical education and the larger healthcare environment.

Firstly, these institutions stand as invaluable clinical training grounds. They

play a pivotal role in shaping the future generation of healthcare professionals by

providing hands-on experiences to medical students, residents, and fellows.

Exposure to diverse cases within these hospitals enables students to bridge the gap

between theoretical knowledge and practical application. This immersive learning

experience cultivates competent, empathetic, and skilled professionals equipped to

navigate the complexities of patient care.

Moreover, these hospitals serve as nuclei for cutting-edge research and

innovation. Collaborations between clinicians, researchers, and students within these

institutions drive advancements in medical treatments, technology, and the

understanding of diseases. This relentless pursuit of knowledge directly translates

into improved patient care and outcomes, propelling the boundaries of medical

science.

237 | P a g e
 Beyond education and research, these hospitals are keystones in

delivering comprehensive patient care. They offer a spectrum of medical services,

ranging from primary care to specialized treatments, catering to the community's

diverse healthcare needs. Furthermore, they serve as referral centers for intricate

cases, ensuring that patients receive specialized expertise and the highest quality of

care available. Additionally, the integration of medical education within these

hospitals fosters a culture of educational excellence. Renowned faculty members

impart not only medical knowledge but also ethical principles and patient-centered

care. This synthesis creates an environment that nurtures continuous learning,

innovation, and a dedication to excellence in healthcare provision.

In essence, hospitals aligned with medical schools are dynamic entities that

synergize education, research, and clinical practice. They stand as cornerstones in

healthcare, shaping the future of medicine through the fusion of knowledge,

innovation, and compassionate patient care.

Hospitals in partnership with medical schools embody a multifaceted essence,

playing pivotal roles in education, research, community health, and patient-centered

care. Their significance extends far beyond conventional healthcare providers,

fostering a transformative impact on the present and future of healthcare.

Foremost, these institutions are crucibles for quality education. They serve as

breeding grounds for aspiring healthcare professionals, cultivating a comprehensive

skill set through invaluable practical experiences. These experiences are

238 | P a g e
fundamental in shaping well-rounded medical practitioners who possess not only

knowledge but also empathy and clinical acumen, ensuring patient-centered care.

Moreover, the research conducted within these hospital precincts serves as

the cradle of medical breakthroughs. The relentless pursuit of advancements in

medicine within these institutions drives innovation, leading to enhanced treatments,

diagnostics, and disease prevention strategies. This continuous quest for knowledge

translates directly into improved patient outcomes, revolutionizing the landscape of

healthcare.

Beyond education and research, these hospitals are integral to community

health. They cater to diverse healthcare needs, from routine care to specialized

treatments, ensuring accessibility and quality healthcare. Furthermore, their role as

referral centers for complex cases elevates the standard of care across the

community, positively impacting public health. An essential aspect is the balance

maintained between educational pursuits and patient care. These institutions ensure

that the emphasis on education never compromises the quality of care provided.

Instead, it fosters a healthcare ecosystem where future doctors are trained to

prioritize patient needs and deliver evidence-based, high-quality care.

Hospitals affiliated with medical schools require careful planning in order to

provide conditions that are favorable to research, education, and healthcare. This

well-planned layout is centered on basic concepts that are necessary for these

important elements to function effectively together. At the heart of architectural

239 | P a g e
planning lies the concept of integrated design. Architects envision spaces that

seamlessly merge patient care, educational facilities, and research spaces within a

single complex. This fusion fosters collaboration and interdisciplinary learning,

encouraging a fluid exchange of ideas and expertise among healthcare providers,

educators, and researchers.

A paramount focus of this architectural vision is the creation of patient-centric

spaces. The layout emphasizes spaces that prioritize patient comfort, privacy, and

accessibility across various care units. These spaces are meticulously designed to

optimize the patient experience and well-being, ensuring a conducive environment

for healing and recovery. Dedicated educational facilities within these hospital

complexes are meticulously crafted to facilitate modern learning approaches.

Equipped with cutting-edge technology, these spaces serve as hubs for interactive

learning, hands-on training, and innovation in teaching methodologies, nurturing the

next generation of healthcare professionals.

In parallel, cutting-edge research spaces take center stage. State-of-the-art

research laboratories are designed to foster collaboration, enabling groundbreaking

discoveries and advancements in healthcare. Integration of cutting-edge technology

within these spaces propels medical science forward, driving innovation and pushing

the boundaries of what's possible in patient care. Furthermore, the architectural

blueprint emphasizes collaborative areas that encourage communication, knowledge

exchange, and teamwork among healthcare professionals, educators, and

researchers. These spaces serve as hubs for interaction, sparking creativity and

fostering a culture of collective problem-solving.

240 | P a g e
 Technological integration is a cornerstone of modern hospital design.

Architects infuse advanced technology, from telemedicine capabilities to smart

building systems, to support patient care, research endeavors, and innovative

teaching methods, ensuring a technologically advanced healthcare ecosystem.

Sustainability and the creation of healing environments are fundamental

considerations. Modern designs incorporate features promoting sustainability, such

as energy-efficient systems and environmentally conscious materials. Additionally,

elements like natural light, green spaces, and art installations are integrated to foster

a healthier environment that aids in the healing process for patients, staff, and the

broader community.

Architectural research in hospitals with affiliated medical schools aims to

create spaces that not only meet functional requirements but also enhance the

overall experience for patients, support effective learning environments, and facilitate

groundbreaking research endeavors. The design approach seeks to integrate these

elements seamlessly, ultimately contributing to improved healthcare outcomes,

education quality, and advancements in medical science. A growing body of

research has shown that hospital design may directly impact safety in hospitals. It

may also indirectly impact safety by triggering adverse events that cause harm to

patients and staff. In addition, hospital design may also impact safety in hospitals by

working as a barrier to harmful events. This is an emerging field of research, and the

effects of hospital design on safety are not always well understood. There is no

single database in the field. High quality research articles are also rare, because

many confounding variables are present. As a result, this review includes evidence

that was not always generated in critical care settings. Nevertheless, all evidence

presented here should also be relevant to critical care. The role of hospital design in

241 | P a g e
patient safety Hospital design refers to the physical environment that includes the

indoor environment (e.g. noise, air quality and lighting), the interior design (e.g.

furniture, fixtures and materials) and the configuration (e.g. relativelocations and

adjacencies of spaces) of a hospital. According to the model of system accidents

proposed by them, hospital design may impact patient safety, directly or indirectly, as

a latent failure and a barrier.

They argued that adverse events in hospitals are related to both active and

latent failures. Active failures are unsafe acts (slips, lapses, fumbles, mistakes and

procedural violations) committed by the individuals in direct contact with the patient.

In contrast, latent failures create local conditions that in specific situations may lead

to active failures. Latent failures may become embedded within systems as a result

of wrong decisions made by designers, builders, procedure writers and top level

management. As a latent failure, hospital design can directly impact safety outcomes

or it can impact staff outcomes negatively (e.g. staff stress, fatigue, annoyance, lack

of control, lack of motivation, and lack of communication) leading to accidents and

errors. They also argued that design barriers may be critical to preventing harmful

accidents in hospitals. Whereas a poorly designed and maintained hospital provides

the conditions that precipitate accidents, a well-designed hospital can have inbuilt

safeguards/barriers that may make it difficult for these accidents to occur or that may

help stop the chain of events before they result in accidents.

Hospital design may help improve patient safety directly by reducing

nosocomial infections, patient falls, medication errors and, sometimes, even by

242 | P a g e
reducing patient morbidity and mortality. Hospital design may also help improve

patient safety indirectly by reducing staff stress, staff walking and patient transfer,

and by improving handwashing compliance. In contrast, very little has been reported

recently on the role of hospital design as a barrier to adverse events in hospitals.

Although research on the links between hospital design and safety has increased

over the past few years, there is still a need for more focused studies. Some

reported contradictions on these links also need to be resolved. Meanwhile, the

growing body of evidence in the field may already have an impact on how hospitals

should be designed in the coming years.

In summation, hospitals aligned with medical schools stand as

multifaceted institutions, not just as healthcare providers but as educational hubs,

research centers, and pillars of community health. Their architectural design reflects

a thoughtful integration of healthcare, education, and research, underscoring their

indispensable role in shaping healthcare professionals, advancing medical

knowledge, and providing exceptional care within the broader healthcare ecosystem.

243 | P a g e
244 | P a g e
 CONCEPTUAL FRAMEWORK

245 | P a g e
246 | P a g e
STATEMENT OF THE PROBLEM

To design a private (150-Bed) Tertiary Hospital with Medical Sciences School

Complex that will provide general and specialized medical services and facilities in

various fields and medical disciplines in order to meet specific patient's and medical

science educational needs. Associated with it are the application of the latest and

ethical methods of medical practices and with the latest medical technology and the

provision of health promotive environment for patients maintaining social integrity

and responsibility.

The center will have four academic units, the College of Medicine, Nursing,

Physical Therapy and Dentistry. As a teaching tertiary hospital, it aims also to create

the best environment for students to master the principles and theories of medicine

and obtain sufficient knowledge and experience to launch into a successful practice.

The center design should be safe from disaster (flood-free), as every year, many

hospitals and health facilities in the country are damaged and destroyed by disasters

to which the Philippines has a very high vulnerability.

247 | P a g e
248 | P a g e
SIGNIFICANCE OF THE STUDY:

In the complex tapestry of the healthcare landscape, tertiary hospitals intricately

linked with medical schools stand as monumental pillars that significantly influence

patient care, medical education, research endeavors, and community health. This

comprehensive study seeks to delve into the myriad dimensions of these institutions,

unraveling the profound impact they have on shaping healthcare paradigms,

nurturing future medical professionals, fostering cutting-edge research, contributing

to community well-being, and driving economic growth within their regions.

1. Advanced Patient Care:

Tertiary hospitals affiliated with medical schools often serve as epicenters for

specialized and advanced patient care. The integration of cutting-edge medical

technologies, a plethora of medical specialties, and a diverse cadre of healthcare

professionals positions these institutions as beacons for addressing complex and

challenging medical cases. This study aims to elucidate how these hospitals attract

and manage intricate medical conditions, thereby solidifying their role as regional

and national referral centers.

2. Medical Education and Training:

The synergy between tertiary hospitals and medical schools creates an optimal

environment for medical education and training. This study will meticulously explore

the symbiotic relationship between the hospital and the academic institution,

analyzing how this collaboration enriches the medical education experience,

provides comprehensive clinical training, and molds the next generation of

healthcare professionals with the requisite skills, knowledge, and ethical values.

249 | P a g e
 3. Research and Innovation:

Significance of the Study:

In the complex tapestry of the healthcare landscape, tertiary hospitals

intricately linked with medical schools stand as monumental pillars that significantly

influence patient care, medical education, research endeavors, and community

health. This comprehensive study seeks to delve into the myriad dimensions of these

institutions, unraveling the profound impact they have on shaping healthcare

paradigms, nurturing future medical professionals, fostering cutting-edge research,

contributing to community well-being, and driving economic growth within their

regions.

1. Advanced Patient Care:

Tertiary hospitals affiliated with medical schools often serve as epicenters for

specialized and advanced patient care. The integration of cutting-edge medical

technologies, a plethora of medical specialties, and a diverse cadre of healthcare

professionals positions these institutions as beacons for addressing complex and

challenging medical cases. This study aims to elucidate how these hospitals attract

and manage intricate medical conditions, thereby solidifying their role as regional

and national referral centers.

2. Medical Education and Training:

The synergy between tertiary hospitals and medical schools creates an optimal

environment for medical education and training. This study will meticulously explore

the symbiotic relationship between the hospital and the academic institution,

250 | P a g e
analyzing how this collaboration enriches the medical education experience,

provides comprehensive clinical training, and molds the next generation of

healthcare professionals with the requisite skills, knowledge, and ethical values.

3. Research and Innovation:

Beyond clinical care, these institutions are engines of medical research and

innovation. This study seeks to unravel the intricate web of research activities,

investigating how tertiary hospitals with medical schools contribute to advancing

medical knowledge, developing novel treatment modalities, and spearheading

innovations in healthcare technologies. By understanding the nexus between clinical

practice and research, the study aims to illuminate the impact of these endeavors on

patient outcomes and the broader spectrum of medical science.

4. Community Health Improvement:

Tertiary hospitals with medical schools extend their influence beyond the hospital

walls, actively engaging in community outreach, public health initiatives, and

preventive medicine efforts. This study will meticulously examine the ripple effect of

these endeavors on community health, exploring how these institutions become

catalysts for positive health outcomes, health awareness, and preventive measures

within the communities they serve.

5. Economic Impact:

The presence of a medical school within a tertiary hospital has far-reaching

economic implications for the surrounding region. This study will employ a

comprehensive economic analysis, scrutinizing the impact of these institutions on job

creation, research funding, and the attraction of healthcare-related industries. By

251 | P a g e
understanding the economic dynamics, policymakers and stakeholders can gain

insights into fostering sustainable growth and development in the healthcare sector.

6. Collaboration and Networking:

Tertiary hospitals with medical schools serve as epicenters for interdisciplinary

collaboration and networking. This study aims to unravel the intricate web of

connections between healthcare professionals, researchers, and educators within

these institutions. By understanding how collaboration is fostered, the study seeks to

underscore the significance of an interdisciplinary approach to healthcare, thereby

driving innovation and comprehensive patient care.

In the intricate interplay of healthcare systems, the study on tertiary hospitals

coupled with medical schools has unveiled a profound tapestry woven with threads

of advanced patient care, medical education, research innovation, community health

upliftment, and economic prosperity. The exploration of these multifaceted

dimensions has brought to light the indispensable role these institutions play in

shaping not only the future of healthcare but the very fabric of the communities they

serve.

The advanced patient care provided by these tertiary hospitals, with their

cutting-edge technologies and specialized medical expertise, positions them as

crucibles for tackling the most intricate and challenging medical cases. As regional

and national referral centers, they not only address complex health issues but also

contribute significantly to the advancement of medical knowledge and the elevation

of healthcare standards on a broader scale.

The symbiosis between medical schools and tertiary hospitals has been

showcased as a crucible for cultivating the next generation of healthcare

252 | P a g e
professionals. Through meticulous clinical training, exposure to diverse medical

specialties, and the inculcation of ethical values, these institutions serve as nurseries

for a cadre of medical professionals poised to meet the evolving challenges of the

healthcare landscape. The educational endeavors extend beyond immediate

impacts, creating a ripple effect that shapes the trajectory of healthcare globally.

The research and innovation ecosystem fostered by these institutions is not

merely confined to academic pursuits; rather, it reverberates throughout the

healthcare sector and society at large. From groundbreaking medical discoveries to

the development of innovative treatment modalities and technologies, the

collaborative efforts within these institutions contribute to the constant evolution of

medical science. This study affirms the pivotal role of these hospitals in not only

advancing medical knowledge but also translating it into tangible improvements in

patient care.

Community health improvement emerges as a natural extension of the ethos

embedded in tertiary hospitals with medical schools. Beyond the confines of hospital

walls, these institutions actively engage with the communities they serve through

outreach programs, public health initiatives, and preventative medicine efforts. The

study underscores the transformative impact these initiatives have on community

health, emphasizing the potential of these institutions to act as catalysts for holistic

well-being and health awareness within their spheres of influence. Economically, the

significance of these institutions is not confined to the realm of healthcare delivery.

This study delves into the economic dynamics, exploring the job creation,

research funding, and industry attraction facilitated by the presence of medical

schools within tertiary hospitals. As engines of economic growth, these institutions

253 | P a g e
contribute to the broader economic development of their regions, creating a ripple

effect that extends far beyond their immediate healthcare mandate.

Collaboration and networking, inherent in the DNA of tertiary hospitals with

medical schools, represent a cornerstone of their success. By fostering

interdisciplinary connections among healthcare professionals, researchers, and

educators, these institutions create an environment where ideas flourish, innovations

thrive, and comprehensive patient care is prioritized. This study accentuates the

importance of collaborative efforts in tackling complex healthcare challenges and

driving the continuous improvement of healthcare systems.

In conclusion, the comprehensive exploration of tertiary hospitals with medical

schools illuminates their indispensable role in the intricate web of healthcare,

education, research, community well-being, and economic prosperity. The findings of

this study not only enrich our understanding of these institutions but also provide a

roadmap for stakeholders, policymakers, and the broader healthcare community to

harness their full potential. As we navigate the complexities of modern healthcare,

these institutions stand as beacons, guiding the way towards a future where

excellence in patient care, education, and research converge for the betterment of

society as a whole.

254 | P a g e
255 | P a g e
SCOPE AND LIMITATIONS

Scope of the Study:

1. Geographical Reach: The study will focus on tertiary hospitals with medical

schools across diverse geographical locations, considering variations in

healthcare systems, cultural contexts, and economic landscapes.

2. Institutional Diversity: A broad spectrum of tertiary hospitals will be

considered, encompassing variations in size, affiliations, and specialties. This

diversity will contribute to a more comprehensive understanding of the role

these institutions play in different contexts.

3. Healthcare Domains: The study will explore the impact of tertiary hospitals

with medical schools in various healthcare domains, including but not limited

to clinical care, medical education, research, community outreach, and

economic development.

4. Stakeholder Perspectives: Perspectives will be gathered from a diverse set

of stakeholders, including healthcare professionals, educators, researchers,

administrators, policymakers, and community members, ensuring a holistic

view of the institutions in question.

5. Longitudinal Analysis: A longitudinal approach will be employed to capture

the evolution and dynamic nature of these institutions over time. This will

256 | P a g e
 include historical analyses, present conditions, and potential future

trajectories.

6. Comparative Studies: Comparative analyses will be conducted to highlight

differences and similarities between various tertiary hospitals with medical

schools, offering insights into best practices, challenges, and opportunities for

improvement.

Limitations of the Study:

1. Resource Constraints: The comprehensive nature of the study may be

limited by resource constraints, including time, funding, and access to certain

data. This could impact the depth and breadth of the research.

2. Generalization Challenges: While efforts will be made to include diverse

institutions, the findings may not be universally applicable due to variations in

healthcare systems, institutional structures, and regional contexts.

3. Temporal Factors: The dynamic nature of healthcare institutions poses

challenges in capturing all relevant changes and developments. Some

aspects may become outdated or subject to change during the course of the

study.

257 | P a g e
 4. Bias and Subjectivity: The study may be influenced by the perspectives and

biases of researchers, participants, or available data sources. Efforts will be

made to mitigate bias, but complete elimination may be challenging.

5. Access to Information: Availability and access to certain institutional data,

particularly in sensitive areas such as financial details or specific patient

cases, may be restricted. This could limit the depth of analysis in these areas.

6. External Factors: External factors such as political, economic, or global

health events may influence the functioning of tertiary hospitals and medical

schools, potentially affecting the study's findings and recommendations.

7. Ethical Considerations: Adherence to ethical guidelines and privacy

concerns may limit the extent to which certain data can be accessed or

reported. This could impact the comprehensiveness of the study, particularly

in sensitive areas.

Acknowledging these scope and limitations will allow for a more nuanced

interpretation of the study's findings and ensure transparency in communicating the

potential constraints that may influence the research outcomes.

258 | P a g e
259 | P a g e
 TERMINILOGIES

1. Agricultural Zone (AZ) – an area within the municipality intended for

cultivation/fishing and pastoral activities, e.g. fish, farming, cultivation of crops,

goat/cattle raising, etc.

2. Admission: The process of formally entering a patient into the hospital for

treatment or care.

3. Discharge: The formal release of a patient from the hospital after treatment or

recovery.

4. Inpatient: A patient who is admitted to the hospital and stays overnight or for an

extended period for medical treatment.

5. Outpatient: A patient who receives medical treatment or services at the

hospital but does not stay overnight.

6. Emergency Room (ER) or Emergency Department (ED): A medical facility

equipped to provide immediate emergency care to patients.

260 | P a g e
 7. Ward: A division within a hospital, often designated for a specific type of care

or patient population.

8. Intensive Care Unit (ICU): A specialized unit within a hospital providing

intensive care and monitoring for critically ill patients.

9. Operating Room (OR) or Surgery Suite: A facility equipped for surgical

procedures.

10. Nurse Station: A designated area on a hospital floor where nurses coordinate

patient care.

11. Electronic Health Record (EHR): Digital records of a patient's health

information, treatment, and medical history.

12. Pharmacy: A department within the hospital responsible for dispensing

medications.

13. Medical Imaging: The use of technology to create visual representations of the

interior of a body for clinical analysis and medical intervention.

261 | P a g e
 14. Laboratory: A facility within the hospital for conducting tests and analyses on

patient samples.

15. Code Blue: An emergency situation in which a patient requires immediate

resuscitation, often involving a team response.

16. HIPAA (Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act): Legislation that

ensures the privacy and security of patient health information.

17. Healthcare Provider: A professional or facility that provides medical services,

such as doctors, nurses, and allied health professionals.

18. Consultation: A meeting or discussion between healthcare professionals to

exchange information and opinions regarding a patient's care.

19. Telemedicine: The use of technology, such as video conferencing, for

providing medical consultations and services remotely.

20. Patient Chart: A comprehensive record of a patient's medical history,

diagnoses, treatments, and progress.

262 | P a g e
 21. Palliative Care: Specialized medical care focused on providing relief from the

symptoms and stress of serious illness.

22. HLURB/BOARD – shall mean the Housing and Land Use Regulatory Board.

23. Buffer Area – these are yards, parks or open spaces intended to separate

incompatible elements or uses to control pollution/nuisance and for identifying

and defining development areas or zones where no permanent structures are

allowed including buffer National Integrated Protected Areas System (NIPAS)

and Heritage.

24. Urban-use Area – a contiguous grouping of ten (10) or more structures.

25. Certificate of Non-Conformance – certificate issued to owners of all uses

existing prior to the approval of the Zoning Ordinance, which does not conform

in a zone as per provision of the said Ordinance.

26. Compatible Use – uses or land activities capable of existing other

harmoniously, e.g. residential use, and parks and playground.

263 | P a g e
 27. Comprehensive Land Use Plan (CLUP) – a document embodying specific

proposal for guiding, regulating growth and/or development. The main

components of the Comprehensive Land Use Plan in this usage are the

sectoral studies, i.e. Demography, Socio-Economic, Infrastructure and Utilities,

Local Administration and Land Use.

28. Conflicting Uses – uses or land activities with contrasting characteristics sited

adjacent to each other, e.g. residential units adjacent to industrial plants.

29. Conforming Use – a use, which is in accordance with the zone classification

as provided for in the ordinance.

30. Easement – open space imposed on any land use/activities sited along

waterways, road-right- of-ways, cemeteries/memorial parks and utilities.

31. Environmentally Critical Areas – refer to those areas which are

environmentally sensitive and are listed in presidential proclamation 2146

dated December 14, 1981.

264 | P a g e
 32. Environmentally Critical Projects – refer to those projects, which have high

potential for negative environmental impacts and are listed in presidential

proclamation 2146 dated December 14, 1981.

33. Exception – a device which grants a property owner relief from certain

provisions of a Zoning Ordinance where because of the specific use would

result in a hardship upon the particular owner, as distinguished from a mere

inconvenience or a desire to make more money.

34. Admission: The process of formally entering a patient into the hospital for

treatment or care.

35. Discharge: The formal release of a patient from the hospital after treatment or

recovery.

36. Inpatient: A patient who is admitted to the hospital and stays overnight or for an

extended period for medical treatment.

37. Outpatient: A patient who receives medical treatment or services at the

hospital but does not stay overnight.

265 | P a g e
 38. Emergency Room (ER) or Emergency Department (ED): A medical facility

equipped to provide immediate emergency care to patients.

39. Ward: A division within a hospital, often designated for a specific type of care

or patient population.

40. Intensive Care Unit (ICU): A specialized unit within a hospital providing

intensive care and monitoring for critically ill patients.

41. Operating Room (OR) or Surgery Suite: A facility equipped for surgical

procedures.

42. Nurse Station: A designated area on a hospital floor where nurses coordinate

patient care.

43. Electronic Health Record (EHR): Digital records of a patient's health

information, treatment, and medical history.

44. Pharmacy: A department within the hospital responsible for dispensing

medications.

266 | P a g e
 45. Medical Imaging: The use of technology to create visual representations of the

interior of a body for clinical analysis and medical intervention.

46. Laboratory: A facility within the hospital for conducting tests and analyses on

patient samples.

47. Code Blue: An emergency situation in which a patient requires immediate

resuscitation, often involving a team response.

48. HIPAA (Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act): Legislation that

ensures the privacy and security of patient health information.

49. Healthcare Provider: A professional or facility that provides medical services,

such as doctors, nurses, and allied health professionals.

50. Consultation: A meeting or discussion between healthcare professionals to

exchange information and opinions regarding a patient's care.

51. Telemedicine: The use of technology, such as video conferencing, for

providing medical consultations and services remotely.

267 | P a g e
 52. Patient Chart: A comprehensive record of a patient's medical history,

diagnoses, treatments, and progress.

53. Palliative Care: Specialized medical care focused on providing relief from the

symptoms and stress of serious illness.

54. Admission: The process of formally entering a patient into the hospital for

treatment or care.

55. Discharge: The formal release of a patient from the hospital after treatment or

recovery.

56. Inpatient: A patient who is admitted to the hospital and stays overnight or for an

extended period for medical treatment.

57. Outpatient: A patient who receives medical treatment or services at the

hospital but does not stay overnight.

58. Emergency Room (ER) or Emergency Department (ED): A medical facility

equipped to provide immediate emergency care to patients.

268 | P a g e
 59. Ward: A division within a hospital, often designated for a specific type of care

or patient population.

60. Intensive Care Unit (ICU): A specialized unit within a hospital providing

intensive care and monitoring for critically ill patients.

61. Operating Room (OR) or Surgery Suite: A facility equipped for surgical

procedures.

62. Nurse Station: A designated area on a hospital floor where nurses coordinate

patient care.

63. Electronic Health Record (EHR): Digital records of a patient's health

information, treatment, and medical history.

64. Pharmacy: A department within the hospital responsible for dispensing

medications.

65. Medical Imaging: The use of technology to create visual representations of the

interior of a body for clinical analysis and medical intervention.

269 | P a g e
 66. Laboratory: A facility within the hospital for conducting tests and analyses on

patient samples.

67. Code Blue: An emergency situation in which a patient requires immediate

resuscitation, often involving a team response.

68. HIPAA (Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act): Legislation that

ensures the privacy and security of patient health information.

69. Healthcare Provider: A professional or facility that provides medical services,

such as doctors, nurses, and allied health professionals.

70. Consultation: A meeting or discussion between healthcare professionals to

exchange information and opinions regarding a patient's care.

71. Telemedicine: The use of technology, such as video conferencing, for

providing medical consultations and services remotely.

72. Patient Chart: A comprehensive record of a patient's medical history,

diagnoses, treatments, and progress.

270 | P a g e
 73. Palliative Care: Specialized medical care focused on providing relief from the

symptoms and stress of serious illness.

74. Floor Area Ratio (FAR) – is the ratio between the gross floor area of the

building and the area of the lot on which it stands, determined by dividing the

gross floor area and the area of the lot. The gross floor area of any building

should not exceed the prescribed floor area ratio (FAR) multiplied by the lot

area. The FAR of any zone should be based on its capacity to support

development in terms of the absolute level of density that the transportation

and other utility networks can support.

75. Residential-Commercial Zone (RCZ) – an area within the urban area

(Poblacion) of this municipality for dwelling, trading/services/business

purposes.

76. General Commercial Zone (GCZ) – an area within a municipality for

trading/services/business purposes

77. General Residential Zone (GRZ) – an area within a municipality principally for

dwelling/housing purposes.

271 | P a g e
 78. General Zoning Map – a duly authenticated map delineating the different

zones in which the whole municipality is divided.

79. Gross Floor Area (GFA) – the GFA of a building is the total floor space within

the perimeter of the permanent external building walls occupies by: Office

Areas, Residential Areas, Corridors; Lobbies, Mezzanine, Vertical

Penetrations, which shall mean stairs, fire escapes, elevator shafts, flues, pipe

shafts, vertical ducts, and the like, and their enclosing walls; Rest Rooms or

Toilets; Machine Rooms and Closets; Storage Rooms and Closets; Covered

Balconies and terraces; Interior Walls and Columns, and Other interior

Features.

80. Locational Clearance – a clearance issued to a project that is allowed under

the provisions of this Zoning Ordinance as well as other standards, rules and

regulations on land use.

81. Mitigating Device – a means to grant relief in complying with certain provision

of the ordinance.

272 | P a g e
 82. New Town – shall refer to a town deliberately planned and built which

provides, in addition to houses, employment, shopping, education, recreation,

culture and other services normally associated with a city or town

83. Non-Conforming Use – existing non-conforming uses/establishments in an

area allowed to operate in spite of the non conformity to the provision of the

Ordinance subject to the conditions stipulated in this Zoning Ordinance.

84. Parks and Recreation Zone (PRZ) – an area designated for

diversion/amusements and for the maintenance of ecological balance of the

community.

85. Planned Unit Development (PUD) – it is a land development scheme wherein

project site is comprehensively planned as an entity via unitary site plan which

permits flexibility in planning/design, building sitting, complementary of building

types and land uses, usable open spaces and the preservation of the

significant natural land features.

86. Rezoning – a process of introducing amendments to or a change in the texts

and maps of the Zoning Ordinance. It also includes amendment or change in

view or reclassification under Section 20 of RA 7160.

273 | P a g e
 87. Rural Area – area outside of the designated urban areas.

88. Setback – the open space left between the building and the lot lines.

89. Socialized Housing Zone (SHZ) – shall be used principally for socialized

housing/dwelling purposes for the underprivileged and homeless as defined in

RA 7279.

90. Tourist Zone (TZ) – are sites within the municipalities endowed with natural or

manmade physical attributes and resources that are conductive to recreation,

leisure and other wholesome activities.

91. Urban Area(s) – include all barangay(s) or portion(s) of which comprising the

Central Business District (CBD) and other built-up areas including the

urbanizable land in and adjacent to said areas and where at least more than

fifty (50%) of the population are engaged in non-agricultural activities. CBD

shall refer to the areas designated principally for trade, services and business

purposes.

274 | P a g e
 92. Urban Zoning Map – a duly authenticated map delineating the different zones

into which the urban area and its expansion area are divided.

93. Urbanizable Land – are designated as suitable for urban expansion by virtue

of land use studies conducted.

94. Variance – a specific locational clearance which grants a property owner relief

from certain provisions of Zoning Ordinance where, because of the particular,

physical surrounding, shape or topographical conditions of the property,

compliance on height, area, setback, bulk/and or density would result in a

particular hardship upon the owner, as distinguished from a mere

inconvenience or a desire to make more money.

95. Warehouse – refers to a storage and/or depository of those in business of

performing warehouse services for others, for profit.

96. Water Zone (WZ) – are bodies of water within the municipalities, which include

rivers, streams, lakes and seas except those, included in other zone

classification.

275 | P a g e
 97. Zone/District – an area within a municipality for specific land use as defined

by manmade or natural boundaries.

98. Zoning Administrator/ZoningOfficer – a municipal government employee

responsible for the implementation and enforcement of the Zoning Ordinance

in a community.

99. Zoning Ordinance – a local legal measure which embodies regulations

affecting land use.

100. GRZ- 1 - An area referred to as GRZ-1 in the Official Zoning Map are the lots

bounded by San Gregorio Street, Calderon Street, river, Callejon, except the

lot occupied by Indang East Elementary School and the lots zoned as RCZ-1;

101. GRZ- 2 - An area referred to as GRZ-2 in the Official Zoning Map are the lots

bounded by river, Callejon, San Miguel , San Gregorio, and Calderon Streets,

road going to Barangay Kayquit, except the lot occupied by Indang Central

Elementary School and lot numbers 5386 and 16511-A ;

102. GRZ-3 - An area referred to as GRZ-3 in the Official Zoning Map are the lots

bounded by H. Ilagan Street, bounded by Callejon, R. Jeciel Street, and river;

276 | P a g e
 103. GRZ-4 - An area referred to as GRZ-4 in the Official Zoning Map are the lots

bounded by Calderon and H. Ilagan Streets;

104. GRZ-5 - An area referred to as GRZ-5 in the Official Zoning Map are the

lotsbounded by Calderon, Lakandula, San Miguel, and San Gregorio Streets;

105. GRZ-6 - An area referred to as GRZ-6 in the Official Zoning Map are the lots

bounded by Callejon , San Miguel, L.Jaena, and Balagtas Streets, except the

lot o9ccupied by barangay hall of Poblacion 2;

106. GRZ-7 - An area referred to as GRZ-7 in the Official Zoning Map are the lots

bounded by Balagtas,

107. GRZ-8 - An area referred to as GRZ- 8 in the Official Zoning Map are the lots

bounded byBalagtas, Lakandula, San Miguel, and San Gregorio Streets except

the lots zoned as RCZ-2;

108. GRZ-9 - An area referred to as GRZ- 9 in the Official Zoning Map are the lots

bounded by R. Jeciel, H. Ilagan, Balagtas, and San Gregorio Streets, except

the Indang Municipal Hall and Rizal Park;

277 | P a g e
 109. GRZ-10- An area referred to as GRZ-10 in the Official Zoning Map are the lots

bounded byBalagtas, San Miguel, L. Jaena, and J. Coronel Streets;

110. GRZ-11- An area referred to as GRZ-11in the Official Zoning Map are the lots

bounded byBalagtas, J. Coronel, and L. Jaena Streets;

111. GRZ-12- An area referred to as GRZ-12 in the Official Zoning Map are the lots

bounded byBonifacio, San Miguel, Balagtas, and J. Coronel Streets;

112. GRZ-13- An area referred to as GRZ-13in the Official Zoning Map are the lots

bounded by A. Mabini, San Miguel, A. Bonifacio, and J. Coronel Streets,

except the lots zoned as RCZ-6;

113. GRZ-14- An area referred to as GRZ-14in the Official Zoning Map are the lots

bounded by A. Bonifacio, J. Coronel, Balagtas, and L. Jaena Streets;

114. GRZ 15 - An area referred to as GRZ-15 in the Official Zoning Map are the lots

bounded by Callejon, A. Mabini, A. Mojica, and L. Jaena Streets, river, except

the lots zoned as RCZ-12;

278 | P a g e
 115. GRZ 16 - An area referred to as GRZ-16in the Official Zoning Map are the lots

bounded by A. Mabini, J. Coronel, A. Bonifacio, and Evangelista Streets except

the lots zoned as RCZ-9;

116. GRZ 17 - An area referred to as GRZ-17in the Official Zoning Map are the lots

bounded by A. Mabini, Evangelista,, A. Bonifacio, and A. Mojica Streets except

the lots zoned as RCZ-10;

117. GRZ 18 - An area referred to as GRZ-18in the Official Zoning Map are the lots

bounded by cemetery, Indang Catholic Church, De Ocampo and J. Coronel

streets, and the lots zoned as RCZ- 14;

118. GRZ 19 - An area referred to as GRZ-19in the Official Zoning Map are the lots

bounded by cemetery, A. Mojica and De Ocampo Streets, and except the lots

zoned as RCZ-15;

119. GRZ-20 - An area referred to as RCZ-20 in the Official Zoning Map are the lots

bounded by De Ocampo and A. Mojica Streets, J. Dimabiling Street and lot

occupied by Senior Citizen Bldg. and School;

279 | P a g e
 120. GRZ 21 - An area referred to as GRZ-21in the Official Zoning Map are the lots

bounded by De Ocampo and A. Mojica Streets, J. Dimabiling Street and by-

pass road going to Indang Public Market except the lots occupied by Senior

Citizens building and lots zoned as RCZ-16;

121. GRZ 22 - An area referred to as GRZ-22 in the Official Zoning Map are the lots

bounded by Dimabiling Street, by-pass road going to

BinambanganStreet,creek and Indang National High School, except the lot

occupied by Indang Public Market and the lots zoned as RCZ 19;

122. GRZ 23 - An area referred to as GRZ-23 in the Official Zoning Map are the lots

bounded byDimabiling Street, Calumpang Cerca, creek, by-pass road going to

Binambangan Street, except the lot zoned as Agricultural Zone(AZ);

123. GRZ 24 - An area referred to as GRZ-24 in the Official Zoning Map are the lots

bounded byby- pass road going to BinambanganStreet, creek, callejon and

Binambangan Street;

124. GRZ 25 - An area referred to as GRZ-25in the Official Zoning Mapare the lots

bounded by creek, by-pass road going to Binambangan Street, river,

Binambangan Street except the lots zoned as RCZ-20 and the Agricultural

Zone(AZ) lots;

280 | P a g e
 125. GRZ 26 - An area referred to as GRZ-26in the Official Zoning Mapare the lots

bounded by Callejon, Binambangan and J. Dimabiling Streets ,Indang Public

Market except the lot occupied by Indang National High School;

126. GRZ 27 - An area referred to as GRZ-27in the Official Zoning Map are the lots

bounded by Binambangan and J. Dimabiling Streets, river, and the AZ lot

opposite the by-pass road going to Binambangan Street.

127. GCZ -1- An area referred to as GCZ-1 in the Official Zoning Map is the lot

occupied by Indang Public market;

128. GCZ-2 - An area referred to as GCZ-2 in the Official Zoning Map is the lot

occupied by L-Paseo building;

129. GCZ-3 - An area referred to as GCZ-3 in the Official Zoning Map is the lot

occupied by Plaza Coronel building;

130. GCZ-4 - An area referred to as GCZ-4 in the Official Zoning Map is the lot

occupied by Elmia building;

281 | P a g e
 131. GCZ-5 -An area referred to as GCZ-5 in the Official Zoning Map are the lot

numbers 5386 and 16511-A.

132. RCZ-1- An area referred to as RCZ-1 in the Official Zoning Map are the lots

bounded by San Gregorio Street, Lintiw road, river, and Indang East

Elementary School;

133. RCZ-2- An area referred to as RCZ-2 in the Official Zoning Map are the lots

bounded by Balagtas, H. Ilagan, Lakandula, and San Gregorio Streets except

the lots zoned as GRZ-7;

134. RCZ-3- An area referred to as RCZ-3 in the Official Zoning Map are the lots

bounded by Balagtas, San Gregorio, Lakandula and San Miguel Streets except

the lots zoned as GRZ-8;

135. RCZ-4- An area referred to as RCZ-4 in the Official Zoning Map are the lots

bounded by A. Mabini, H. Ilagan, Balagtas, and San Gregorio streets, except

136. the lots occupied by Indang Municipal Hall, Rizal Park, and the lots zoned as

GRZ-9;

282 | P a g e
 137. RCZ-5- An area referred to as RCZ-5 in the Official Zoning Map are the lots

bounded by A. Mabini, San Gregorio, Balagtas, and San Miguel streets, except

the lots occupied by Elmia building, Hon. A Mojica Hall of Justice Building, and

Heroes Park;

138. RCZ-6- An area referred to as RCZ-6 in the Official Zoning Map are the lots

bounded by A. Bonifacio, San Miguel, Balagtas, and J. Coronel streets except

the lots zoned as GRZ-12;

139. RCZ-7- An area referred to as RCZ-7 in the Official Zoning Map are the lots

bounded by A. Mabini, San Miguel, A. Bonifacio, and J. Coronel streets, except

the lots zoned as GRZ-13;

140. RCZ-8- An area referred to as RCZ-8 in the Official Zoning Map are the lots

bounded by De Ocampo, San Miguel, A. Mabini, and J. Coronel streets, except

the lots occupied by Plaza Coronel;

141. RCZ-9- An area referred to as RCZ-9 in the Official Zoning Map are the lots

bounded by A. Mabini, A Bonifacio, J. Coronel, and Evangelista streets, except

the lots zoned as GRZ-16;

283 | P a g e
 142. RCZ-10- An area referred to as RCZ-10 in the Official Zoning Map are the lots

bounded by De Ocampo and J. Coronel Streets, A. Mabini and Evangelista

Streets;

143. RCZ-11- An area referred to as RCZ-11 in the Official Zoning Mapare the lots

bounded by A. Mabini and Evangelista Streets, Bonifacio and A. Mojica streets

except the lots zoned as GRZ-17;

144. RCZ-12-An area referred to as RCZ-12 in the Official Zoning Map are the lots

bounded by De Ocampo and Evangelista Streets, A. Mabini and A. Mojica

Streets;

145. RCZ-13- An area referred to as RCZ-13 in the Official Zoning Mapare the lots

bounded by A. Mabini and A. Mojica Streets, J. Dimabiling and Balagtas

Street, except the lots zoned as GRZ 15;

146. RCZ-14- An area referred to as RCZ-15 in the Official Zoning Map are the lots

bounded by De Ocampo and J. Coronel Streets, lots zoned as GRZ 18, and

municipal covered court;

284 | P a g e
 147. RCZ-15- An area referred to as RCZ-16 in the Official Zoning Map are the lots

bounded by De Ocampo and A. Mojica Streets, J. Coronel Street, and the

municipal and catholic cemetery,

148. RCZ-16- An area referred to as RCZ-17 in the Official Zoning Map are the lots

bounded by A. Mojica and J. Dimabiling Streets, by-pass road going to Indang

Public Market, and Junction of CalumpangCerca;

149. RCZ-17- An area referred to as RCZ-18 in the Official Zoning Map is the corner

lot bounded by J. Dimabiling Street, by-pass road going to Binambangan

Street, and Indang Public Market;

150. RCZ-18- An area referred to as RCZ-19 in the Official Zoning Map is the lot

occupied by Ramirez gravel and sand at Binambangan Street.

285 | P a g e
286 | P a g e
SAMPLES OF SIMILAR DEVELOPMENTS (LOCAL)

University of the Philippines-Philippine General Hospital (UP-PGH):

 Location: Manila

 Affiliation: University of the Philippines Manila

 Description: UP-PGH is a premier tertiary hospital and is associated

with the University of the Philippines College of Medicine. It serves as a

training ground for medical students, residents, and fellows.

287 | P a g e
St. Luke's Medical Center:

 Location: Quezon City, Taguig City

 Affiliation: St. Luke's College of Medicine

 Description: St. Luke's Medical Center is a well-known tertiary hospital

with campuses in Quezon City and Taguig City. It is affiliated with St.

Luke's College of Medicine, providing education and training to medical

students.

288 | P a g e
De La Salle University Medical Center (DLSUMC):

 Location: Dasmarinas, Cavite

 Affiliation: De La Salle Health Sciences Institute College of Medicine

 Description: DLSUMC is a tertiary hospital affiliated with the De La

Salle Health Sciences Institute. The hospital supports the medical

education programs offered by the institute.

289 | P a g e
The Medical City:

 Location: Pasig City

 Affiliation: Ateneo School of Medicine and Public Health

 Description: The Medical City is a tertiary hospital that collaborates

with the Ateneo School of Medicine and Public Health to provide

medical education and training to future healthcare professionals.

290 | P a g e
Makati Medical Center:

 Location: Makati City

 Affiliation: University of the Philippines College of Medicine (Clinical

Division)

 Description: Makati Medical Center, a tertiary hospital, is affiliated with

the University of the Philippines College of Medicine, particularly in its

clinical division.

291 | P a g e
Philippine Heart Center:

Location: Quezon City

Affiliation: University of the Philippines College of Medicine

Description: Known for its specialization in heart-related diseases, the

Philippine Heart Center collaborates with the University of the Philippines

College of Medicine for medical education and training.

292 | P a g e
Jose R. Reyes Memorial Medical Center:

Location: Manila

Affiliation: University of Santo Tomas Faculty of Medicine and Surgery

293 | P a g e
 Description: Jose R. Reyes Memorial Medical Center partners with the

University of Santo Tomas Faculty of Medicine and Surgery to provide clinical

training and education for medical students.

Cardinal Santos Medical Center:

Location: San Juan City

Affiliation: Ateneo School of Medicine and Public Health

294 | P a g e
 Description: Cardinal Santos Medical Center is affiliated with the Ateneo

School of Medicine and Public Health, contributing to medical education and

training.

University of Santo Tomas Hospital:

Location: Manila

295 | P a g e
 Affiliation: University of Santo Tomas Faculty of Medicine and Surgery

Description: The University of Santo Tomas Hospital is closely associated

with the University of Santo Tomas Faculty of Medicine and Surgery, offering

a platform for medical education and clinical exposure.

Chong Hua Hospital:

Location: Cebu City

296 | P a g e
 Affiliation: Cebu Doctors' University College of Medicine

Description: Chong Hua Hospital in Cebu collaborates with Cebu Doctors'

University College of Medicine to support medical education and training in

the region.

SAMPLES OF SIMILAR DEVELOPMENTS (INTERNATIONAL)

Mayo Clinic:

297 | P a g e
  Location: Rochester, Minnesota, USA

 Affiliation: Mayo Clinic Alix School of Medicine

 Description: Mayo Clinic is a renowned medical institution with a

medical school, the Mayo Clinic Alix School of Medicine. It is known for

its emphasis on patient-centered care, research, and education.

Johns Hopkins Hospital:

 Location: Baltimore, Maryland, USA

 Affiliation: Johns Hopkins University School of Medicine

298 | P a g e
  Description: Johns Hopkins Hospital is affiliated with the Johns

Hopkins University School of Medicine, one of the leading medical

schools globally. It is renowned for its research and clinical care.

Cleveland Clinic:

 Location: Cleveland, Ohio, USA

 Affiliation: Cleveland Clinic Lerner College of Medicine

 Description: The Cleveland Clinic is associated with the Cleveland

Clinic Lerner College of Medicine, providing medical education,

research, and clinical care.

299 | P a g e
Charité – Universitätsmedizin Berlin:

 Location: Berlin, Germany

 Affiliation: Charité - Universitätsmedizin Berlin

 Description: Charité is one of Europe's largest university hospitals and

is affiliated with the medical school of the same name. It is a center for

medical education, research, and healthcare.

300 | P a g e
Singapore General Hospital:

 Location: Singapore

 Affiliation: Duke-NUS Medical School

 Description: Singapore General Hospital collaborates with Duke-NUS

Medical School, contributing to medical education and research in

Singapore.

301 | P a g e
King's College Hospital:

 Location: London, United Kingdom

 Affiliation: King's College London School of Medicine

 Description: King's College Hospital is affiliated with King's College

London School of Medicine, playing a significant role in medical

education and research in the UK.

302 | P a g e
Karolinska University Hospital:

 Location: Stockholm, Sweden

 Affiliation: Karolinska Institutet

 Description: Karolinska University Hospital is closely linked to

Karolinska Institutet, a leading medical university in Sweden known for

its Nobel Assembly.

303 | P a g e
National University Hospital:

 Location: Singapore

 Affiliation: Yong Loo Lin School of Medicine, National University of

Singapore

 Description: National University Hospital collaborates with the Yong

Loo Lin School of Medicine, contributing to medical education and

research in Singapore.

304 | P a g e
Massachusetts General Hospital:

 Location: Boston, Massachusetts, USA

 Affiliation: Harvard Medical School

 Description: Massachusetts General Hospital is affiliated with Harvard

Medical School, renowned for its medical education and cutting-edge

research.

10.

305 | P a g e
Brigham and Women's Hospital:

 Location: Boston, Massachusetts, USA

 Affiliation: Harvard Medical School

 Description: Brigham and Women's Hospital is affiliated with Harvard

Medical School, contributing to medical education, research, and

patient care.

306 | P a g e
307 | P a g e
TECHNOLOGIES: ENERGY, EFFICIENCY, WASTE MANAGEMENT, AND CLEAN
ENERGY SOURCE

Implementing energy efficiency, waste management, and clean energy

sources in tertiary hospitals with medical schools is crucial for promoting

sustainability and reducing environmental impact. Here are some technologies and

strategies that can be employed in each of these areas:

Energy Efficiency:

a. LED Lighting: Replace traditional lighting with energy-efficient LED bulbs to

reduce energy consumption.

b. Energy-Efficient HVAC Systems: Install advanced heating, ventilation, and air

conditioning (HVAC) systems with energy-saving features.

c. Smart Building Management Systems: Implement smart technologies to monitor

and control energy usage in real-time, optimizing energy efficiency.

d. Renewable Energy Integration: Incorporate renewable energy sources such as

solar panels or wind turbines to generate clean energy on-site.

e. Energy-Efficient Medical Equipment: Invest in energy-efficient medical devices

and equipment to minimize power consumption.

Waste Management:

a. Waste Segregation: Implement a comprehensive waste segregation system to

separate recyclables, organic waste, and hazardous waste.

b. Waste-to-Energy Technologies: Consider technologies like anaerobic digestion or

incineration to convert organic waste into energy.

299 | P a g e
 c. Recycling Programs: Establish recycling programs for materials like plastics,

paper, and glass within the hospital and medical school.

d. Composting: Set up composting facilities for organic waste generated in hospital

cafeterias and gardens. e. Waste Tracking Systems: Utilize technology to track and

manage waste streams, enabling better waste reduction strategies.

Clean Energy Sources:

a. Solar Power: Install solar panels on hospital rooftops to harness clean and

renewable solar energy.

b. Wind Power: If feasible, consider incorporating wind turbines to generate wind

energy on the hospital premises.

c. Geothermal Systems: Utilize geothermal heat pumps for heating and cooling

requirements, taking advantage of the Earth's natural thermal energy.

d. Combined Heat and Power (CHP): Implement CHP systems to simultaneously

generate electricity and useful heat from a single energy source, increasing overall

efficiency.

Education and Awareness:

a. Training Programs: Educate hospital staff, students, and the community about

the importance of energy efficiency, waste reduction, and clean energy.

b. Green Certification: Work towards obtaining green certifications for the hospital

and medical school, such as LEED (Leadership in Energy and Environmental

Design).

300 | P a g e
Monitoring and Reporting:

a. Energy and Waste Audits: Conduct regular audits to assess energy consumption

patterns and waste generation, identifying areas for improvement.

b. Data Analytics: Use data analytics tools to analyze energy and waste data,

providing insights for optimizing resource usage.

301 | P a g e
302 | P a g e
BP 344 IMPLEMENTING RULES AND REGULATIONS (IRR) AMENDMENTS MINIMUM
REQUIREMENTS FOR ACCESSIBILITY

1. Accessible Ramps

1.1 Changes in level shall require a ramp except when served by

a dropped sidewalk, curb ramp, an elevator, or other mechanical

device.

1.2 Accessible ramps shall have the following facilities and features:

1.2.1 Minimum clear width of 1.20 m.

1.2.2 Gradient not steeper than 1:12.

Fig. A.1.1
303 | P a g e
 Fig. A.1.2

DESIGN OF RAMP WIDER THAN 1.20 M. BUT NOT LESS

THAN 3000 mm. REQUIRING INTERMEDIATE HANDRAILS

304 | P a g e
 Fig. A.1.

305 | P a g e
 1.2.3 For accessible ramps 3m or more in width, provide

intermediate handrails at the center. Use of double “J” type handrail supports

are recommended.

1.2.4. Maximum length of 6.00 m.: Accessible ramps with a total

length longer than 6.00 m shall be provided with intermediate

landings with a minimum length of 1.50 m.

Fig. A.1.4 RAMP DIMENSIONS

1.2.5 Level area not less than 1.80 m at the top and bottom of any

ramp.

1.2.6 Handrails on both sides of the ramp at 700 mm and 900 mm

from the floor of the ramp. (See Fig. A.4.1; A.4.2)

306 | P a g e
 1.2.7 300 mm long extension of the handrail shall be provided at the

top and bottom of ramps.

1.2.8 Curbs on both sides of the ramp with a minimum height of 100

mm.

Fig. A.1.5 CURB HEIGHT AT RAMP

1.3 Any ramp with a rise greater than 170 mm and leads down towards an

area where vehicular traffic is possible, should have a railing across

the full width of its lower end, not less than 1.80 meters from the

foot of the ramp.

307 | P a g e
 Fig. A.1.6 RAMPS & VEHICULAR TRAFFIC

2. Slip Resistant Materials

2.1. Slip resistant materials shall have a Coefficient of Friction of 0.6 for

level surfaces and 0.8 for sloping surfaces (ASTM).

2.2. If carpets or carpet tiles are used on a floor surface:

2.2.1. it shall be securely attached;

2.2.2. have a firm cushion, pad, or backing;

2.2.3. have a level loop, textured loop, level cut pile, or level

cut/uncut pile texture;

308 | P a g e
 2.2.4. maximum pile thickness shall be 13 mm;

2.2.5. Exposed edges of carpet shall be fastened to floor

surfaces and have trim along the entire length of the exposed

edge;

2.2.6. Carpet edge trim shall comply with 4.5.2. Appendix

Note (ADA).

3. Handrails and Grab Bars

3.1. Handrails shall be required for accessible ramps for changes in grade

higher than 170 mm.

3.2. Handrails shall be installed at both sides of ramps and stairs.

Handrails may be provided at dropped sidewalks but should not be

installed beyond the width of any crossing so as not to obstruct

pedestrian traffic.

3.3. Handrails shall be installed at 900 mm and 700 mm above stairs or

ramps.

309 | P a g e
 Fig. A.3.2

3.4. Railings for protection should be installed at a height of 1100mm

minimum, measured from the top of the rail to the finish floor for

ramps, balconies, landings or porches which are more than 750 mm

above adjacent grade. These shall be installed in addition to the

handrails required for accessible ramps (Section C, Item 2). (per NBC

Rule XII under Guard Rails.)

3.5. A 300 mm long extension of the handrail shall be provided at the top

and bottom of ramps and stairs.

310 | P a g e
 Fig A.3.3 EASY TO GRASP DESIGN

3.6. Handrails and grab bars that require full grip should have an outside

diameter of 38 mm (minimum) to 45 mm (maximum).

3.7. Handrails attached to walls should have a minimum clear distance of

50 mm from the wall. Handrails on ledges should have a minimum

clear distance of 40 mm.

3.8. Stair handrails shall be continuous throughout the entire length and

around landings less than 2100 mm in length, except where it

is intersected by an alternative path of ravel or has an entry

door leading into it.

311 | P a g e
4. Parking

4.1. Accessible Parking Slot Requirement

Where parking spaces are required to be provided, the number of

accessible parking lots for vehicles driven by persons with disabilities or

vehicles with passengers with disabilities shall be in accordance with Table

B.1.1 below:

ACCESSIBLE PARKING SLOT REQUIREMENT

TOTAL REQUIRED NUMBER OF ACCESSIBLE
NUMBER OF PARKING SLOTS
PARKING
SLOT
1 – 25 1
26 – 50 2
51 – 75 3
76 – 100 4
101 – 5
150
151 – 6
200
201 – 300 7
301 – 8
400
401 – 9
500
501 – 2% OF TOTAL SPACES
1000
1001 - 20+ (1 FOR EACH 100 OR A FRACTION
OVER THEREOF OVER 1000)
Table A.4.1 ACCESSIBLE PARKING SLOT REQUIREMENT

The building management should impose appropriate sanctions for the

unauthorized use of the reserved parking slots for vehicles of PWDs.

312 | P a g e
 4.2. Parking slots for persons with disabilities should allow enough space for a

person to transfer from a vehicle to a wheelchair.

4.3. Accessible parking slots shall be located nearest to accessible main

entrances.

4.4. PWDs should be on board the vehicle to be able to use the reserved parking

space for PWDs (for control use). In addition, an access parking

sticker/card is required with control number.

4.5. Whenever and wherever possible, accessible parking slots should be

perpendicular or to an angle to the road or circulation aisles.

4.6. Parallel parking is discouraged unless it can be situated so that persons

entering and exiting vehicles will be out of the flow of traffic.

4.7. Accessible parking slots shall have:

4.7.1 A minimum width of 3.70 m and a length of 5.00 m.

4.7.2 A walkway with a minimum clear width of 1.20 m. provided between

the front ends of parked cars.

4.7.3 Dropped sidewalks or curb ramps leading to the parking level where

access walkways are raised.

313 | P a g e
 Fig. A.4.1: ACCESSIBLE PARKING SLOT (PLAN)

Fig. A.4.2: ACCESSIBLE PARKING SLOT (3D VIEW)

4.7.4 Pavement markings, upright, pole mounted signages

4.7.5 Have a firm, level surface without aeration slabs.

314 | P a g e
 Fig. A.4.3: ACCESSIBLE PARKING SLOT (SHOWING UPRIGHT/POLE MOUNTED
SIGNAGE

4.8. Parking slots for persons with disabilities shall never be located at ramped

or sloping areas.

4.9. For multi-storey indoor parking structures, accessible parking slots shall be

located right next to accessible elevators, or as close as possible to

accessible pedestrian entrances.

4.10. In buildings with multiple accessible entrances with adjacent parking,

accessible parking slots shall be dispersed and located closest to the

accessible entrances.

4.11. In parking facilities that do not serve a particular building, accessible

parking shall be located on the shortest accessible route of travel to an

accessible pedestrian entrance of the parking facility.

4.12. For all accessible parking slots, provide the following signage:

315 | P a g e
 4.12.1 Pole mounted parking signage, 600 mm x 600 mm in size and

mounted at a minimum clear height of 2.00 m from the parking

floor.

4.12.2 Pavement sign painted or marked on the designated lot

complying with the following:

(a) a square with dimensions of at least 1.00 m but not more

than 1.50 m;

(b) be located in the center of the accessible parking slot;

(c) The International Symbol of Access shall be composed of

a white symbolized figure of a person in a wheelchair

with a square background in UN Blue Color. The

symbolized figure shall always face to the right.

Note: An intercom may be installed at the vicinity of the accessible

parking slot to enable persons with disabilities to call the

building management for assistance.

5. Signages

5.1. Symbol of Access

The International Symbol of Access shall be composed of a white

symbolized figure of a person in a wheelchair with a square background

in UN Blue Color. The symbolized figure shall always face to the right.

Provide directional arrows when the space/area/function being referred

to is facing left.

316 | P a g e
 Fig. A.5.1

5.2. Directional and information (Audio, Visual, and Tactile) signages

shall be located at points that can be conveniently seen, heard, and felt

by all persons with disabilities.

Fig. A.5.2

Viewing Distance Size (mm)

(m)
Up to 7.0 60 x 60
7.0 to 18.0 100 x 100
Above 18.0 200 x 200 t0 450 x
450

317 | P a g e
 Height of Letters

Required Viewing Distance Minimum Height of Letters (mm)

(m)
1.5 50
2.0 60
2.5 100
3.0 120
4.5 150
6.0 200
8.0 250

Table A.5.1

5.3. Signages should be kept simple and easy to understand. Signages

should be made of contrasting colors and contrasting gray value to

make detection and reading easy. Tactile maps shall be provided to

guide persons with visual impairment.

5.4. The International Symbol of Access should be used to designate routes

and facilities that are accessible in combination with pictographs.

Directional signs incorporating the INTERNATIONAL SYMBOL OF

ACCESS, as shown in Figure A.5.1, shall be installed at passageways,

and at points where there are changes in direction to lead persons with

disabilities to various facilities such as lifts/elevators, entrances,

telephone booths, toilets, parking and the like.

318 | P a g e
 5.5. Should a sign protrude into a sidewalk/walkway or route, a minimum

vertical clearance of 2.00 m should be provided. Obstacles, projections

or other protrusions shall be avoided in pedestrian areas such as

sidewalks/walkways, halls, corridors, passageways or aisles.

Pedestrians with visual impairments often travel using the edge of the

building line, hence, objects mounted on walls, posts, or sides of

buildings, should therefore not protrude more than 100 mm into

sidewalks/walkways and corridors.

5.6. Signs (graphics, text, and Braille) on walls and doors should be

installed at a maximum height of 1.50 m from the finish floor to the

center of the sign.

Fig. A.5.3: SIGN ON DOORS & WALLS

319 | P a g e
 5.7. Signs shall incorporate graphic, text, and Braille.

Fig. A.5.4

5.8 Signs and labels for public rooms, areas, and places should have

tactile symbols, letters or numbers that should be embossed with a

minimum height of 1 mm; Braille symbols shall be incorporated in

signs indicating public places and safety routes.

5.9 Tactile Ground Surface Indicators

Positional, directional, and warning tactile blocks must be provided to

warn people with visual impairments that they are approaching:

5.9.1 Stairways, other than fire exit stairs

5.9.2 Escalators

5.9.3 Passenger conveyors or moving walks

5.9.4 Ramps other than fire-exit ramps, curb ramps, swimming

pool ramps

320 | P a g e
 5.9.5 In the absence of suitable protective barriers:

a. overhead obstructions less than 2.0 m above floor level

b. areas where pedestrian and vehicular traffic intersect.

6.0 Tactile warning indicators should have a 50% contrasting gray value

from adjacent floor finishes.

Tactile Maps Character

Proportion

 Tactile letters and numbers on signs shall have a width to height

ratio between 3:5 and 1:1 and a stroke width to height ratio

between 1:5 and 1:10

Raised and Brailled Characters and Pictorial Symbol Signs (Pictograms)

 Letters and numerals shall be raised 0.75mm, upper case, sans

serif or simple serif type and shall be accompanied with Grade 2

Braille. Raised characters shall be at least 16mm high, but no

higher than 50mm. Pictograms shall be accompanied by

the equivalent verbal description placed directly below the pictogram. The

border dimension of the pictogram shall be 150mm minimum in heigh

321 | P a g e
Finish and Contrast

 The characters and background of signs shall be eggshell, matt or

other non-glare finish. Characters and symbols shall contrast with

their background – either light characters on a dark background or

dark characters on a light background.

Table A.5.2

Tactile Floor Surfaces

Fig. A.5.5
322 | P a g e
 Fig. A.5.6

323 | P a g e
 Fig.A.5.7

324 | P a g e
 Fig. A.5.7 SAMPLE USAGE OF TACTILE SURFACES

2. Stairs

2.1 Uniform risers of 150 mm (maximum) and treads of 300 mm

(minimum) shall be used.

2.2 Tread surfaces shall be of slip-resistant material; nosings shall be slip

resistant to further minimize slipping.

2.3 Slanted nosings are preferred than protruding nosings so as not to

pose difficulty for people using crutches or braces whose feet have a

tendency to get caught in protruding nosings.

2.4 Open stringers shall be avoided.

The leading edge of each step on both runner and riser should be

marked with a paint or non-skid material that has a color and

gray value which is in high contrast to the gray value of the rest of

the stairs.

325 | P a g e
 2.5 A tactile strip 300 mm wide shall be installed before hazardous areas

such as sudden changes in floor levels and at the top, bottom and

intermediate landings of stairs; special care must be taken to

ensure the proper mounting or adhesion of tactile strips so as not to

cause accidents.

2.6 Handrails shall be installed at 900 mm and 700 mm above stair

treads. A 300 mm long extension of the handrail should be provided at

the top and bottom, of stairs.

2.7 Stair handrails shall be continuous throughout the entire length and

extend not less than 300 mm beyond the top and bottom step.

Fig. A.6.1

326 | P a g e
 Fig. A.6.2

OUTSIDE AND AROUND BUILDINGS

Dropped Sidewalks

2.8 Dropped sidewalks should be provided at pedestrian crossings and at

the end of walkways of a private street or access road.

2.9 Dropped sidewalks at crossings shall have a width corresponding

to the width of the crossing.

2.10 For crossings and walkways less than 1.50 m. in width, the base/level

surface at the bottom of the ramp shall have a minimum depth of

1.50 m. with a width corresponding to the width of the crossing.

For crossings and walkways less than 1.50 m. in width, the

base/level surface at the bottom of the ramp shall have a minimum

327 | P a g e
 width corresponding to the width of the crossing (4.00 M minimum for

national roads and as mandated by Local ordinances for local roads).

328 | P a g e
 FIG. B.1. 1 Perspective of Dropped Sidewalk

329 | P a g e
 Fig. B.1.2: Plan of DROPPED SIDEWALK

330 | P a g e
 Fig. B.1.3A: VARIATION OF DROPPED SIDEWALK AT

CORNER

331 | P a g e
Fig. B.1.3b: OTHER VARIATION OF DROPPED SIDEWALK AT CORNER

332 | P a g e
 2.11 Dropped sidewalks shall be sloped towards the road with a

maximum cross gradient of 1:100 (1%) to prevent water from

collecting.

Fig. B.1.4: SECTION OF DROPPED SIDEWALK

2.12 The difference in elevation between the base/level area of a

dropped sidewalk from the road or gutter shall not exceed 19 mm.

2.13 Provide the following signage:

2.13.1 Pole mounted signage, 600 mm x 600 mm in size and mounted

at a minimum clear height of 2.00 m from the sidewalk floor.

Pole mounted signs (planted) should not obstruct the path of

pedestrians. {Refer to DPWH Guidelines (Road Signs and

333 | P a g e
 Pavement Marking Manual) for installing pole mounted signs on

sidewalks.}

2.13.2 Pavement sign painted or marked on the ramp complying with

the following:

(a) a square with dimensions of at least 600 mm (for ramps

less than 1.20 m wide) but not more than 800 mm (for

ramps 1.20 m. and wider);

(b) be located at the center of each ramp;

(c) the color of the International Symbol of Access shall be

white on a blue background.

3. Curb Ramps

3.1 Curb ramps shall only be allowed when it will not obstruct a

sidewalk/walkway or in any way lessen the width of a

sidewalk/walkway or lessen the level/turning area of 1.50 m x 1.50 m.

Curb ramps shall only be allowed if the width of sidewalks/walkways

are more than 3.30 m with a corresponding curb height of 150 mm,

otherwise dropped sidewalks shall be used.

3.2 For drop off points for persons with disabilities at loading bays, the

minimum width of a curb ramp should be 900 mm.

334 | P a g e
335 | P a g e
 Fig. B.2.1

Fig. B.2.2
336 | P a g e
 Fig. B.2.3: CURB RAMP

Table B.2.

337 | P a g e
 3.3 Curb ramps shall have a gradient not steeper than 1:12.

3.4 Provide the following signage:

3.4.1 Pole mounted signage, 600 mm x 600 mm in size and mounted

at a minimum clear height of 2.00 m from the sidewalk floor.

Pole mounted signs (planted) should not obstruct the path of

pedestrian. (Refer to DPWH guidelines for installing pole

mounted signs on sidewalks.)

3.4.2 Pavement sign painted or marked on the ramp complying with

the following:

(a) a square with dimensions of at least 600 mm (for ramps less

than 1.20 m wide) but not more than 800 mm (for ramps

1.20 m. and wider);

(b) be located in the center of the ramp;

(c) the color of the International Symbol of Access shall be white

on a blue background.

4. Sidewalks and Walkways

4.1 The gradient along the length of sidewalks/walkways should be kept as

level as possible and shall make use of slip resistant material. Slip

resistant materials shall have a Coefficient of Friction of 0.6 for

level surfaces and 0.8 for sloping surfaces (ASTM).

338 | P a g e
 3.1 Whenever and wherever possible, sidewalks/walkways should have a

gradient not steeper than 1:20 or 5%.

3.2 Sidewalks/walkways should have a maximum cross gradient of

1:100 or 1%.

3.3 Sidewalks/walkways shall have a minimum width of 1.20 meters.

339 | P a g e
 Fig. B.3.1: SIDEWALK / WALKWAYS

340 | P a g e
 3.4 If possible, gratings should never be located along

sidewalks/walkways. When occurring along sidewalks/walkways, grills

of grating openings shall:

a. be perpendicular to line of travel

b. have a maximum center to center dimension spacing of 13 mm

between members;

c. not project nor be recessed more than 6mm above or below the

level of the sidewalk/walkway.

3.5 Sidewalks/walkways should have a continuing surface without abrupt

pitches in angle or interruptions by cracks or breaks creating edges

above 6 mm.

Fig. B.3.2: GRATINGS

341 | P a g e
 3.6 In lengthy or busy sidewalks/walkways, spaces should be provided at

some point along the route so that a wheelchair may pass another or

turn around. These spaces should have a minimum clear dimension

of

1.50 m and should be spaced at a maximum distance of 12.00 m

between rest stops.

Fig. B.3.3: REST STOP ON BUSY OR LENGTHY SIDEWALK / WALKWAYS

3.7 To guide the person with visual impairment, sidewalks/walkways

should as much as possible follow straightforward routes with right

angle turns.

342 | P a g e
 Fig. B.3.4

3.8 Where planting is provided adjacent to the sidewalk/walkway,

regular trimming is essential to ensure that branches of trees or

shrubs do not extend beyond sidewalks/walkways or paths, as not only do

these present a particular danger to the person with visual impairment, but

they also reduce the effective sidewalk/walkway width available to

pedestrians in general.

Fig. B.3.5

343 | P a g e
 Fig. B.3.6

3.9 Sidewalk/walkway headroom should not be less than 2.00 m

and preferably higher.

Fig. B.3.7: SIDEWALK/WALKWAY HEADROOM

3.10 Sidewalks/walkways should not be obstructed by street furniture,

344 | P a g e
 bollards, sign posts or columns along the defined route as they can be

hazardous to persons with disabilities.

345 | P a g e
 5. Open Spaces

5.1 Where open spaces are provided, persons with visual impairment can

become particularly disoriented. Therefore it is extremely helpful if

sidewalks/walkways or paths can be given defined edges either

through the use of planters with dwarf walls, or a grass verge, or

similar, which provides a texture different from the path. Tactile

surfaces/markings should be provided.

5.2 Provide Pedestrian Dominated Priority Zones in commercial complexes,

to create a feeling of safety particularly persons with disabilities.

6. Crossings

In order to reduce the exposure time to vehicular traffic, all crossings at

grade shall:

6.1 Be as perpendicular as possible to the carriageway.

6.2 Be located at the narrowest, most convenient part of the carriageway for

mid-block crossings.

6.3 Have a median/island of at least 1.5 m in depth, preferably 200 mm,

provided as a pedestrian refuge, where the width of carriageway to be

crossed exceeds 10.0 m or at least 4 lanes.

346 | P a g e
 Fig. 5.1.1
6.4 Pedestrian crossings shall not be located at street corners but at

a minimum distance of 2000 mm from the corner.

6.5 Provide directional tactile strips in the immediate vicinity of crossings as

an aid to persons with visual impairment.

Fig. 5.1.2

347 | P a g e
 6.6 Secondary national and local roads with pedestrian crossings shall be

provided with light controlled pedestrian crossing signals with

synchronized audible pedestrian traffic signals.

6.7 The audible signal used for crossings should be easily distinguishable

from other sounds in the environment to prevent confusion to persons

with visual impairment. A prolonged sound should be audible to warn

persons with visual impairment that the lights are about to change.

6.8 The flashing green period required for the person with disability

should be determined on the basis of a walking speed of 900 mm/sec.

rather than 1200 mm/sec. which is what is normally used. The

minimum period for the steady green (for pedestrians) should be the

crossing distance times 900 mm/sec. (Refer to Traffic Engineering

Center Guidelines for pedestrians with Disabilities).

7. Accessible Entrances

7.1 Entrances shall be accessible from arrival and departure points to

the interior lobby.

7.2 One (1) entrance levels should be provided where elevators are

accessible.

7.3 In case entrances are not on the same level of the site arrival

grade, accessible ramps should be provided as access to the entrance

level.

348 | P a g e
 Fig. C.1.1

7.4 Entrances with vestibules shall be provided with a level area with

at least a 1.80 m. depth and a 1.50 m. width. (See Fig. C.1.2)

Fig. C.1.2 ENTRANCES WITH VESTIBULES

349 | P a g e
 7.5 In cases where frameless transparent glass doors and any other

vertical transparent glass panels are provided, such glass panels

should be provided with horizontal or graphical patterns with

contrasting gray value color against adjacent and background colors,

between 800 mm and 1.50 m. above the floor to prevent PWDs from

bumping against it.

7.6 Accessible entrance/exit of a building shall be provided with large

overhanging roof (canopy) to protect PWDs as well as non-PWDs from

rain.

8. Doors

8.1 All doors shall have a minimum clear width of 900 mm.

8.2 Clear openings shall be measured from the face of a fully open door at

90 degrees and the door jamb

350 | P a g e
 Fig. C.2.1 Plan of SLIDING DOOR

351 | P a g e
 Fig. C.2.2 Plan of SWING DOOR

8.3 Lever type locksets should be operable by a pressure or force not

more than 1.0 kg; the door closer device pressure on an interior door

shall not exceed 4.0 kg.

8.4 A minimum clear level space of 1500 mm x 1500 mm shall be provided

before and extending beyond a door;

EXCEPTION: where a door shall open onto but not into a corridor, the

required clear, level space on the corridor side of the door may be a

minimum of 1200 mm corridor width.

8.5 Protection should be provided from doors that swing into corridors.

352 | P a g e
 Fig. C.2.3
8.6 Out-swinging doors should be provided at storage rooms,

closets, toilets and accessible restroom stalls.

8.7 Latching or non-latching hardware should not require wrist action or

fine finger manipulation.

8.8 Lever type locksets and other hardware should be located between 20

mm and 1.06 m above the floor; 900 mm is preferred.

Fig. C.2.4
353 | P a g e
 1.1 Vertical pull handles, centered at 1.06 m above the floor, are preferred

to horizontal pull bars for swing doors or doors with locking devices.

1.2 Doors along major circulation routes should be provided with

kick plates made of durable materials at a height of 300 mm to 400

mm.

1.3 For doors with peepholes, provide a secondary peephole at a height of

1.1 m from the finish floor for wheelchair users.

Fig. C.2.5

Thresholds

1.1 Thresholds shall be kept to a minimum; whenever necessary,

thresholds and sliding door tracks shall have a maximum height of 19

mm and shall be beveled if higher than 6 mm with a gradient of 1:8.

354 | P a g e
Switches

1.1 Manual switches shall be positioned within 920 mm to 1.20 m

above the floor

1.2 Manual switches should be located no further than 200 mm from

the latch side of the door.

Fig C.4.1

355 | P a g e
 Corridors

1.3 Corridors shall have minimum clear width of 1.20 m to allow for both a

wheelchair user and a Non-PWD to pass. Where space is required for

two (2) wheelchairs to pass, the minimum width shall be 1.80 m.

1.4 Turnabout spaces should be provided for wheelchairs to turn around;

these spaces shall have a minimum dimension of 1500 mm x 1500 mm

and shall be spaced at a maximum of 12.00 m

1.5 Turnabout spaces should also be provided at or within 3.50 m. of every

dead end corridor.

1.6 As in walkways, corridors should be maintained level and provided with

a slip resistant surface.

356 | P a g e
 Fig. C.5.1: TURNABOUT SPACES AT CORRIDORS

Toilets and Baths

1.7 Accessible public toilets shall permit easy passage of a wheelchair and

allow the occupant to enter a toilet compartment, close the door and

transfer to the water closet from either a frontal or lateral transfer.

1.8 The minimum number of accessible toilet compartments on each floor

level or on that part of a floor level accessible to persons with

disabilities shall be one (1) where the total number of water closets per

set on that level is 20; and two (2) where the number of water closets

exceeds 20.

1.9 Accessible toilet compartments shall have the following:

1.9.1 A minimum area of 1.70 m x 1.80 m.

1.9.2 One (1) flip-up grab bar to be mounted on the wide side of the

357 | P a g e
 compartment adjacent to the water closet and be at a height

between 280 mm and 300 mm from the top of the water closet.

seat and extend not more than 100 mm in line with the front of

the water closet. One (1) vertical bar to be provided on the side

wall close to the water closet and located between 350 mm and

450 mm from the front edge. Center line of water closet (top

view) is 750 mm from finish to wall to grab bar.

1.9.3 A turning space of 2.25 sq. m with a minimum dimension of

1500 mm for wheelchair users shall be provided outside water

closet cubicles.

1.9.4 Accessories such as mirrors, paper dispensers, towel racks and

fittings such as faucets mounted at heights reachable by

wheelchair users. Toilet accessories such as mirrors, towel and

soap dispensers, hand dryer, waste bin should be encouraged

to have a color contrast. Accessories should be placed near the

accessible lavatory.

358 | P a g e
 1.9.5 For lighting/illumination levels, please refer to the Philippine

Electrical Code.

Fig. C.6.1: PLAN OF ACCESSIBLE TOILET FOR PERSONS WITH

DISABILITIES

359 | P a g e
 Fig. C.6.2 3D VIEW OF ACCESSIBLE TOILET FOR PERSONS WITH
DISABILITIES

Fig. C.6.3 BLOW UP FLOOR PLAN OF ACCESSIBLE TOILET FOR PESONS

WITH DISABILITIES

352 | P a g e
 1.10 A turning space of 2.25 sq. m with a minimum dimension of 1500 mm.

for wheelchair shall be provided for toilet compartments for lateral

mounting.

1.11 All accessible public toilets shall have accessories such as mirrors,

paper dispensers, towel racks and fittings such as faucets mounted at

heights reachable by a wheelchair user. Toilet accessories such as

mirrors, towel and soap dispensers, hand dryer, waste bin shall be

encouraged to have a color contrast. Accessories should be placed

near the accessible basin. Lighting/illumination should be fixed.

1.12 Water closets and lavatories should use colors of lighter contrasting

grey value to tiles to aid people with low vision impairment.

1.13 The height of toilet seat shall be 450 mm.

1.14 A lavatory shall be installed at 460 mm distance from center line to

adjacent wall. Lavatories shall be mounted at a height of 800 mm from

the finish floor with a vertical clear leg room space not lower than 650

mm.

353 | P a g e
 Fig. C.6.4: L-TYPE GRAB BAR

Fig. C.6.5: ACCESSIBLE URINAL & LAVATORY COUNTER

354 | P a g e
 1.15 Urinals shall be of the wall-hung type and should have an

elongated lip; the maximum height of the lip should be 480 mm from

the toilet floor. It shall have a minimum clear floor space of 750 mm

wide (wing to wing) by 1200 mm (between grab bar and wall) and

privacy shields of 750 mm.

Fig. C.6.6: ACCESSIBLE URINAL (FRONT ELEVATION)

355 | P a g e
 Fig. C.6.7: ACCESSIBLE URINAL (SIDE ELEVATION)

356 | P a g e
 1.16 Toilet doors shall be designed to open outwards so that it would be

easier for a rescuer to enter a toilet cubicle if a person has fallen and

is lying behind the door. To allow for assistance in case of

emergency, locks and latches should allow the door to be opened

from the outside with a coin or any simple device.

1.17 The use of sliding or folding doors that are easier to operate and

require less wheelchair maneuvering space should be considered.

1.18 An automatic push button door should be considered wherever

possible since it is easier to operate and maneuver around the

doorway.

1.19 Individual accessible toilet compartment doors shall be provided with a

horizontal pull bar fixed at a height of 900 mm.

1.20 An emergency call button that is waterproof and contrasting color with

the background shall be provided and be located at a height between

400 mm to 600 mm from the finish floor.

1.21 The hot water pipes and drain pipes located within the knee space or

toe space shall be properly insulated.

1.22 A roll-in shower compartment for wheelchair user shall have a

dimension of 1500 mm by 1500 mm and should have L-shaped bars.

Rising butt hinge should be spiral hinge to close independently. Curbs

for roll-in shower should not be more than 10 mm high and beveled

at a gradient of 1:2 and have color contrasts.

357 | P a g e
 Fig. C.6.8: 3D VIEW OF WALK-IN-SHOWER

1.23 Accessible Bath Tubs shall have:

1.23.1 a rim height of 500mm from the finish floor

1.23.2 a minimum clear transfer space of 900 mm wide by 1500mm

long

1.23.3 two slip resistant grab bars:

1.23.3.1 L-Type grab bar with the horizontal leg 1200 mm long (minimum)

mounted 250 mm from the rim of the bath tub; vertical leg 1200

mm long installed at the shower side of the bath tub.

358 | P a g e
 1.23.3.2 Vertical grab bar 1200 mm long starting 250 mm

from the rim of the bath tub installed at the shower side of the

bath tub.

1.23.4 A slip resistant base (coefficient of friction of 0.6 )

Fig. C.6.9

Fig. C.6.10

359 | P a g e
Elevators

1.24 All elevators provided in a building shall include suitable provisions for

persons with sensory impairments and ambulant PWD as a means of

access from one level to another.

1.25 It is recommended that all elevators should be made accessible to

PWDs. Where different elevators are programmed to serve certain

floors during ordinary or peak periods, the elevator that is designated

for PWDs should be programmed to serve all floors.

Fig. C.7.1 ELEVATOR CARS

1.26 Accessible elevators should be located not more than 30.00 m from the

entrance and should be easy to locate with the aid of directional signs.

1.27 Accessible elevators shall be provided with handrails mounted at a

height of 900mm from the finish floor.

1.28 Accessible elevator cars shall have a minimum clear dimension of

1400 mm in depth and 1200 mm in width, with a clear door opening of

not less than 900 mm.

360 | P a g e
 Fig. C.7.2 FLOOR PLAN

1.29 Control panels and emergency system of accessible elevators shall be

within reach of a seated person; centerline heights for the topmost

buttons shall be 1200 mm from the floor.

1.30 All elevator control buttons, including call buttons, emergency and

other buttons, shall be provided with Braille installed at the left of the

buttons/tactile buttons.

1.31 Floor level indicators in Braille shall be installed at a height of 1200 mm

from the finish floor on one side of the door jamb on the same side as

the elevator call buttons. This is so that persons with visual impairment

can discern what floor the elevator car has stopped and what level

they will disembark.

361 | P a g e
 Fig. C.7.3
1.32 Button sizes at elevator control panels shall have a minimum diameter

of 20 mm and should have a maximum depression depth of 1 mm.

1.33 Accessible elevators should have audio-visual indicators for

emergencies for persons with visual and hearing impairment.

Telephones

Fig. C.8.1

1.34 Public telephones should be equipped with a volume control device.

1.35 Telephones shall have an illumination at a minimum of 200 lux beside

the telephone.

1.36 The dialing controls, coin slots, receivers, and instructional signs shall

362 | P a g e
 be located at a maximum height of 1200 mm from the finish floor.

1.37 Provide a clear unobstructed space of 1500 mm x 1500 mm in front of

wall mounted and free standing telephones.

1.38 For establishments that provide public telephones Accessible Public

phones shall be installed:

1.38.1 One for each floor

1.38.2 One for every group of two or more phones.

Automated Teller Machines

1.39 Provide a minimum clear unobstructed space of 1500 mm x 1500

mm in front of ATM Machines.

1.40 Instructions and all information for use shall be made accessible

and independently usable by persons with visual impairments through:

1.40.1 Braille

1.40.2 Tactile

1.40.3 Audio through speakers or ear phones

1.41 The maximum height of controls, buttons, bill dispensers, card slots

shall be 1200 mm.

363 | P a g e
 Fig. C.7.4 BUTTON SIZES
1.42 The elevator assigned for persons with disabilities should have a

homing/emergency rescue device.

1.43 Accessible elevators should be provided with voice synthesizers for

persons with visual impairment.

Dressing Rooms and Cubicles

1.44 In dressing areas in department stores a coat hook should be

mounted on a side wall not more than 1.30 mm from the floor and

projecting not more than 40 mm from the wall.

Counters

1.45 Counter heights for accessible bank tellers, accessible workstations

reception/concierge/information counters, and the like range from

730 - 780 mm to meet the widest range of users.

364 | P a g e
 Fig. C.15.1

1.46 The clear floor area for a forward approach to a counter or table

or a side approach is 800 x 1300 mm.

Workstations

1.46.1 The access aisle shall have a minimum width of

920mm.

Restaurants, Eateries, and other Dining Establishments

1.47 Provisions of access shall be made available to persons with

disabilities for all eating outlets and establishments, such as hawker

centers, food courts or centers, fast food outlets, restaurants, and

the like.

1.48 A circulation path of at least 1.20 m wide shall be provided in

front of the stalls.

1.49 An accessible route with a minimum clear width of 900 mm shall be

provided from the circulation path to the tables intended for

persons with disabilities.

Where fixed seating is provided in eating outlets and

establishments, at least one (1) table for every ten (10)

tables or part thereof shall be provided for use by persons with

disabilities or at least two tables, whichever is the greater.

365 | P a g e
 1.50 The height of the table provided for persons with disabilities shall

not be higher than 780 mm with a minimum clear knee space

of 600 mm high and 480 mm deep.

Fig. C.17.1

Hotels, Appartelles, Dormitories, & Other Transient Lodging

Facilities

Total No. of Minimum Minimum Number Minimum

Guest Rooms Number of of Accessible Number of
Accessible Rooms w/ Accessible
Rooms Accessible Bath Rooms w/ Roll-
Tubs in Showers
1 to 25 1 1 0
26 to 50 2 2 0
51 to 75 4 3 1
76 to 100 5 4 1
101 to 150 7 5 2
151 to 200 8 6 2
201 to 300 10 7 3
301 to 400 12 8 4
401 to 500 13 9 4
501 to 1000 3% of Total 2% of Total 1% of Total
1001 and Over 30, plus 2 for 20, plus 1 for each 10, plus 1 for
each 100, or 100, or fraction each 100, or
fraction thereof, over 1000 fraction thereof,
thereof, over over 1000
1000
366 | P a g e
 Table C.18.1

Fig. C.18.1

SAFETY
Fencing for Roadworks and Footworks

All excavations, whether on the road or footway must be adequately

protected or fenced-in to protect pedestrians in general and the disabled in

particular.

Whatever the type of fencing used, it is important that the railings should

incorporated the following features;

1.1 The height of the top of the rail should be at least 1.00 m. above the

adjacent surface;

1.2 The railings should incorporate a tapping rail to assist the blind, this

367 | P a g e
 should not be greater than 0.35 m. above the adjacent surface;

1.3 The fence should be strong enough to offer resistance should a blind

person walks into it;

1.4 Gaps should not occur between adjoining fence lengths;

Covers for Excavations

1.5 Excavations in the footway or carriageway where pedestrians may walk

should be covered temporarily with properly constructed and

supported boards to provide path for pedestrians;

1.6 If the footway width will be reduced to less than 1.20 m. because of the

excavation, the temporary covering should extend across the whole

footway;

1.7 Minimum dimensions at obstructions

1.7.1 Effective width of footways past any obstruction should not be

less than 1.20 m.

1.7.2 If unavoidable, loose materials temporarily stored on footways

must be properly fenced and prevented from encroaching onto

the main footway by the use of a kickboard at least 0.20 m. high

which may also serve as tapping board for the blind;

Signages for Roadworks on the Carriageway

1.8 Temporary signs used to warn of roadworks should be carefully located

368 | P a g e
 and should not cause any inconvenience to pedestrians, particularly

the disabled;

1.8.1 Signs should be located on verges or similar whenever these

are available;

1.8.2 Signs should not reduce the available footway width to less

than 1.20 m.

Location of Emergency Exits

1.9 Wall mounted or free standing tablets with an embossed plan

configuration of the building which would also indicate locations of

lobbies, washrooms and emergency exits (through the use of different

textures to symbolize the spaces) should be provided at the main lobby

of each floor or other strategic locations; the markings on this tablet

should be readable by both the blind and the fully sighted;

1.10 Flashing light directional signs indicating the locations(s) of fire exits

shall be provided at every change in direction with sufficient power

provided in accordance with the provisions for emergency lighting

under Section 3.410 of P.D. 1185 (The Fire Code of the Philippines).

Areas of Refuge

1.11 An area of refuge shall be separated from the building floor area by a

369 | P a g e
 fire separation having a fire-resistance rating equal to that required for

a fire exit in compliance with the latest edition of the Fire Code of the

Philippines.

1.12 An area of refuge shall be served by a smoke proof fire exit and

adjacent to the designated fireman's elevator.

1.13 Refuge areas shall be smoke proof in accordance with latest edition of

the Fire Code of the Philippines.

1.14 The minimum area of refuge floor space shall be 850 mm x 1.2 m for

one person who uses a wheelchair.

Fig. D.1.1

370 | P a g e
 1.15 Areas of Refuge shall be:

1.15.1 Identified by illuminated signage (Refer to Section on

Illumination of Means of Egress of the latest edition of Fire Code

of the Philippines).

1.15.2 Be equipped with an emergency communication system in

compliance with the latest edition of the Fire Code of the

Philippines.

1.15.3 Identified on all publicly displayed tactile and Braille floor

evacuation plans.

1.15.4 Designated in evacuation procedure documents.

Audio Visual Fire Alarm Systems

Audio & visual alarm systems shall be installed on all floors in compliance with

the latest edition of the Fire Code of the Philippines.

SPECIAL TYPES OF FACILITIES

Auditoriums, Arenas, Theaters, and Other Assembly Areas

1.1 For Seating accommodations for persons who use wheelchairs

371 | P a g e
 Total Seating Capacity Accessible Seating
Accommodations
1-50 2
51-150 4
150 to 300 5
301 to 500 6
501 to 750 7
751 to 1000 8
1001 above 1% of total seating capacity

Table E.4.1

Note: Addresses only persons who use wheelchairs.

1.2 Accessible routes shall not overlap wheelchair seating/ block any

waiting spaces

1.3 Access to any wheelchair space shall not be through another

wheelchair space

1.4 Wheelchair viewing areas shall adjoin accessible circulation

1.5 Each wheelchair viewing position shall be clear, firm and level.

Minimum footprint for a single wheelchair seating space (front or rear

entry) shall be 900 mm x 1.2 m.

1.6 It recommended that assistive listening devices be provided.

1.7 Accessible seating shall be provided with handrails 750 mm high

at the front and sides.

372 | P a g e
GENERAL TERMINOLOGY

Shall – For use in the amendments, shall is used to denote a mandatory

specification or requirement.

Should – For use in the amendments, should is used to express obligation or duty.

This denotes an advisory specification or recommendation.

May – Denotes an option or alternative.

In compliance should be used in all the statements and not in accordance.

For consistency of all measurements used in the amendments mm (millimeters)

be used for measurement below 1 meter. For 10 m and above m (meter) should

be used.

DEFINITION OF TERMS

Accessible – A site, building, facility, interconnection or any portion of the built

environment that can be approached, entered and used by persons with disabilities;

refers to features that enable persons with disabilities to make use of the primary

functions for which a building/structure is built.

Access Aisle – Clear circulation route bounded by moveable furniture that can be

373 | P a g e
 negotiated safely by persons with disabilities

Accessible Design – Creating environments that are approachable and useable by

people with disabilities; Unhindered, without obstructions to enable persons with

disabilities free passage or use of the facilities.

Accessible Parking – Parking spaces which are useable by persons with

disabilities.

Accessible Route – A continuous, unobstructed path connecting all accessible

elements and spaces of a building/structure or facility that can be negotiated safely

by persons with disabilities. Accessible routes shall not incorporate any step, drop,

stairway, turnstile, revolving door, escalator or other impediment which would

prevent it from being safely negotiated by persons with disabilities. Interior

accessible routes shall include doorways, corridors, floors, ramps, lifts and clear floor

spaces at fixtures. Exterior accessible routes shall include parking access aisles,

ramps, and walkways.

Accessible Route Plan – Plans showing the accessible routes to the building from

adjacent buildings and nearest public facilities as well as accessible routes within the

building.

Alcove – A small recessed space in a room or wall.

Ambulant Person With Disability – A person who is able, either with or without

personal assistance, and who may depend on prostheses (artificial limbs), orthoses
374 | P a g e
 (calipers), sticks, crutches or walking aids, to walk on level or negotiated suitably

graded steps provided that convenient handrails are available.

Anthropometrics – Pertaining to the measurement of the human body.

Area of Refuge – An area which has direct access to an exit, separated from the

general floor area by a fire separation having a fire-resistance rating at least equal to

that required for an exit that is smoke protected and served by an exit or a fireman’s

elevator. It is an area where persons with disabilities who are unable to use stairs

may remain temporarily in safety to await further instructions or assistance during

emergency evacuation. It should have a minimum space of 850 X 1200 mm per non-

ambulant person with disability, with a minimum of 2 spaces.

Bollard – A low post used to segregate a pedestrian path from vehicular traffic.

Building – As used in this amended IRR, the term “building” is used to denote

public and privately owned buildings and other related structures for public use.

Clear – Unobstructed

Clear Floor Space – The minimum unobstructed floor or ground space required to

accommodate a single wheelchair user.

Corridor – A passageway providing access to several rooms or spaces to an exit.

375 | P a g e
 Curb – A raised rim of concrete, stone or metal which forms the edge of a street,

sidewalk, ramp, planted area, etc.; Side barrier to a trafficable surface.

Curb Ramp – A break in the sidewalk or traffic island provided with an inclined

surface to facilitate mobility of persons with disability; sloped area cut into a curb.

Short ramp cutting through a curb or built up to it.

Door – An entranceway which swings, slides, or folds to close an opening in a

wall or the like.

Dropped sidewalks – the lower portion of the sidewalk adjacent to at least one

accessible ramp and the street gutter.

Egress – An exit, or a means of going out.

Elevator – A hoisting and lowering mechanism equipped with a car or platform

which moves in guides, in a vertical direction serving two or more floors of a building

or structure.

Entrance – Any access point to a building or facility used for the purpose of

entering; An entrance includes the approach walk, the vertical access leading to the

entrance platform, the entrance platform itself, vestibules if provided, the entry

door(s) or gate(s), and the hardware of the entry door(s) or gate(s).

Facility – All or any portion of buildings, structures, site improvements, complexes,

376 | P a g e
 equipment, roads, walks, passageways, parking lots, or other real or personal

property located on a site.

Flare – A sloped surface that flanks a curb ramp and provides a graded transition

between the ramp and the sidewalk. Flares bridge differences in elevation and are

intended to prevent ambulant persons with disabilities from tripping. Flares are not

considered part of the accessible route.

Floor – The surface within a room or area on which one walks.

Grab Bar – Graspable bar used to give a steadying or stabilizing assistance to a

person engaged in a particular function.

Gradient of Ramp - The degree of inclination of the sloped surface expressed as a

percentage or ratio.

Graphic Sign – A drawing, painting, diagram, engraving, etching or other similar

illustrations which from a single glance conveys a given message; a visual aid.

Guard – Protective barrier to prevent accidental falls at openings in floors and at the

open sides of stairs, landings, balconies, mezzanines and ramps. Handrail supports

often act as guards.

Handrail – A rail used in circulation areas such as corridors, passageways,

ramps and stairways to assist in continuous movement; A hand support along a

377 | P a g e
 stairway or ramp consisting of rails their supporting posts, balusters or pillars and

constituting an enclosure or a line of division.

Height Above Floor – Distance between two points aligned vertically with one of

the points on the floor.

Individual Washroom – A compartment having the basic requirements of a water

closet compartment, wash basin and other essential washroom accessories as

required by persons with disabilities.

Ingress – an entrance or a means of going in

Infrared System – Specialized sound system that converts sound into infrared

light; the lights is reconverted into sound by a portable receiver.

Luminance Contrast – Occurs when there is not only a contrast in color between a

surface and its background, but there is a luminance factor to the surface which

provides a slightly reflective quality, further highlighting an area from the

background.

Multiple Leaf Doors – Two or more doors separated only by a door frame. Each

door is called a leaf.

Nosing – Overhanging edge of a stair tread, usually half rounded.

378 | P a g e
 Obstacle – An object that limits the vertical passage space, protrudes into the

circulation route, or reduces the clearance width of a sidewalk or trail.

Operable Part – Pat of a piece of equipment or appliance used to insert or

withdraw objects or to activate, deactivate, or adjust the equipment or appliance

(for example, coin slot, push-button, handle).

Parking Area – Allocated space composed of marked-off portions for single motor

vehicles on a short-time storage basis.

Passageway or Passage – A space connecting one area or room of a building with

another.

Pedestrian Crossing – Part of a road where pedestrians going across the road

have priority over traffic.

Persons with Disabilities – Those suffering from restriction or lack of ability to

perform an activity in the manner or within the range considered normal for a

human being as a result of a mental, physical, or sensory impairment; Persons

whose mobility and use of a building are affected as a consequence of one or

more of the following physical or sensory disabilities or impairments:

(a) ambulant disabled;

(b) wheelchair-bound;

(c) hearing impairment or deafness; or

(d) visual impairment or blindness.

379 | P a g e
 Persons with Disabilities – include those who have long-term physical, mental,

intellectual or sensory impairments which in interaction with various barriers may

hinder their full and effective participation in society on an equal basis with others.

(UN-CRPD).

Place of public resort – A building or a defined or enclosed place used to

constructed or adapted to be used ether ordinarily or occasionally as a church,

chapel, mosque, temple or other place where public worship is or religious

ceremonies are performed, not being merely a dwelling house so used, or as a

community club, country club, or as a cinema, theatre, public

exhibition/concert/lecture hall, public ballroom, museum, stadium or as a public race

of assembly for persons admitted thereto by ticket or otherwise or used

or constructed or adapted to be used either ordinarily or occasionally for any other

public purpose.

Principal Entrance – An entrance used most frequently by the public and building

occupants.

Public Use – Describes interior or exterior rooms or spaces that are made available

to the general public. Public use may be provided at a building or facility that is

privately or publicly owned.

Public Telephones – A shelf-unit telephone with coin operating functions for the

use of the public.

380 | P a g e
 Ramp– Any slope grater than 1:20 (5%); An inclined way connecting one level to

another; A sloped surface connecting two or more planes at different levels.

Riser – Vertical portion of a step.

Run – Horizontal distance of a stair or ramp.

Roll-in Shower – To be used while staying in a wheelchair, standing, or sitting (by

adding a seat to the shower stall).

Sidewalk – A paved footwalk at the side of a street or roadway.

Signage – Displayed verbal, symbolic, tactile, and pictorial information.

Site – A parcel of land bounded by a property line or a designated portion of a

public right-of-way.

Slip Resistant Material – Slip resistant materials shall have a Coefficient of

Friction of 0.6 for level surfaces and 0.8 for sloping surfaces (American Society for

Testing and Materials). Coefficient of friction values are used to measure the slip

resistance of any surface. This can be called slip coefficient or coefficient of friction

testing. This is defined as a measure of the amount of resistance that a surface

exerts on or substances moving over it, equal to the ratio between the maximal

frictional force that the surface exerts and the force pushing the object toward the

surface.

381 | P a g e
 Slope – The slope of a ramp is expressed as the height to the length (i.e 1:16

indicates for each 1 m in height, there is 16 m in length).

Space – A definable area i.e. room, toilet, hall, assembly area, entrance, storage

room, alcove, courtyard, or lobby.

Symbol – The International Symbol of Access for persons with disabilities.

Tactile – Describes an object that can be perceived using the sense of touch.

Tactile Warning – A change in surface condition that provides a tactile cue to alert

pedestrians of a hazardous situation.

Tactile Signs – Signs having raised letters which are interpreted or read by tracing

with fingers over the surfaces.

Tactile Blocks – Textured floor finishes also known as truncated floor finishes,

detectable warning devices, blistered surfaces that can be used as non-skid

materials. Referred to as warning, positional, and directional blocks to warn visually

impaired persons of danger or indicate facilities beside, or an indicator to make

a turn in direction.

Terminal – Passenger and freight loading/unloading spaces and ancillary spaces

(such as parking slots, waiting areas, driveways connecting such spaces, access

systems, etc.) for use by public motor vehicles.

382 | P a g e
 Threshold – A strip fastened to the floor beneath a door, usually required to cover

the joint where two types of floor materials meet; may provide weather protection at

exterior doors.

Toilet – A room containing various toilet compartments with at least one wall-hung

lavatory and one water closet compartment.

Toilet Stall – a small enclosed private area for washing or using a toilet.

Transient Lodging – A building, facility, or portion thereof that contains sleeping

accommodations that may include resorts, group homes, hotels, motels, and

dormitories.

Truncated Domes – Small domes with flattened tops that are used as tactile

detectable warning indicators at transit platforms, vertical drops and curb edges.

Universal Design – The design of products and environments to be used by all

people, to the greatest extent possible, without the need for adaptation or

specialized design. Concept used to create environments that respond to the widest

range of the population possible.

Vestibule – A small entranceway or transitional space fort eh exterior to the interior

of a building and opens into a larger space.

Visual Warnings – The use of contrasting surface colours to indicate a change in

383 | P a g e
 environment, such as at a curb ramp where the sidewalk changes to the street.

Walk – An exterior pathway with a prepared surface intended for pedestrian use.

Walkway – An exterior passage for walking along, especially one connecting

adjoining buildings and related structures.

Warning Tactile Blocks – A standardized tactile surface feature built in or applied

to walking surfaces or other elements to warn visually impaired people of upcoming

hazards. (Often a paver insert composed of tactile raised truncated domes, applied

perpendicular to the hazard.)

Washroom – A room providing facilities for washing; a lavatory or toilet room.

Water Closet – A room or booth containing a toilet and often a washbowl.

Water Closet Compartment – A compartment having a water closet with grab

bars installed to assist persons with disabilities.

Water Fountain – A fixture consisting of a shallow basin, together with a water jet

designated to provide potable water for human consumption.

Wayfinding – Finding one’s way to a destination.

Wheelchair User – A person with disability who depends on a wheelchair for

384 | P a g e
 mobility; A person with disability who is not able to walk on level or suitably graded

steps.

Width – The clear distance from on finished surface to another.

Width of Corridor – The linear width of the unobstructed path in corridors

Winder – Tread wider at one end that the other, as in circular stairs.

REPUBLIC ACT NO. 9514: AN ACT ESTABLISHING A COMPREHENSIVE FIRE CODE

OF THE PHILIPPINES, REPEALING PRESIDENTIAL DECREE NO. 1185 AND FOR
OTHER PURPOSES

SECTION 1. This Act shall be known as the “Fire Code of the Philippines of 2008”.

SECTION 2. It is the policy of the State to ensure public safety, promote economic

development through the prevention and suppression of all kinds, of destructive fires, and

promote the professionalization of the fire service as a profession. Towards this end, the

State shall enforce all laws, rules and regulations to ensure adherence to standard fire

prevention and safety measures, and promote accountability in the fire protection and

prevention service.

SECTION 3. Definition of Terms. - As used in this Fire Code, the following words and

phrases shall mean and be construed as indicated:

385 | P a g e
Abatement - Any act that would remove or neutralize a fire hazard.

Administrator - Any person who acts as agent of the owner and manages the use of a

building for him.

Blasting Agent - Any material or mixture consisting of a fuel and oxidizer used to set off

explosives. 2009lawsprem

Cellulose Nitrate or Nitro Cellulose - A highly combustible and explosive compound

produced by the reaction of nitric acid with a cellulose material.

Cellulose Nitrate Plastic (Pyroxylin) - Any plastic substance, materials or compound

having cellulose nitrate (nitro cellulose) as base.

Combustible Flammable or Inflammable - Descriptive of materials that are easily set on

fire.

Combustible Fiber - Any readily ignitable and free burning fiber such as cotton, oakum,

rags, waste cloth, waste paper, kapok, hay, straw, spanish moss, excelsior and other

similar materials commonly used in commerce.

Combustible Liquid - Any liquid having a flash point at or above 37.8°C (100 °F).

Corrosive Liquid - Any liquid which causes fire when in contact with organic matter or

with certain chemicals.

Curtain Board - A vertical panel of non-combustible or fire resistive materials attached to

and extending below the bottom chord of the roof trusses, to divide the underside of the

roof into separate compartments so that heat and smoke will be directed upwards to a roof

vent.

386 | P a g e
Cryogenic - Descriptive of any material which by its nature or as a result of its reaction

with other elements produces a rapid drop in temperature of the immediate surroundings.

Damper - A normally open device installed inside air duct system which automatically

closes to restrict the passage of smoke or fire.

Distillation - The process of first raising the temperature in separate the more volatile from

the less volatile parts and then cooling and condensing the resulting vapor so as to

produce a nearly purified substance.

Duct System - A continuous passageway for the transmission of air.

Dust - A finely powdered substance which, when mixed with air in the proper proportion

and ignited will cause an explosion.

Electrical Arc - An extremely hot luminous bridge formed by passage of an electric

current across a space between two conductors or terminals due to the incandescence of

the conducting vapor.

Ember - A hot piece or lump that remains after a material has partially burned, and is still

oxidizing without the manifestation of flames.

Finishes - Materials used as final coating of a surface for ornamental or protective

purposes.

Fire - The active principle of burning, characterized by the heat and light of combustion.

Fire Trap - A building unsafe in case of fire because it will burn easily or because it lacks

adequate exits or fire escapes.

Fire Alarm - Any visual or audible signal produced by a device or system to warn the

occupants of the building or fire fighting elements of the presence or danger of fire to

387 | P a g e
enable them to undertake immediate action to save life and property and to suppress the

fire.

Fire Door - A fire resistive door prescribed for openings in fire separation walls or

partitions.

Fire Hazard - Any condition or act which increases or may cause an increase in the

probability of the occurrence of fire, or which may obstruct, delay, hinder or interfere with

fire fighting operations and the safeguarding of life and property.

Fire Lane - The portion of a roadway or public-way that should be kept opened and

unobstructed at all times for the expedient operation of fire fighting units.

Fire Protective and Fire Safety Device - Any device intended for the protection of

buildings or persons to include, but not limited to, built-in protection system such as

sprinklers and other automatic extinguishing system, detectors for heat, smoke and

combustion products and other warning system components, personal protective

equipment such as fire blankets, helmets, fire suits, gloves and other garments that may

be put on or worn by persons to protect themselves during fire.

Fire Safety Constructions - Refers to design and installation of walls, barriers, doors,

windows, vents, means of egress etc. integral to and incorporated into a building or

structure in order to minimize danger to life from fire, smoke, fumes or panic before the

building is evacuated. These features are also designed to achieve, among others, safe

and rapid evacuation of people through means of egress on construction which are sealed

from smoke or fire, the confinement of fire or smoke in the room or floor of origin and delay

their spread to other parts of the building by means of smoke sealed and fire resistant

doors, walls and floors. It shall also mean to include the treatment of buildings components

or contents with flame retardant chemicals.

388 | P a g e
Flash Point - The minimum temperature at which any material gives off vapor in sufficient

concentration to form an ignitable mixture with air.

Forcing - A process where a piece of metal is heated prior to changing its shape or

dimensions.

Fulminate - A kind of stable explosive compound which explodes by percussion.

Hazardous Operation/Process - Any act of manufacturing, fabrication, conversion, etc.,

that uses or produces materials which are likely to cause fires or explosions.

Horizontal Exit - Passageway from one building to another or through or around a wall in

approximately the same floor level.

Hose Box - A box or cabinet where fire hoses, valves and other equipment are stored and

arranged for fire fighting.

Hose Reel - A cylindrical device turning on an axis around which a fire hose is wound and

connected.

Hypergolic Fuel - A rocket or liquid propellant which consist of combinations of fuels and

oxidizers which ignite spontaneously on contact with each other.

Industrial Baking and Drying - The industrial process of subjecting materials to heat for

the purpose of removing solvents or moisture from the same, and/or to fuse certain

chemical salts to form a uniform glazing on the surface of materials being treated.

Jumper - A piece of metal or an electrical conductor used to bypass a safety device in an

electrical system.

Occupancy - The purpose for which a building or portion thereof is used or intended to be

used.

389 | P a g e
Occupant - Any person actually occupying and using a building or portions thereof by

virtue of a lease contract with the owner or administrator or by permission or sufferance of

the latter.

Organic Peroxide - A strong oxidizing organic compound which releases oxygen readily.

It causes fire when in contact with combustible materials especially under conditions of

high temperature.

Overloading - The use of one or more electrical appliances or devices which draw or

consume electrical current beyond the designed capacity of the existing electrical system.

Owner - The person who holds the legal right of possession or title to a building or real

property.

Oxidizing Material - A material that readily yields oxygen in quantities sufficient to stimulate

or support combustion.

Pressurized or Forced Draft Burning Equipment - Type of burner where the fuel is

subjected to pressure prior to discharge into the combustion chamber and/or which

includes fans or other provisions for the introduction of air at above normal atmospheric

pressure into the same combustion chamber.

Public Assembly Building - Any building or structure where fifty (50) or more people

congregate, gather, or assemble for any purpose.

Public Way - Any street, alley or other strip of land unobstructed from the ground to the

sky, deeded, dedicated or otherwise permanently appropriated for public use.

Pyrophoric - Descriptive of any substance that ignites spontaneously when exposed to

air.

390 | P a g e
Refining - A process where impurities and/or deleterious materials are removed from a

mixture in order to produce a pure element or compound. It shall also refer to partial

distillation and electrolysis.

Self-closing Doors - Automatic closing doors that are designed to confine smoke and

heat and delay the spread of fire.

Smelting - Melting or fusing of metallic ores or compounds so as to separate impurities

from pure metals.

Sprinkler System - An integrated network of hydraulically designed piping installed in a

building, structure or area with outlets arranged in a systematic pattern which automatically

discharges water when activated by heat or combustion products from a fire.

Standpipe System - A system of vertical pipes in a building to which fire hoses can be

attached on each floor, including a system by which water is made available to the outlets

as needed.

Vestibule - A passage hall or antechamber between the outer doors and the interior parts

of a house or building.

Vertical Shaft - An enclosed vertical space of passage that extends from floor to floor, as

well as from the base to the top of the building.

SECTION 4. Applicability of the Code. - The provisions of the Fire Code shall apply to all

persons and all private and public buildings, facilities or structures erected or constructed

before and after its effectivity.

SECTION 5. Responsibility for the Enforcement of this Code. - This Code shall be

administered and enforced by the Bureau of Fire Protection (BFP), under the direct
391 | P a g e
supervision and control of the Chief of the Bureau of Fire Protection, through the hierarchy

of organization as provided for in Chapter VI of Republic Act No. 6975. With the approval

of the Secretary of the Department of the Interior and Local Government (DILG), the Chief,

BFP, is hereby authorized to:

a. Issue implementing rules and regulations, and prescribe standards, schedules of

fees/fire service charges and administrative penalties therefor as provided in the pertinent

provisions of this Code;

b. Reorganize the BFP as may be necessary and appropriate;

c. Support and assist fire volunteers, practitioners and fire volunteer organizations in the

country who shall undergo mandatory fire suppression, inspection, rescue, emergency

medical services and related emergency response trainings and competency evaluations

to be conducted by the BFP. In the case of the fire practitioners, they shall undergo

mandatory continuous professional education and competency evaluation of their

expertise, knowledge and skills in the area of fire science, engineering and technology to

be conducted by the .

The BFP may enter into external party agreements for the conduct of trainings,

education and evaluation of fire volunteers, practitioners and fire volunteer organizations,

which shall be under the full control and supervision of the BFP: Provided, however, That

during firefighting operations, fire volunteer organizations shall be under the direct

operational control of the fire ground commanders of the BFP;

d. Enter into long term agreement, either through public biddings or negotiations in

accordance with the provisions of Republic Act No. 9184, otherwise known as the

392 | P a g e
Government Procurement Reform Act of 2003, for the acquisition of fire prevention, fire

protection and fire fighting investigation, rescue, paramedics, hazardous material handling

equipment, supplies, materials and related technical services necessary for the fire

service;

e. Enter into Memoranda of Agreement with other departments, bureaus, agencies, offices

and corporations of the government, as well as private institutions, in order to define areas

of cooperation and coordination and delineate responsibility on fire prevention education,

fire safety, fire prevention, fire suppression and other matters of common concern;

f. Call on the police, other law enforcement agencies, and local government assistance to

render necessary assistance in the enforcement of this Code;

g. Designate a fire safety inspector through his/her duly authorized representative, who

shall conduct an inspection of every building or structure within his area of responsibility at

least once a year and every time the owner, administrator or occupant shall renew his/her

business permit or permit to operate;

No occupancy permit, business or permit to operate shall be issued without securing a Fire

Safety Inspection Certificate (FSIC) from the Chief, BFP, or his/her duly authorized

representative;

h. Inspect at reasonable time, any building, structure, installation or premises for

dangerous or hazardous conditions or materials as set forth in this Code, provided that in

case of single family dwelling, an inspection must be upon the consent of the occupant or

upon lawful order from the proper court. The Chief, BFP or his/her duly authorized

representative shall order the owner/occupant to remove hazardous materials and/or stop

hazardous operation/process in accordance with the standards set by this Code or its

implementing rules or regulations or other pertinent laws;

393 | P a g e
i. Where conditions exist and are deemed hazardous to life and property, to order the

owner/occupant of any building or structure to summarily abate such hazardous

conditions;

j. Require the building owner/occupant to submit plans and specifications, and other

pertinent documents of said building to ensure compliance with applicable codes and

standards; and

k. Issue a written notice to the owner and/or contractor to stop work on portion of any work

due to absence, or in violation of approved plans and specifications, permit and/or

clearance or certification as approved by the Chief, BFP or his/her duly authorized

representative. The notice shall state the nature of the violation and no work shall be

continued on that portion until the violation had been corrected.

SECTION 6. Technical Staff. - The Chief, BFP shall constitute a technical staff of highly

qualified persons who are knowledgeable on fire prevention, fire safety, and fire

suppression. They may be drawn not only from the organic members of the BFP and other

government offices and agencies, but also from other sources in the latter case, they will

either be appointed into the service or hired as consultants in accordance with law.

The technical staff shall study, review and evaluate latest developments and

standards on fire technology; prepare plans/programs, on fire safety, prevention and

suppression and evaluate implementation thereof; develop programs on the

professionalization of the fire service; coordinate with appropriate government and private

institutions for the offering of college courses on fire technology and fire protection

engineering; propose amendments to the Fire Code; advise the Chief, BFP on any matter

394 | P a g e
brought to his attention; and perform such other functions as directed on any matter

brought to his attention and perform such other functions as directed by higher authorities.

SECTION 7. Inspections, Safety Measures, Fire Safety, Constructions and Protective

and/or Warning Systems. - As may be defined and provided in the rules and regulations,

owners, administrators or occupants of buildings, structures and their premises or facilities

and other responsible persons shall be required to comply with the following, as may be

appropriate:

A) Inspection Requirement - A fire safety inspection shall be conducted by the Chief, BFP

or his duly authorized representative as prerequisite to the grants of permits and/or

licenses by local governments and other government agencies concerned, for the:

(1) Use or occupancy of buildings, structures, facilities or their premises including the

installation or fire protection and fire safety equipment, and electrical system in any

building structure or facility; and

(2) Storage, handling and/or use of explosives or of combustible, flammable, toxic and

other hazardous materials;

B) Safety Measures for Hazardous Materials - Fire safety measures shall be required for

the manufacture, storage, handling and/or use of hazardous materials involving:

(1) cellulose nitrate plastic of any kind;

(2) combustible fibers;

(3) cellular materials such as foam, rubber, sponge rubber and plastic foam;

(4) flammable and combustible liquids or gases of any classification;

395 | P a g e
(5) flammable paints, varnishes, stains and organic coatings;

(6) high-piled or widely spread combustible stock;

(7) metallic magnesium in any form;

(8) corrosive liquids, oxidizing materials, organic peroxide, nitromethane, ammonium

nitrate, or any amount of highly toxic, pyrophoric, hypergolic, or cryogenic materials or

poisonous gases as well as material compounds which when exposed to heat or flame

become a fire conductor, or generate excessive smoke or toxic gases;

(9) blasting agents, explosives and special industrial explosive materials, blasting caps,

black powder, liquid nitro-glycerine, dynamite, nitro cellulose, fulminates of any kind, and

plastic explosives containing ammonium salt or chlorate;

(10) firework materials of any kind or form;

(11) matches in commercial quantities;

(12) hot ashes, live coals and embers;

(13) mineral, vegetable or animal oils and other derivatives/by-products;

(14) combustible waste materials for recycling or resale;

(15) explosive dusts and vapors; and

(16) agriculture, forest, marine or mineral products which may undergo spontaneous

combustion;

(17) any other substance with potential to cause harm to persons, property or the

environment because of one or more of the following:

a) The chemical properties of the substance;

396 | P a g e
 b) The physical properties of the substance;

c) The biological properties of the substance. Without limiting the definition of

hazardous material, all dangerous goods, combustible liquids and chemicals are

hazardous materials.

C) Safety Measures for Hazardous Operation/Processes - Fire safety measures shall

be required for the following hazardous operation/processes:

(1) welding or soldering;

(2) industrial baking and drying;

(3) waste disposal;

(4) pressurized/forced-draft burning equipment;

(5) smelting and forging;

(6) motion picture projection using electrical arc lamps;

(7) refining, distillation and solvent extraction; and

(8) such other operations or processes as may hereafter be prescribed in the rules and

regulations.

D) Provision on Fire Safety Construction, Protective and Warning System - Owners,

occupants or administrator or buildings, structures and their premises or facilities, except

such other buildings or structures as may be exempted in the rules and regulations to be

promulgated under Section 5 hereof, shall incorporate and provide therein fire safety

construction, protective and warning system, and shall develop and implement fire safety

programs, to wit:

397 | P a g e
(1) Fire protection features such as sprinkler systems, hose boxes, hose reels or standpipe

systems and other fire fighting equipment;

(2) Fire alarm systems;

(3) Fire walls to separate adjoining buildings, or warehouses and storage areas from other

occupancies in the same building;

(4) Provisions for confining the fire at its source such as fire resistive floors and walls

extending up to the next floor slab or roof, curtain boards and other fire containing or

stopping components;

(5) Termination of all exits in an area affording safe passage to a public way or safe

dispersal area;

(6) Stairway, vertical shafts, horizontal exits and other means of egress sealed from smoke

and heat;

(7) A fire exit plan for each floor of the building showing the routes from each other room to

appropriate exits, displayed prominently on the door of such room;

(8) Self-closing fire resistive doors leading to corridors;

(9) Fire dampers in centralized airconditioning ducts;

(10) Roof vents for use by fire fighters; and

(11) Properly marked and lighted exits with provision for emergency lights to adequately

illuminate exit ways in case of power failure.

SECTION 8. Prohibited Acts. - The following are declared as prohibited act and omission:

a. Obstructing or blocking the exit ways or across to buildings clearly marked for fire safety

purposes, such as but not limited to aisles in interior rooms, any part of stairways,
398 | P a g e
hallways, corridors, vestibules, balconies or bridges leading to a stairway or exit of any

kind, or tolerating or allowing said violations;

b. Constructing gates, entrances and walkways to building components and yards, and

temporary or permanent structures on public ways, which obstruct the orderly and easy

passage of fire fighting vehicles and equipment;

c. Prevention, interference or obstruction of any operation of the fire service, or of duly

organized and authorized fire brigades;

d. Obstructing designated fire lanes or access to fire hydrants;

e. Overcrowding or admission of persons beyond the authorized capacity in movie houses,

theaters, coliseums, auditoriums or other public assembly buildings, except in other

assembly areas on the ground floor with open sides or open doors sufficient to provide

safe exits;

f. Locking fire exits during period when people are inside the building;

g. Prevention or obstruction of the automatic closure of fire doors or smoke partitions or

dampers;

h. Use of fire protective or fire fighting equipment of the fire service other than for fire

fighting except in other emergencies where their use are justified;

i. Giving false or malicious fire alarms;

j. Smoking in prohibited areas as may be determined by fire service, or throwing of cigars,

cigarettes, burning objects in places which may start or cause fire;

k. Abandoning or leaving a building or structure by the occupant or owner without

appropriate safety measures;

399 | P a g e
l. Removing, destroying, tampering or obliterating any authorized mark, seal, sign or tag

posted or required by the fire service for fire safety in any building, structure or processing

equipment; and

m. Use of jumpers or tampering with electrical wiring or overloading the electrical system

beyond its designated capacity or such other practices that would tend to undermine the

fire safety features of the electrical system.

SECTION 9. Violations, Penalties and Abatement of Fire Hazards. - Fire hazards shall be

abated immediately. The Chief, BFP or his/her duly authorized representative, upon the

report that a violation of this Code or other pertinent laws, rules and regulations is being

committed, shall issue notice/order to comply to the owner, administrator, occupant or

other person responsible for the condition of the building or structure, indicating among

other things, the period within which compliance shall be effected, which shall be within ten

(10) to fifteen (15) days after the receipt of the notice/order, depending on the

reasonableness to adequately comply with the same.

If after the lapse of the aforesaid period, the owner, administrator, occupant or other

responsible persons failed to comply, the Chief, BFP or his/her duly authorized

representative shall put up a sign in front of the building or structure that it is a fire hazard.

Specifically, the notice shall bear the words “WARNING: THIS BUILDING/STRUCTURE IS

A FIRE HAZARD”, which shall remain posted until such time that the owner, administrator,

occupant or other persons responsible for the condition of the building, structure and their

premises or facilities abate the same, but such period shall not exceed fifteen (15) days

from the lapse of the initial period given in the notice/order to comply.

Finally, with the failure of the owner, administrator, occupant or other persons

responsible for the condition of the building, structure and their premises or facilities to

400 | P a g e
comply within the period specified above, the Chief, BFP may issue order for such

abatement. If the owner, administrator or occupant of buildings, structure and their

premises or facilities does not abate the same within the period fixed in said order, the

building, structure, premises or facilities shall be ordered closed by the Chief, BFP or

his/her duly authorized representative notwithstanding any permit clearance or certificate

earlier issued by the local authorities.

Any building or structure assessed and declared by the Chief, BFP or his/her duly

authorized representative as a firetrap on account of the gravity or palpability of the

violation or is causing clear and present imminent fire danger to adjoining establishments

and habitations shall be declared a public nuisance, as defined in the Civil Code of the

Philippines in a notice to be issued to the owner, administrator, occupant or other person

responsible for the condition of the building, structure and their premises or facilities. If the

assessed value of the nuisance or the amount to be spent in abating the same is not more

than One hundred thousand pesos (P100,000.00), the owner, administrator or occupant

thereof shall abate the hazard within Fifteen (15) days, or if the assessed value is more

than One hundred thousand pesos (P100,000.00), within thirty (30) days from receipt of

the order declaring said building or structure a public nuisance; otherwise, the Chief, BFP

or his/her duly authorized representative shall forthwith cause its summary abatement.

Failure to comply within five (5) days from the receipt of the notice shall cause the Chief,

BFP or his/her duly authorized representative to put up a sign in front of the building or

structure, at or near the entrance of such premises, notifying the public that such building

or structure is a “FIRE TRAP”, which shall remain until the owner, administrator, occupant

or other person responsible for the condition of the building, structure and their premises

or facilities abate the same within the specified period.

401 | P a g e
 Summary abatement as used herein shall mean all corrective measures undertaken

to abate hazards which shall include, but not limited to remodeling, repairing,

strengthening, reconstructing, removal and demolition, either partial or total, of the building

or structure. The expenses incurred by the government for such summary abatement shall

be borne by the owner, administrator or occupant. These expenses shall constitute a prior

lien upon such property.

SECTION 10. Enforcement of the Lien. - If the owner, administrator or occupant fails to

reimburse the government of the expenses incurred in the summary abatement within

ninety (90) days from the completion of such abatement, the building or structure shall be

sold at public auction in accordance with existing laws and rules. No property subject of

lien under Section 9 hereof, may be sold at a price lower than the abatement expenses

incurred by the government. The property shall be forfeited in favor of the government if

the highest bid is not at least equal to the abatement expenses.

SECTION 11. Penalties. -

1. Against the private individual:

a) Administrative fine - Any person who violates any provision of the Fire Code or any of

the rules and regulations promulgated under this Act shall be penalized by an

administrative fine of not exceeding Fifty thousand pesos (P50,000.00) or in the proper

case, by stoppage of operations or by closure of such buildings, structures and their

premises or facilities which do not comply with the requirements or by both such

402 | P a g e
administrative fine and closure/stoppage of operation to be imposed by the Chief, BFP:

Provided, That the payment of the fine, stoppage of operations and/or closure of such

buildings, structures, and their premises or facilities shall not absolve the violator from

correcting the deficiency or abating the fire hazard.

The decision of the Chief, BFP, under this subsection, may be appealed to the

Secretary of the Interior and Local Government. Unless ordered by the Secretary of the

Interior and Local Government the appeal shall not stay the execution of the order of the

Chief, BFP. The decision of the Secretary of the Interior and Local Government shall be

final and executory.

b) Punitive - In case of willful failure to correct the deficiency or abate the fire hazard as

provided in the preceding subsection, the violator shall, upon conviction, be punished by

imprisonment of not less than six (6) months nor more than six (6) years, or by a fine of not

more than One hundred thousand pesos (P100,000.00) or both such fine and

imprisonment: Provided, however,

That in the case of a corporation, firm, partnership or association, the fine and/or

imprisonment shall be imposed upon its officials responsible for such violation, and in case

the guilty party is an alien, in addition to the penalties herein prescribed, he shall

immediately be deported: Provided, finally, That where the violation is attended by injury,

loss of life and/or damage to property, the violator shall be proceeded against under the

applicable provisions of the Revised Penal Code.

Any person who, without authority, maliciously removes the sign that a building or

structure is a fire hazard/firetrap placed by the authorized person in this Code shall be

liable for imprisonment for thirty (30) days or a fine not exceeding One hundred thousand

pesos (P100,000.00) or both in the discretion of the court.

403 | P a g e
 Any person, who disobeys the lawful order of the fire ground commander during a

firefighting operation shall be penalized with imprisonment of one (1) day to thirty (30) days

and a fine of Five thousand pesos (P5,000.00).

2. Against the public officer/employee

a) Administrative - The following acts or omissions shall render the public

officer/employee in charge of the enforcement of this Code, its implementing rules and

regulations and other pertinent laws, administratively liable, and shall be punished by

reprimand, suspension or removal in the discretion of the disciplining authority, depending

on the gravity of the offense and without prejudice to the provisions of other applicable

laws:

(1) Unjustified failure of the public officer/employee to conduct inspection of buildings or

structures at least once a year;

(2) Deliberate failure to put up a sign in front of the building or structure within his/her area

of responsibility found to be violating this Code, its implementing rules and regulations and

other pertinent laws, that the same is a “FIRE HAZARD” or a “FIRE TRAP”;

(3) Endorsing to the Chief, BFP or his/her duly authorized representative for the

certification, or submitting a report that the building or structure complies with the

standards set by this Code, its implementing rules or regulations or other pertinent laws

when the same is contrary to fact;

(4) Issuance or renewal of occupancy or business permit without the fire safety inspection

certificate issued by the Chief, BFP or his/her duly authorized representative;

(5) Failure to cancel the occupancy or business permit after the owner, administrator,

occupant or other person responsible for the condition of the building, structure and other

404 | P a g e
premises failed to comply with the notice/order for compliance with the standards set by

this Code, its implementing rules and regulations and other pertinent laws, within the

specified period;

(6) Failure to abate a public nuisance within fifteen (15) days after the owner,

administrator, occupant or other responsible person failed to abate the same within the

period contained in the notice to abate;

(7) Abusing his/her authority in the performance of his/her duty through acts of corruption

and other unethical practices; or

(8) Other willful impropriety or gross negligence in the performance of his/her duty as

provided in this Act or its implementing rules and regulations.

b) Punitive — In case of willful violation involving the abovementioned acts or omissions

enumerated under Section 11 subparagraph 2(A), the public officer/employee shall, upon

conviction, be punished by imprisonment of not less than six (6) months nor more than six

(6) years, or by a fine of not more than One hundred thousand pesos (P100,000.00) or

both such fine and imprisonment: Provided, That where the violation is attended by injury,

loss of life and/or property, the violator shall be proceeded against under the applicable

provisions of the Revised Penal Code.

SECTION 12. Appropriation and Sources of Income. -

a. To support the manpower; infrastructure and equipment needs of the fire service of the

BFP, such amount as may be necessary to attain the objectives of the Fire Code shall be

appropriated and included in the annual appropriation of the BFP.

b. To partially provide for the funding of the fire service the following taxes and fees which

shall accrue to the general fund of the National Government, are hereby imposed:

405 | P a g e
(1) Fees to be charged for the issuance of certificates, permits and licenses as provided

for in Section 7 (a) hereof;

(2) One-tenth of one per centum (0.1%) of the verified estimated value of buildings or

structures to be erected, from the owner thereof, but not to exceed Fifty thousand

(P50,000.00) pesos, one half to be paid prior to the issuance of the building permit, and

the balance, after final inspection and prior to the issuance of the use and occupancy

permit;

(3) One-hundredth of one per centum (0.10%) of the assessed value of buildings or

structures annually payable upon payment of the real estate tax, except on structures used

as single family dwellings;

(4) Two per centum (2%) of all premiums, excluding re-insurance premiums for the sale of

fire, earthquake and explosion hazard insurance collected by companies, persons or

agents licensed to sell such insurances in the Philippines;

(5) Two per centum (2%) of gross sales of companies, persons or agents selling fire

fighting equipment, appliances or devices, including hazard detection and warning

systems; and

(6) Two per centum (2%) of the service fees received from fire, earthquake, and explosion

hazard reinsurance surveys and post loss service of insurance adjustment companies

doing business in the Philippines directly through agents.

SECTION 13. Collection of Taxes, Fees and Fines. - All taxes, fees and fines provided in

this Code shall be collected by the BFP: Provided, That twenty percent (20%) of all such

collections shall be set aside and retained for use by the city or municipal government

concerned, which shall appropriate the same exclusively for the use of the operation and

406 | P a g e
maintenance of its local fire station, including the construction and repair of fire station:

Provided, further, That the remaining eighty (80%) shall be remitted to the National

Treasury under a trust fund assigned for the modernization of the BFP.

SECTION 13-A. Assessment of Fire Code Taxes, Fees and Fines. - The

assessment of fire code taxes, fees and fines is vested upon the BFP. The BFP shall,

subject to the approval of the DILG, prescribe the procedural rules for such purpose.

SECTION 13-B. Collection and Assessment of Local Taxes, Fees and Fines. - The

collection and assessment of taxes, fees and fines as prescribed in the Local Government

Code, except those contained in this Code, shall be the function of the concerned local

government units.

SECTION 13-C. Use of Income Generated from the Enforcement of the Fire Code. -

The Chief, BFP is authorized, subject to the approval of the Secretary of the Interior and

Local Government, to use the income generated under the Fire Code for procurement of

fire protection and fire fighting investigation, rescue, paramedics, supplies and materials,

and related technical services necessary for the fire service and the improvement of

facilities of the Bureau of Fire Protection and abatement of fire hazards.

The BFP shall determine the optimal number of equipment, including, but not limited

to, fire trucks and fire hydrants, required by every local government unit for the proper

delivery of fire protection services in its jurisdiction.

In the procurement of firefighting and investigation supplies and materials, the Bureau of

Product Standards of the Department of Trade and Industry shall evaluate, determine and

certify if the supply so procured conforms to the product standards fixed by the BFP. For

this purpose, the BFP shall submit to the Bureau of Product Standards a detailed set of

407 | P a g e
product standards that must be complied with in the procurement of fire fighting and

investigation supplies and materials within six (6) months from the effectivity of this Act.

SECTION 13-D. Monitoring the Implementation of the Fire Code and the Amount of the

Fees Collected. - The Chief, BFP shall, within six (6) months from the effectivity of this

Code, submit to the Secretary of the Interior and Local Government for his/her approval, a

management tool or mechanism that would ensure effective monitoring of the enforcement

of the Fire Code to include the amount of Fire Code fees collected.

SECTION 14. Within sixty (60) days from the effectivity of this Act, the Secretary of the

Interior and Local Government shall issue the rules and regulations for its effective

implementation.

SECTION 15. Presidential Decree No. 1185 is hereby repealed. All laws, presidential

decrees, letters of instructions, executive orders, rules and regulations insofar as they are

inconsistent with this Act, are hereby repealed or amended as the case may be.

SECTION 16 In case any provision of this Act or any portion thereof is declared

unconstitutional by a competent court, other provisions shall not be affected thereby.

SECTION 17. This Act shall take effect fifteen (15) days after its publication in the Official

Gazette or in two (2) national newspapers of general circulation.

408 | P a g e
 CODE ON SANITATION

WHEREAS, the health of the people, being of paramount importance, all efforts of public

services should be directed towards the protection and promotions of health; and

WHEREAS, with the advance in the field of sanitation in recent years, there arises the

need for updating and codifying our scattered sanitary laws to ensure that they are in

keeping with modern standards of sanitation and provide a handy reference and guide for

their enforcement;

NOW, THEREFORE, I, FERDINAND E. MARCOS, President of the Philippines, by virtue

of the powers vested in me by the Constitution, do hereby order and decree the following

Code on Sanitation:

CODE ON SANITATION OF THE PHILIPPINES

CHAPTER I.—GENERAL PROVISIONS

SECTION 1. Title—The title of this Code is "Code on Sanitation of the Philippines."

409 | P a g e
SEC. 2. Definition of Terms.—Whenever any of the following words or terms is used herein

or in any rule or regulation issued under this Code, it shall have the meaning given it in this

section, as follows:

a. Code—Code on Sanitation of the Philippines.

b. Department—The Department of Health.

c. Secretary—The Secretary of Health.

d. Regional Director—an official who heads a Regional Health Office.

e. Local Health Authority—an official or employee responsible for the application of

a prescribed health measure in a local political subdivision.

f. Health Officer—Provincial, City or Municipal Health Officer.

g. Engineer—A Sanitary Engineer.

h. Section—any section of this code unless the term refers to other statutes which

are specifically mentioned.

SEC. 3. Functions of the Department of Health—The Department shall have the following

powers and functions:

a. Undertake the promotion and preservation of the health of the people and raise

the health standards of individuals and communities throughout the Philippines;

b. Extend maximum health services to the people in rural areas and provide

medical care to those who cannot afford it by reason of poverty;

c. Develop, administer and coordinate various health activities and services which

shall include public health, preventive, curative and rehabilitative programs,

medical care, health and medical education services;

d. Upgrade the standards of medical practice, the quality of health services and

programs to assure the people of better health services;

410 | P a g e
 e. Assist local health agencies in developing public health programs including

medical care, and promote medical and public health research;

f. Issue permits to establish and operate government and private hospitals, clinics,

dispensaries, schools of nursing, midwifery, and other paramedical courses,

puericulture centers, clinical laboratories and blood banks;

g. Prescribe standard rates of fees for health, medical, laboratory, and other public

health services; and

h. Perform such other functions as may be provided by law.

SEC. 4. Authority of the Secretary.—In addition to the powers and authority of the

Secretary which are provided by law, he is likewise empowered to promulgate rules and

regulations for the proper implementation and enforcement of the provisions of this Code.

SEC. 5. Authority of the Bureau Directors.—The Bureau Directors shall be responsible for

staff activities involving the development of plans, programs, operating standards and

management techniques in their respective field of assignment.

SEC. 6. Authority of the Regional Directors.—The Regional Directors shall administer

health functions in their regions, implement policies, standards and programs involving

health services; and enforce the provisions of this Code and the rules and regulations

promulgated by the Secretary under this Code.

SEC. 7. Authority of the Health Officers.—The Health officers shall administer health

functions in areas under their jurisdiction and enforce the provisions of this Code and the

rules and regulations promulgated by the Secretary under this Code.

SEC. 8. Miscellaneous Provisions.—

a. International treaties agreements and conventions.—The Republic of the

Philippines recognizes international treaties, agreements and conventions on

public health. Their provisions may be considered parts of this Code provided

411 | P a g e
 they do not contravene the Constitution, existing laws or any provision of this

Code.

b. Rights and proceedings.—Any proceeding which has commenced or any right

which has accrued upon the effectivity of this Code shall not be affected by any

of its provisions. However, matters of procedure and rights arising after the date

of effectivity of this Code shall conform to the pro visions hereof.

c. Delegation of power and assignment of duty.—Whenever a power is granted or a

duty is assigned to any public health officer in this Code, the power may be

exercised by a deputy or agent of the official pursuant to law, unless it is

expressly provided otherwise in this Code.

d. Language required.—Any notice, report, statement or record required or

authorized by this Code, shall be written in English or Pilipino.

e. Mailing of notices.—Unless otherwise expressly pro vided, any notice required to

be sent to any per son by any provision of this Code, shall be sent through the

postal service. The affidavit of the official or employee who mailed the notice is

prima facie evidence that the notice was sent as prescribed herein.

f. Condemnation and seizure of property.—When any property is officially

condemned or seized by government authorities in the interest of public health

the owner thereof shall not be entitled to compensation.

g. Command responsibility.—When a duty is expressly vested in a health officer as

provided in this Code, it shall be understood that it shall likewise be the concern

of the superiors of the health office under the principle of command

responsibility.

________________________________________________________________________

412 | P a g e
CHAPTER II.—WATER SUPPLY

SEC. 9. Prescribed Standards and Procedures.—Standards for drinking water and their

bacteriological and chemical examinations, together with the evaluation of results, shall

conform to the criteria set by the National Drinking Water Standards. The treatment of

water to render it safe for drinking, and the disinfection of contaminated water sources

together with their distribution systems shall be in accordance with procedures prescribed

by the Department.

SEC. 10. Jurisdiction of the Department.—The approval of the Secretary or that of his duly

authorized representative is required in the following cases:

a. Sites of water sources before their construction;

b. Delivery of water to consumers from new or recently repaired water systems;

c. Operation of a water system after an order of closure was issued by the

Department;

d. Plans and specifications of water systems of sub divisions and projects prior to

the construction of housing units thereat; and

e. Certification of potability of drinking water.

SEC. 11. Types of Water Examinations Required.—The following examinations are

required for drinking water:

a. Initial examination.—The physical, chemical and bacteriological examinations of

water from newly constructed systems or sources are required be fore they are

operated and opened for public use. Examination of water for possible

radioactive contamination should also be done initially.

413 | P a g e
 b. Periodic examination.—Water from existing sources is subject to bacteriological

examination as of ten as possible but the interval shall not be longer than six

months, while general systematic chemical examination shall be conducted

every 12 months or oftener. Examination of water sources shall be conducted

yearly for possible radioactive contamination.

SEC. 12. Examining Laboratories And Submission of Water Samples.—The examination

of drinking water shall be performed only in private or government laboratories duly

accredited by the Department. It is the responsibility of operators of water systems to

submit to accredited laboratories water samples for examination in a manner and at such

intervals prescribed by the Department.

SEC. 13. Other Protective Measures.—To protect drinking water from contamination, the

following measures shall be observed:

a. Washing clothes or bathing within a radius of 25 meters from any well or other

source of drinking water is prohibited.

b. No artesians, deep or shallow well shall be constructed within 25 meters from

any source of pollution.

c. No radioactive sources or materials shall be stored within a radius of 25 meters

from any well or source of drinking water unless the radioactive source is

adequately and safely enclosed by proper shielding.

d. No person charged with the management of a public water supply system shall

permit any physical connection between its distribution system and that of any

other water supply, unless the latter is regularly examined as to its quality by

those incharge of the public supply to which the connection is made and found to

be safe and potable.

414 | P a g e
 e. The installation of a booster pump to boost water direct from the water

distribution line of a water supply system, where low-water pressure prevails is

prohibited.

_______________________________________________________________________

CHAPTER III. FOOD ESTABLISHMENT

SEC. 14. Sanitary Permit.—

a. No person or entity shall operate a food establishment for public patronage

without securing a permit from the local health office. The term "food

establishment" as used in this chapter means an establishment where food or

drinks are manufactured, processed, stored, sold or served.

b. Every Sanitary Permit shall be posted in a conspicuous place of the

establishment.

c. Fees.—The fees payable on applications for permits and upon the issuances,

renewal and nothing of such certificates shall be in such amounts as the City

or Municipal Authority may by resolution impose.

d. Noting of Permit—Within 14 days after any change in the ownership or

occupancy of any establishment, the new occupant shall apply to the City or

Municipal Health Officer to have such change noted in the records and on the

permit certificate which he shall produce for the purpose and shall pay the

corresponding fee in respect of such noting.

e. Record of Permit Certificates

1. Every City or Municipality shall keep a record of all establishments in

respect of which permits have been issued and of all permit certificates
415 | P a g e
 and renewals thereof.

f. The record shall in every case show the following:

i. The name and address of the holder of the permit who in every case shall be

the actual occupier of the establishment;

ii. The location of the establishment;

iii. The purpose or purposes for which the permit has been issued;

iv. The date the first permit was issued and the dates of any renewal thereof.

v. Every change of occupation and management of the establishment since the

first permit was issued; and

vi. Conditions under which the permit was issued or any renewal thereof granted.

The record shall be available at all reasonable times for inspection by any officer of

the Department of Health.

SEC. 15. Health Certificates.—No person shall be employed in any food

establishment without a Health Certificate issued by the local health authority. This

certificate shall be issued only after the required physical and medical examinations

are performed and immunizations are administered at prescribed intervals.

SEC. 16. Quality and Protection of Food.—All food must be obtained from sources

approved by the local health authority. In this regard, the following requirements are

applicable:

a. Meats, meat products and fish shall be procured from sources under sanitary

or veterinary super vision.

b. All meat and fish shall be properly cooked before serving.

c. No meat products, fish, vegetables and other food sources shall be procured

416 | P a g e
 from sources or areas known to have been affected by radioactive as for

example, areas contaminated with a very large amount of radioactive fallout.

d. Milk and fluid milk products shall be obtained from sources approved by the

local health authority. Milk obtained from other sources must be sterilized,

pasteurized or otherwise heated.

e. Milk shall be stored in a refrigerator. Canned or packaged milk, other than dry

milk powders, shall be refrigerated after the container has been opened.

f. All perishable and potentially hazardous foods shall be stored at 45°F (7°C) or

below.

g. Cooked food intented to be served hot shall be kept at a temperature not lower

than 140°F (60°C)

h. Raw fruits and vegetables shall be thoroughly washed before they are used.

SEC. 17. Structural Requirements.—Food establishment shall be constructed in

accordance with the following requirements:

1. No person shall use any room or place for or in connection with the

preparation, storage, handling or sale of any article of food.

a. Which is at anytime used or in direct communication with a sleeping

apartment or toilet;

b. In which any animal is kept; or

c. Which is or has been used for any purpose which would be likely to

contaminate the food or to affect injuriously its wholesomeness or

cleanliness; or

d. Which is not used exclusively for the purpose; Provided, That in

department stores or multipurpose business establishments, food may

417 | P a g e
 be manufactured, prepared, cooked, stored, or sold only in the area set

aside exclusively for said purpose and for which a sanitary permit has

been issued.

2. No sanitary permit shall be issued for any premises to be used for the

preparation, handling and sale of food unless it is constructed in accordance

with the following requirements:

a. Floors—The floors shall be—

i. Constructed of concrete or other impervious and easily cleaned

material that is resistant to wear and corrosion and shall be

adequately graded and drained; all angles between the floors

and walls shall be rounded off to a height of not less than 3

inches (7.62 cm.) from the floor; or

ii. Constructed of wood with devetailed or tongue and grooved floor

boards laid on a firm foundation and tightly clamped together with

all angles between the floor and walls rounded off to a height of 3

inches (7.62 cm.); or

iii. Constructed in accordance with the requirements of sub-clause

(1) and (ii) of this clause and covered with linoleum, smooth

surfaced rubber or similar material fixed to the floor with cement

or suitable adhesive: Provided, That with the approval in writing

of the local authority, floors may be covered with carpets or other

floor covering in those parts of the premises where such carpets

or coverings can be satisfactorily cleaned and maintained.

b. Walls

418 | P a g e
 i. The internal surface of walls shall have a smooth, even, non-absorbent surface

capable of being readily cleaned without damage to the surface and

constructed of dust-proof materials;

ii. The walls, where subject to wetting or splashing, shall be constructed of

impervious, non-absorbent materials to a height of not less than 79 inches (2

meters) from the floor;

iii. The internal walls be painted in light colors or treated with such other wall

finish as the health authority may prescribe.

c. Ceilings

i. All ceilings or, if no ceiling is provided, the entire under-surface of the

roof shall be dust-proof and washable.

ii. The ceiling or undersurface of the roof of rooms in which food is

prepared or packed or in which utensils or hands are washed shall be

smooth, non-absorbent and light coloured.

d. Lighting

i. The general standards of illumination provided shall permit effective

inspection and cleaning and shall be of sufficient intensity appropriate to

the purpose for which any room or place is used;

ii. In rooms where food is prepared or packed or in which utensils or

hands are washed there shall be a minimum illumination intensity of 20

foot-candles; in premises where food is consumed, there shall be a

minimum illumination intensity of 5 foot-candles. Intensities of

illumination shall be measured at a point 30 inches (76.20 cm.) above

the floor;

419 | P a g e
 iii. All lighting shall be reasonably free from glare and distributed so as to

avoid shadows;

iv. At other areas or working surfaces, the illumination shall be of such

intensity as may be required by the health authority.

e. Ventilation

i. Ventilation shall be provided which shall be effective and suitable to

maintain comfortable condition;

ii. The ventilation shall be adequate to prevent the air from becoming

excessively heated, prevent condensation and the formation of excess

moisture on walls, ceilings and for the removal of objectionable odours,

fumes and impurities;

iii. In the absence of effective natural ventilation, mechanical ventilation

with airflow from a clean area, and discharging in such a manner as not

to create a nuisance, shall be provided;

iv. Canopies, air ducts, fans or other appliances shall be provided as

required by the health authority in particular circumstances;

v. Effective provision shall be made for securing and maintaining a

reasonable temperature.

f. Overcrowding.—There shall be sufficient floor space to enable every person

working thereon to carry out his duties efficiency and to permit easy access for

cleaning. Working spaces, aisles or passageways and areas to which

customers have access shall be unobstructed and sufficient to permit

movement of employees and customers without contamination of food by

clothing or personal contact.

420 | P a g e
 g. Changerooms.—

1. There shall be provided adequate and suitable lockers or other facilities

for the orderly storage of clothing and personal belongings of

employees or persons engaged or employed in the premises. Such

facilities shall be so situated and arranged so that there is no

contamination of food by contact with clothing, and where the number of

persons engaged or employed is four or more of either sex, there shall

be provided separate changing rooms for each sex.

h. Wash-hand Basins.—

i. Wash-hand basins shall be installed in convenient places and as near

as practicable to where the person for whose use they are provided are

working while handling food for sale or in such locations as may be

otherwise prescribed in any particular case.

ii. If required in writing by the local health authority an additional wash-

hand basin shall be installed as near as practicable to the toilet facilities:

Provided, that wash-hand basins specified in this Code need not be

installed in premises where only food in sealed containers is sold: and,

Provided, further, that wash-hand basins specified in this regulation

shall be installed under specifications of the National Plumbing Code of

the Philippines.

i. Wash-hand Basin Maintenance.—

i. An adequate supply of soap, clean towels, roller towels presenting a

clean surface to each user from a continuous roller towel dispenser or

other hand drying services approved by health authorities.

421 | P a g e
 ii. The wash-hand basin and all hand washing facilities shall, at all times,

be maintained in good repair and in a clean condition.

iii. All wash-hand basins shall, at all times, while the premises are being

used, be supplied with hot and cold or tempered running water at a

minimum temperature or 100°F (37.8°C).

SEC. 18. Use of Food-Service Spaces—

a. Food-service spaces shall not be used as living or sleeping quarters.

b. Clothing or personal effects shall be kept in lockers or in designated places

away from food service spaces.

c. No animal or live fowls shall be allowed in such spaces.

d. Persons not directly connected with food preparation and serving shall not be

allowed to stay in food-serving spaces.

e. Foods in storage or in preparation must not be handled by anyone other than

the preparation and serving staff.

SEC. 19. Food Handlers—

a. No person shall be employed in any food establishment without a health

certificate issued by the local health authority.

b. Food handlers shall at all times:

i. Wear clean working garments. The Cook shall wear prescribed caps and

female employees caps or hairnets.

ii. Observe good personal hygiene.

iii. Wash their hands thoroughly with soap and water and dry them with a clean or

disposable towel or a suitable hand-drying device immediately before working,

422 | P a g e
 or after visiting the toilet.

SEC. 20. Vermin Control—

Vermin.—A group of insects or small animals such as flies, mosquitoes, cockroaches,

fleas, lice, bed-bugs, mice, and rats which are vectors of diseases

a. Spaces where food and drinks are stored, prepared and served shall be so

constructed and maintained as to exclude vermin.

b. All openings which connects spaces to the outer air shall be effectively

protected with screen of non-corrosive wire 16-mesh or finer. Door screens

shall be tight-fitting.

c. A vermin abatement program shall be maintained in the establishments by

their owners, operators, or administrators. If they fail, neglect or refuse to

maintain a vermin abatement programs, the local health agency will undertake

the work at their expense.

d. During deratting or disinfecting operations, all foodstuffs, utensils, food

preparation and cleaning equipment shall be covered to protect them from

toxic chemical substances.

e. Vermin control in public places shall be the responsibility of the provincial, city

or municipal governments which have jurisdiction over them.

f. The procedure and frequency of vermin abatement program shall be

determined and approved by the local health authority.

SEC. 21. Toilet and Washing Facilities—

a. Adequate and clean toilet facilities for male and female customers and

personnel shall be provided in properly located areas.

b. Toilet rooms shall not open directly in to spaces where food is prepared, stored
423 | P a g e
 or served. Where such toilets exist, the doors shall be tight fitting and self-

closing.

c. Adequate hand-washing facilities shall be provided within or adjacent to toilet

room.

d. Facilities shall include hot and cold running water, single-service paper or cloth

towel dispenser or drying device and soap or detergent.

SEC. 22. Disposal of Refuse.—

a. Refuse cans may be used in food-preparation areas for immediate use only.

b. Storage refuse cans, filled and empty; shall be in a designated space separate

from food-handling operations.

c. These cans shall be so constructed and maintained as to be vermin-proof and

easily cleaned.

d. Cans containing refuse be tightly covered at all times, except during actual use

in food handling areas.

e. Holding bins may likewise be used, provided they are constructed of

impervious, readily-cleaned materials, and fitted with tight-fitting covers.

f. Where refuse cans are used, a space separate from the food-handling spaces

and adjacent to the refuse-can storage space shall be provided for cleaning

them. This space shall be equipped with scrubbing brushes, cleansing agents,

steam or hot water under pressure, and a hose fitted with adjustable nozzle.

SEC. 23. Equipment and Utensils—

a. They shall be so designed, fabricated and installed so that cleaning is easy

and they do not pose health hazards.

424 | P a g e
 b. Lead-soldered containers and cadium-lined piping and fixtures shall not be

used.

c. Surfaces that come into contact with food or drinks shall be constructed of

materials that are impervious, corrosion-resistant, non-toxic, easily cleanable,

durable and resistant to chipping.

d. Sliding doors on cabinets shall be easily cleanable and removable. Runners

shall be alloted at the ends to permit removal of dust and debris. The bottom

shelves of open—based fixtures shall be removable to facilitate inspection,

cleaning and maintenance.

SEC. 24. Washing of Utensils—

a. They shall be scraped and pre-rinsed to remove food articles.

b. They shall be thoroughly cleansed in warm water at 120°F (49°C) with soap or

detergent.

c. If running water is not used, the wash-water shall be changed frequently.

SEC. 25. Bactericidal Treatment.—Eating and drinking utensils and equipment, after

thoroughly cleaned, shall be subjected to one of the following bactericidal treatments:

a. Immersion for at least half a minute in clean hot water at temperature of at

least 170°F (77°C);

b. Immersion for at least one minute in a lukewarm chlorine solution 50 ppm;

c. Exposure in a steam cabinet at a temperature of at least 170°F (77°C) for at

least 15 minutes at a temperature of 200°F (90°C) for at least 5 minutes;

d. Exposure in an oven or hot-air cabinet at a temperature of at least 180°F

(82°C) for at least 20 minutes; or

425 | P a g e
 e. Any other method approved by the local health authority.

SEC. 26. Handling of Washed Utensils.—

a. Washed utensils shall be allowed to drain dry in wire racks without use of

drying cloths, or shall be stored in a self-draining position to permit ready air-

drying.

b. The drying cloth on which to store dishes and utensils temporarily after

bactericidal treatment should be cleaned and changed frequently.

SEC. 27. Storage of Washed Utensils.—

a. They shall be stored in a clean and dry place adequately protected against

vermin and other sources of contamination.

b. Cups, bowls, and glasses, shall be inverted for storage.

c. When not stored in closed cupboards or lockers, utensils and containers shall

be covered or inverted whenever practicable. Utensils shall not be stored on

the bottom shelves of open cabinets below the working top level.

d. Racks, trays and shelves shall be made of materials that are impervious,

corrosion-resistant, non-toxic, smooth, durable and resistant to chipping.

e. Drawers shall be made of the same materials and kept clean. Felt-lined

drawers are not acceptable, but the use of clean and removable towels for

lining drawers is acceptable.

SEC. 28. Dry Storage of Non-Perishable Foods.—Non- perishable foods shall be

stored in the following manner:

a. Designated spaces, lockers, cupboards, racks, shelves and containers shall be

used for storage.

426 | P a g e
 b. All spaces, lockers and cupboards shall be constructed of materials of the

same quality as used for food- preparation and food-serving operations.

Containers shall be made of metal fitted with tight covers.

c. The recommended temperature range for dry stores is 50-60°F (10-15°C)

except where dry foods for immediate use are stored in the preparation and

servicing spaces.

SEC. 29. Refrigerated Storage of Perishable Foods.—Perishable foods shall be

stored in the following manner:

a. a. They shall be kept at or below 45°F (7°C) except during preparation or when

held for immediate serving after preparation.

b. When such foods are to be stored for extended periods, a temperature of 40°F

(4°C) is recommended.

c. Fruits and vegetables shall be stored in cool rooms.

d. Recommended temperatures for perishable food storage are:

1. Frozen foods; not more than 10°F (2°C)

2. Meat and fish: 32-38°F (0-3°C)

3. Milk and milk products: 40-45°F (5-7°C)

4. Fruits and vegetables: 44-50°F (7-10°C)

e. All refrigerating compartments and refrigerators must be kept clean, in good

repair and free from odours. They shall be provided with thermometers with

scale divisions not larger than 2°F (1°C). Sufficient shelving shall be provided

to prevent stocking and to permit adequate ventilation and cleaning.

SEC. 30. Food Servicing Operations.—These operations should be in accordance

427 | P a g e
with the following requirements:

a. Hand contacts with food or drink shall be avoided; fingers shall not be used to

serve butter, ice, or similar items of food. Sugar shall be served in covered

dispensers or containers, or in packages wrapped for single service.

b. The surfaces of containers and utensils, including glasses and tablewares,

which come in contact with food and drink shall not be handled.

c. Disposable cups, plates, spoons and other single-service containers and

utensils shall be purchased in sanitary cartons and stored in a clean, dry place

until used. These articles shall be so handled on removal from the carton that

the hand does not touch the surface which will be in contact with food or drink.

d. Clean clothes, napkins, spoons, towels, and other cloth equipment shall be

stored in clean places designated specifically for them. Soiled linens, including

towels, aprons, and coats, shall be stored in a closed bin or locker, suitably

marked.

e. Spoons, spatulas, dippers and scoops used intermittently for dispensing frozen

desserts shall be kept in running water or in water maintained at 170°F (77°C)

and frequently changed, or they may be washed and stored in a dry place after

each use. Constant-temperature bottles and other containers used for potable

water and other beverages shall be kept clean and given effective bactericidal

treatment before and after subsequent use.

SEC. 31. Evaluation of Food Establishment—It shall be the duty of the Provincial,

Municipal or City Health Officer to cause an inspection and evaluation of every food

establishment requiring a permit for its operations, at least every six months and shall

cause as many additional inspections and re-inspections and evaluation to be made

428 | P a g e
as are necessary for the enforcement of the provision of this Chapter.

During the inspection or evaluation carried out at least every six months, the

inspector shall record his findings on an inspection form provided for the purpose and

shall furnish the original of such report to the holder of sanitary permit, the manager

or occupier of the premises. Demerits entered in the appropriate column inspection

forms shall indicate that the item does not, in the opinion of the inspector, comply with

the requirements of this regulation. Within 48 hours of the inspection or evaluation,

the original of the inspection report shall be furnished the holder of the permit

certificate, the manager or occupier of the food establishment. Whenever an

inspection form issued indicates non-compliance items relating to any particular type

of premises, the inspector shall notify the holder of the sanitary permit, the manager

or occupier of the correction to be made and indicate a reasonable period for its

compliance. If upon re-inspection after the deadline the inspector finds the correction

has not been effected he shall forthwith report to the Health Officer and the Health

Officer shall revoke the sanitary permit. A copy of the inspection form and any notices

served shall, in all cases, be filed and kept by the local health authority and be

available at all reasonable time for inspection by an officer of the Department of

Health.

a. Service of Notice.—Whenever an inspection or evaluation report form

indicates non-complying items, the Health Officer of the Province, Municipality

or City may cause to be served on the holder of the permit, the manager or

occupier a notice requiring him, within the time stated in the notice, to take

such remedial action as may be specified therein. In the event within the time

stated in the notice, hereinafter called the first notice, the terms of the first

notice are not complied with, the Health Officer may cause to be served on the

429 | P a g e
 holder of the permit, the manager or occupier a second notice calling on him to

show cause, at a time and place stated in the notice, why the permit issued in

respect of the food establishment should not be revoked.

b. Revocation of Permits.—After prior notice and hearing as provided above, the

Health Officer, if satisfied that the terms of the two notices have not been

complied with or that the failure to comply therewith is not excusable, shall

revoke the said permit.

c. Summary Suspension of Permits.—Whenever the Provincial, Municipal or City

Health Officer finds unsanitary or unhealthy conditions in the operation of food

establishment which in his judgment constitute a substantial hazard to the

public health, the Health Officer may order the immediate suspension of the

permit. Any person to whom such an order is issued written petition shall be

afforded a hearing as soon as possible.

d. Appeals.—The person or panel conducting the hearing may confirm, modify or

reverse the decision appealed from, which decision shall be final.

e. Protection of Food.—Notwithstanding the other provisions of this regulation

relating to the issuance of permits, every person who is engaged in the sale of

food or in the manufacture, preparation, storage, packing or delivery of food for

sale shall protect such food from contamination.

f. Power of Entry.—Any Sanitary Inspector or duly authorized officer of the

Department of Health or of the Provincial, Municipal or City Health Officer,

upon presentation of proper credentials may at all reasonable times enter any

premises engaged in the manufacture, preparation or packing of any article of

food for sale or any premises used for any of the purposes referred to in this

430 | P a g e
 Code for the purpose of inspection or any other action necessary for

administration of this Code.

SEC. 32. Special or "Sari-Sari" Stores

1. No grocery or sari-sari store shall be established within a distance of 25

meters from any source of contamination.

2. All foods which require no further cooking before they are eaten shall be

protected from contamination while in counters or showcases.

b. Bakeries

1. Delivery trucks and carts of bakery products shall always be kept clean

and sanitary.

c. Dairies

1. No dairy shall keep unhealthy or infected cows, carabaos or goats for the

production of milk, or feed them unwholesome food which produces impure or

unwholesome milk.

2. No animals used for the production of milk shall be allowed to graze on land

which has been contaminated by radioactivity.

3. No dairy shall sell unwholesome milk that has not been previously pasteurized

or otherwise sterilized.

d. Ice Plants

1. Only potable water shall be used in the manufacture of ice.

2. In storing and transporting ice intended for public consumption, precautionary

measures shall be taken to protect the ice from sources of contamination.

e. Ambulant Food Vendors

431 | P a g e
 1. These vendors shall sell only bottled food drinks, biscuits and

confectionaries.

2. It is prohibited for food vendors to sell food that requires the use of

utensils.

f. Oyster Beds

1. Oysters shall be planted and grown only in areas approved by the Secretary or

his duly authorized representatives and in places duly licensed by the Bureau

of Fisheries and Aquatic Resources.

2. Oysters offered for sale, if not originating from approved areas, shall be

confiscated and destroyed by the local health authority.

g. Fish Marketing Areas

1. Only fresh and wholesome fish products shall be sold.

2. Fish caught in radioactive zones as well as in areas contaminated by

toxic substances or high in mercury count as determined by the health

authorities shall be condemned and not be allowed for public

consumption.

3. The selling, distribution and buying of fish caught through the use of

explosives and chemicals are prohibited.

SEC. 33. Responsibility of the Local Health Authority.— The local health authority

shall:

a. Make periodic inspections to enforce the maintenance of adequate sanitation

in food establishments and their premises;

b. Take samples of food and drink from any establishments or vendor as often as

necessary to determine if there are unwholesome, adulterated, or

432 | P a g e
 contaminated by radioactivity;

c. Prevent the sale or condemn and destroy food and drinks if these are found

unfit for human consumption;

d. Seal and prohibit the use of devices, utensils, containers, vehicles, machines,

piping and appurtenances if in his opinion they are unsanitary; and

e. Enforce the provisions of this Chapter and the rules and regulations

promulgated by the Secretary.

CHAPTER IV.—MARKETS AND ABATTOIRS

SEC. 34. Prescribed Standards of Construction.—The construction of markets and

abattoirs shall conform to standards prescribed by the Department. These standards

shall be set along the following guidelines:

1. Suitability of site insofar as elimination of nuisance conditions and prevention

of contamination are concerned;

2. Availability of ample water supply for cleaning;

3. Accessibility of adequate drainage facilities;

4. Durability of construction to protect vendors and customers from any hazard

and exposure to the elements; and

5. Facilities for sanitation maintenance, such as cleaning and elimination of

harborages of vermin.

SEC. 35. Responsibility of the Local Health Authority.—

a. On Markets.—

1. Make periodic inspections to ascertain the maintenance of adequate

sanitary conditions of markets and their premises;

433 | P a g e
 2. Supervise and control the proper care and use of market "stalls;

3. Prohibit the construction of living quarters within any market and its

premises;

4. Enforce the ban on construction of partitions, sheds or booths within the

market area.

b. On Abattoirs.—

1. Supervise the maintenance of adequate sanitation in abattoirs and their

premises;

2. Enforce the requirements on the examination of meat as provided in

existing laws;

3. Permit the slaughter of animals for public consumption, in other

designated areas in certain exigencies, provided public health is

adequately protected;

4. Supervise the sanitary disposal of all abattoir wastes; and

5. Ensure that only healthy animals shall be slaughtered, and that the

method of slaughtering, the techniques of dressing and the storing,

handling and transporting procedures are in accordance with prescribed

standards.

SEC. 36. Responsibility of Local Governments and Private Operators—Local

governments and private operators in charge of public or private markets and

abattoirs shall employ an adequate number of personnel to ensure their efficient

operation and hygienic maintenance. These employees shall be under the direct

supervision of the local health authority.

434 | P a g e
CHAPTER VI.—SCHOOL SANITATION AND HEALTH SERVICES

SEC. 40.

Definition of Terms.—As used in this Chapter, the following terms shall mean:

a. School.—An institution of learning which may be public, private or parochial.

b. Special School.—A school which utilizes cadavers, plants, animals, bacterial and

viral cultures for studies and research.

c. Physical Environments.—The school plant, grounds and facilities.

d. Emotional Environment.—Factors which affect the emotional health of students

and members of the faculty.

SEC. 41. The Physical Environment.—In the design and construction of the school plant,

the following factors shall be considered:

435 | P a g e
 a. Site.—Traffic hazards are to be avoided but not to the point of sacrificing

accessibility to public transportation. It shall be distant from sources of

nuisances.

b. Grounds.—The acreage shall be large enough to permit playgrounds, athletic

fields and school gardens.

c. Building.—Preferably it shall be constructed of strong and durable materials and

designed along functional lines. For the prevention of fire hazards, the

requirements of the local fire department shall be observed. Sufficient ventilation

shall be provided. Wall and ceiling finished should be chosen so as to give

optimum lighting with minimum glare. Artificial lighting with louvered flourescent

or incandescent fixtures shall be used to supply a minimum lighting of 25

footcandles in the darkest corner. For flooring, suitable materials shall be used

which will give maximum durability without creating a slippery surface.

d. Sanitary Facilities.—The school population shall be provided with potable water,

sewage and waste disposal systems shall likewise conform to the requirements

prescribed in this Code.

SEC. 42. The Emotional Environment.—For the promotion of emotional health of the

school population the following requirements shall be observed:

a. Suitable Location.—The school site shall be located away from disturbances and

places which give undesirable influence.

b. Recreational Facilities.—The school must have safe and attractive playgrounds

and adequate facilities for suitable sports and games.

c. Rest Rooms.—Facilities shall be provided where faculty members can rest and

get short respite from teaching chores.

436 | P a g e
SEC. 43. Health Services.—Trained personnel and adequate facilities should be available

so that students may be afforded the following health services:

a. Periodic physical and medical examination;

b. Periodic immunization;

c. Medical and dental treatment;

d. Treatment for common emergencies; and

e. Counseling and guidance.

SEC. 44. Requirements for Special Schools.—

a. Cadavers shall be stored in morgues and dissected in dissecting rooms, all of

which shall be constructed and maintained in accordance with standards

prescribed by the Department.

b. Poisonous or harmful plants and animals shall be kept in adequate and secured

areas.

c. Viral and bacterial cultures shall be kept in laboratories under standard security

laboratory measures.

d. Schools utilizing radioactive materials or sources for study or research should

closely conform to the requirements and guidelines given by the Radiation Health

Office and the Philippine Atomic Energy Commission concerning radiation

protection.

CHAPTER VII. INDUSTRIAL HYGIENE

SEC. 45. Sanitary Requirements for Operating an Industrial Establishment.—The following

sanitary requirements shall be applicable to industrial establishments:

437 | P a g e
 a. No person, firm, corporation, or entity shall operate any industrial establishment without first

obtaining a sanitary permit from the Secretary or his duly authorized representatives.

b. Industrial establishments shall be allowed to operate only in places or zones assigned for

the kind of industry by existing zoning laws, ordinances, or policies. The local health

authority shall determine the suitability of location where no zoning law, ordinance or policy

exists.

c. Adequate potable water supply shall be provided to employees.

d. Sewage disposal shall be by means of a municipal or city sewerage system whenever

possible. If no municipal or city sewerage system exists it shall be done in accordance with

the provisions of this Code. Adequate and conveniently located toilet and bath facilities

shall be provided for each sex.

e. All wastes incident to the operation of the industrial plant shall be collected, stored, or

disposed of in a manner to prevent health hazards, nuisances, and pollution. Where a city

or municipal collection and disposal system exists, it should be utilized.

f. An abatement program for the control of vermin shall be maintained.

g. Adequate restrooms and mass halls shall be provided for employees.

h. All places of employment and all workrooms, including machinery and equipment, shall be

kept clean and sanitary.

SEC. 46. Responsibility of the Secretary.—The Secretary shall:

a. Issue a list of maximum concentration of atmospheric contaminants as a guide in

appraising health hazards and in evaluating control measures. The term maximum

concentration as used in this Chapter means the amount of atmospheric contaminant which

can be tolerated by man for continuous daily exposure with non-impairment of health or

well-being either immediate or after a long period of exposure.

b. Review the concentration values at regular intervals to amend or alter the list where

indicated.

438 | P a g e
 c. Specify other concentrations of short intermittent duration capable of causing acute

impairment of health.

d. Require control of other contaminants known or believed to be capable of causing

impairment of health but not included in the list already issued by the Department.

e. Prescribe control measures to eliminate transmission of infection diseases through

processing or handling of industrial products or wastes.

f. Prescribe illumination standard values and order their review at regular intervals to alter or

amend values when indicated.

g. Promulgate measures to effectively and adequately control any possible radioactivity to

which workers may be exposed while on their job.

h. Promulgate control measures to reduce noise and pollution.

SEC. 47. Responsibilities of the Employer and Employees.—The following are the responsibilities

of the employer and employees in industrial establishments:

a. Employer responsibility—

1. Provide, install and maintain in good repair all control measures and protective

equipment;

2. Inform affected employees regarding the nature of the hazards and the reasons for,

and methods of control measures and protective equipment;

3. Make periodical testing of the hearing of all employees in noisy areas of operation;

4. Adopt measures so that the noise produced is within allowable limits so as not to

affect neigh boring offices, buildings or establishments;

5. Request the Department a permit for variation from the requirements when other

means of equivalent protection are provided; and

6. Provide personal protective equipment and/or protective barriers when they are

necessary.

439 | P a g e
 b. Employee responsibility—

1. Observe strictly protective control measures which are prescribed, and

2. Use equipment provided them properly.

SEC. 48. Environmental Provisions.—The environmental provisions enumerated hereunder for the

protection of the health of workers are applicable to all industrial establishments:

a. Control of atmospheric contaminants—

1. Workers shall not be exposed to atmosphere contaminants hazardous to health.

2. Control of atmospheric contaminants shall be accomplished by methods approved

by the Secretary or his duly authorized representatives or other government

authority.

b. Control of infectious agents—

1. Control measures shall be provided to eliminate or control the transmission of

infectious; diseases through processing or handling of industrial products or wastes.

c. Control of possible sources of radiation hazards should be carried out under the

supervision of the Radiation Health Officer or his authorized representative.

d. Noise—

Control measures shall be provided to reduce intensity of noise sufficiently to render it harmless to

workers and to eliminate it at its source as a nuisance by following the recommendations of the

local health or other government authority.

e. Illumination—

1. Adequate lighting shall be provided and distributed in all work areas in amount

required for the type of work or seeing tasks measured by a light-meter with a

minimum of glare and contrasting intensities between work and workroom.

2. Where the specific task requires more light than provided by general illumination,

supplementary lighting shall be supplied.

f. Ventilation—

440 | P a g e
 1. Natural or artificial ventilation shall be provided in all work areas at a rate to insure a

safe and healthful working atmosphere, free from injurious amounts of toxic

materials and reasonably free from offensive odours and dust throughout the

establishment.

2. Proper control measures shall be used to reduce concentration of toxic

contaminants to allowable limits.

3. Air inlets shall be arranged, located and equipped to insure sufficient air velocity and

an exhaust system which shall be located so that discharged materials shall not re-

enter places of employment or habitations nor create any hazard of nuisance.

SEC. 49. Personal Protective Equipment.—The following requirements shall be applicable for

personal protective equipment:

a. Personal protective equipment and/of protective barriers shall be provided whenever

substances, radiations or mechanical irritants are encountered in a manner capable of

causing any pathological change or injury or impairment in function of any part of the body

through skin and/or mucous membrane absorption.

b. Personal protection equipment which shall include respiratory protectors and other

accessories shall be fitted to each exposed worker when necessary.

c. X-ray film badges or pocket desimeters should be worn by workers who, during their course

of work are unavoidably exposed to even a small amount of radiation.

d. Supervisors and employees shall familiarize themselves with the use, proper sanitary care

and storage of this equipment.

SEC. 50. Health Services.—Medical services shall be provided to all employees in accordance

with existing laws and the rules and regulations prescribed by the department.

441 | P a g e
_______________________________________________________________________

CHAPTER IX.—REST AREAS, BUS TERMINALS, BUS STOPS, AND SERVICE

STATIONS

SEC. 54. Rest areas, bus terminals, bus stops and service station areas with one or more

permanent sheds, buildings and service facilities for motor vehicles shall be provided with

Sanitary facilities for the convenience and personal necessities of the travelling public.

a. Rest areas, bus terminals, bus stops and service stations shall be established with

ample area to pre vent overcrowding of motor vehicles and travellers.

b. They shall be provided with adequate ventilation lighting and away from sources of

nuisance.

c. Safe and adequate water supply shall be provided in accordance with the

provisions of Chapter II of this Code.

d. Excreta and sewage collections and disposal shall be provided in accordance with

the provisions of Chapter XVII of this Code.

e. Refuse collection and disposal shall be in accordance with the provisions of

Chapter XVIII of this Code.

f. Comfort rooms—Adequate number of comfort room shall be provided as well as

auxiliary facilities therein in accordance with the provisions of Chapter XVII of this

Code.

442 | P a g e
 g. Waiting sheds for commuters shall be of adequate size to comfortably

accommodate a minimum of thirty (30) persons. Floors shall be of smooth concrete

finish and adequate sitting facilities provided for.

h. Sale of foodstuffs in those establishments shall be done in conformity with the

provisions of Chapter III of this Code.

________________________________________________________________________

CHAPTER XVII.—SEWAGE COLLECTION AND DISPOSAL EXCRETA DISPOSAL

AND DRAINAGE

SEC. 71.

Definition of Terms.—As used in this Chapter, the following terms shall mean.

a. Public sewerage system—A system serving twenty five persons or more.

b. Septic tank—A water tight receptacle which receives the discharge of a plumbing

system or part thereof, and is designed to accomplish the partial removal and

digestion of the suspended solid matter in the sewage through a period of

detention. Its construction shall be in accordance with specifications prescribed

in this Chapter.

c. House sewer—The pipe line conveying sewage from the house or building to the

septic tank or to any point of discharge.

d. Septic tank absorption bed or drain field—An underground system of pipes

leading from the out let of the septic tank, consisting of open-jointed or perforated

443 | P a g e
 pipes so distributed that the effluent from a septic tank is oxidized and absorbed

by the soil.

e. Effective capacity of a septic tank—The actual liquid capacity of a septic tank as

contained below the liquid level line of the tank.

f. Effective depth of a septic tank—The actual liquid depth of a septic tank as

measured from the inside bottom of the septic tank to the liquid level line.

g. Freeboard or air space of a septic tank—The distance as measured from the

liquid level line to the inside top of the septic tank.

h. Distribution box—A small concrete receptacle between the septic tank and the

drain field from which lines of drain tile extends and which acts as surge tank to

distribute the flow of sewage equally to each line of drain tile.

i. Approved excreta disposal facilities shall mean any of the following:

1. Flush toilets properly connected to a community sewer;

2. Flush toilets connected to a septic tank constructed in accordance with

this Chapter;

3. Any approved type pit privy built in accordance with this Chapter; and

4. Any disposal device approved by the Secretary or his duly authorized

representative.

j. Privy—A structure which is not connected to a sewerage system and is used for

the reception, disposition and storage of feces or other excreta from the human

body.

k. Septic privy where the fecal matter is placed in a septic tank containing water

and connected to a drain field but which is not served by a water supply under

pressure.

444 | P a g e
 l. Box and can privy—A privy where fecal matter is deposited in a can bucket

which is removed for emptying and cleaning.

m. Concrete vault privy—A pit privy with the pit lined with concrete in such manner

as to make it water tight.

n. Chemical privy—A privy where fecal matter is deposited into a tank containing a

caustic chemical solution to prevent septic action while the organic matter is

decomposed.

SEC. 72. Scope of Supervision of the Department.—The approval of the Secretary or his

duly authorized representative is required in the following matters:

a. Construction of any approved type of toilet for every house including community

toilet which may be allowed for a group of small houses of light materials or

temporary in nature;

b. Plans of individual sewage disposal system and the sub-surface absorption

system, or other treatment device;

c. Location of any toilet or sewage disposal system in relation to a source of water

supply;

d. Plans, design data and specification of a new or existing sewerage system or

sewage treatment plant;

e. The discharge of untreated effluent of septic tanks and/or sewage treatment

plants to bodies of water;

f. Manufacture of septic tanks and

g. Method of disposal of sludge from septic tanks or ether treatment plants.

445 | P a g e
SEC. 73. Operation of Sewage Treatment Works.—Private or public sewerage systems

shall:

a. Provide laboratory facilities for control tests and other examinations needed;

b. Forward to the local health authority operating data, control tests and such other

records and information as may be required;

c. Inform the local health authority in case of breakdown or improper functioning of

the sewage treatment works; and

d. Provide for the treatment of all sewage entering the treatment plant.

SEC. 74. Requirements in the Operation of Sewerage Works and Sewage Treatment

Plants.—The following are required for sewerage works and sewage treatment plants:

a. All houses covered by the system shall be connected to the sewer in areas

where a sewerage sys tem is available.

b. Outfalls discharging effluent from a treatment plant shall be carried to the

channel of the stream or to deep water where the outlet is discharged.

c. Storm water shall be discharged to a storm sewer, sanitary sewage shall be

discharged to a sewerage system carrying sanitary sewage only; but this should

not prevent the installation of a combined system.

d. Properly designed grease traps shall be provided for sewers from restaurants or

other establishments where the sewage carries a large amount of grease.

SEC. 75. Septic tanks.—Where a public sewerage system is not available, sewer outfalls

from residences, schools, and other buildings shall be discharged into a septic tank to be

constructed in accordance with the following minimum requirements:

446 | P a g e
 a. It shall be generally rectangular in shape. When a number of compartments are

used, the first compartment shall have the capacity from one-half to two-thirds of

the total volume of the tank.

b. It shall be built of concrete, whether pre-cast or poured in place. Brick, concrete

blocks or adobe may be used.

c. It shall not be constructed under any building and within 25 meters from any

source of water supply.

SEC. 76. Disposal of Septic Tank Effluent.—The effluent from septic tanks shall be

discharged into a sub-surface soil, absorption field where applicable or shall be treated

with some type of a purification device. The treated effluent may be discharged into a

stream or body of water if it conforms to the quality standards prescribed by the National

Water and Air Pollution Control Commission.

SEC. 77. Determination of Septic Tank Capacity.—The septic tank capacity may be

determined from the estimated unit flow contained in Table I "Quantities of Sewage Flow,"

based on adequate detention time interval resulting in efficient sedimentation. Daily flow

from mattered results, may be used as estimated flow when available. For edifices with

occupants, the number of persons to be served shall be computed on the number of

rooms with each room considered as occupied by two persons or on the basis of the

actual number of persons served by the tank, whichever is greater.

SEC 78. Sanitary Privies.—The privy recommended for use is the sanitary privy. It shall

conform with the following minimum requirements:

447 | P a g e
 a. It shall consists of an earthen pit, a floor covering the pit, and a water-sealed

bowl. It shall be so constructed in order that fecal matter and urine will be

deposited into the earthen pit which shall be completely fly-proof.

b. The pit shall be at least one meter square.

c. The floor should cover the pit tightly to prevent the entrance of flies. It shall be

constructed of concrete or other impervious material.

d. The water-sealed bowl shall be joined to the floor so as to form a water-tight and

insect proof joint.

e. A suitable building, shall be constructed to provide comfort and privacy for the

users of the privy.

f. Wooden floors and seat risers shall not be used.

SEC. 79. Drainage.—

a. Responsibility of cities and municipalities.—It shall be the responsibility of all

cities and municipalities to provide and maintain in a sanitary state and in good

repair a satisfactory system of drainage in all inhabited areas where waste water

from buildings and premises could empty without causing nuisance to the

community and danger to public health.

b. Connection to the municipal drainage system.— Buildings or premises producing

waste water shall be connected to the municipal drainage system in all areas

where it exists.

SEC. 80. Special Precaution for Radioactive Excreta and Urine of Hospitalized Patient.—

448 | P a g e
 a. Patients given high doses of radioactive isotope for therapy should be given toilet

facilities separate from those used by "non-radioactive" patients.

b. Radioactive patients should be instructed to use the same toilet bowl at all times

and to flush it at least 3 times after its use.

_______________________________________________________________________

CHAPTER XVIII.—REFUSE DISPOSAL

SEC. 81. Definition of Terms.—As used in this Chapter, refuse is an inclusive term for all

solid waste products consisting of garbage, rabbish, ashes, night soil, manure, dead

animate, street sweepings and industrial wastes.

SEC. 82. Responsibility of Cities and Municipalities.— Cities and municipalities shall

provide an adequate and efficient system of collecting, transporting and disposing refuse

in their areas of jurisdiction in a manner approved by the local health authority.

SEC. 83. Additional Requirements.—

a. Occupants of buildings and residences shall provide a sufficient number of

receptacles for refuse. Re fuse in receptacles shall be protected against vermin

and other animals.

b. Refuse shall be disposed through a municipal collection service. If this service is

not available, disposal shall be by incineration, burying, sanitary landfill or any

method approved by the local health authority.

c. Refuse shall not be thrown in any street, sidewalk, yard, park or any body of

water. It shall be stored in a suitable container while awaiting its final disposal.
449 | P a g e
 d. Streets shall be kept clean by occupants or owners of properties lining the street

from the line of the property to the middle of the street and from one property to

the other.

e. Parks, plazas and streets adjacent to public buildings shall be kept clean by the

local government concerned.

_______________________________________________________________________

CHAPTER XX.—POLLUTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT

SEC. 87. General Provisions.—For the purpose of this Chapter, the provisions of Republic

Act No. 3931, the rules and regulations of the National Water and Air Pollution Control

Commission promulgated in accordance with the provisions of Section 6(a) 2 of the said

Act, the provisions of Presidential Decree No. 480, and the rules and regulations of the

Radiation Health. Office of the Department of Health shall be applied and enforced.

SEC. 88. Authority of the Secretary.—The Secretary is authorized to promulgate rules and

regulations for the control and prevention of the following types of pollution:

a. Pollution of pesticides and heavy metals;

b. Pollution of food caused by chemicals, biological agents, radioactive materials, and

excessive or improper use of food additives;

c. Non-ionizing radiation caused by electronic products such as laser beams or

microwaves;

d. Noise pollution caused by industry, land and air transport and building construction;
450 | P a g e
 e. Biological pollutants including the causative agents of intestinal infections;

f. Pollution of agricultural products through the use of chemical fertilizers and plant

pesticides containing toxic chemical substances and unsanitary agricultural

practices; and

g. Any other type of pollution which is not covered by the provisions of Republic Act

3931, the Rules and Regulations of the National Water and Air Pollution Control

Commission, the provisions of Presidential Decree No. 480 and the rules and

regulations of the Radiation Health Office of the Department of Health which is likely

to affect community health adversely.

________________________________________________________________________

CHAPTER XXI.—DISPOSAL OF DEAD PERSONS

SEC. 89.

Definition.—As used in this Chapter, the following terms shall mean:

a. Burial grounds—cemetery, memorial park of any place duly authorized by law for

permanent disposal of the dead.

b. Embalming—preparing, disinfecting and preserving a dead body for its final

disposal.

c. Embalmer—a person who practices embalming.

d. Undertaking—the care, transport and disposal of the body of a deceased person

by any means other than embalming.

451 | P a g e
 e. Undertaker—person who practices undertaking.

f. Funeral establishment—any place used in the preparation and care of the body

of a deceased person for burial.

g. Remains—the body of a dead person.

h. Burial—Interment of remains in a grave, tomb or the sea.

i. Disinterment—the removal or exhumation of remains from places of interment.

SEC. 90. Burial Grounds Requirements.—the following requirements shall be applied and

enforced:

a. It shall be unlawful for any person to bury remains in places other than those

legally authorized in conformity with the provisions of this Chapter.

b. A burial ground shall at least be 25 meters distant from any dwelling house and

no house shall be constructed within the same distance from any burial ground.

c. No burial ground shall be located within 50 meters from either side of a river or

within 50 meters from any source of water supply.

SEC. 91. Burial Requirements.—The burial of remains is subject to the following

requirements:

a. No remains shall be buried without a dead certificate. This certificate shall be

issued by the attending physician. If there has been no physician in attendance,

it shall be issued by the mayor, the secretary of the municipal board, or a

councilor of the municipality where the death occurred. The death certificate shall

be forwarded to the local civil register within 48 hours after death.

b. Shipment of remains abroad shall be governed by the rules and regulations of

the Bureau of Quarantine.

452 | P a g e
 c. Graves where remains are buried shall be at least one and one-half meters deep

and filled well and firmly.

d. The cost of burial of a dead person shall be borne by the nearest kin. If the kin is

not financially capable of defraying the expenses or if the de ceased had no kin,

the cost shall be borne by the city or municipal government.

e. The burial of remains in city or municipal burial grounds shall not be prohibited

on account of race, nationality, religion or political persuasion.

f. If the person who issues a death certificate has reasons to believe or suspect

that the cause of death was due to violence or crime, he shall notify immediately

the local authorities concerned. In this case the deceased shall not be buried

until a permission is obtained from the provincial or city fiscal. If these officials

are not available the permission shall be obtained from any government official

authorized by law.

g. Except when required by legal investigation or when permitted by the local health

authority, no unembalmed remains shall remain unburied longer than 48 hours

after death.

h. When the cause of death is a dangerous communicable disease, the remains

shall be buried within 12 hours after death. They shall not be taken to any place

of public assembly. Only the adult members of the family of the deceased may

be permitted to attend the funeral.

SEC. 92. Disinterment Requirements.—Disinterment of remains is subject to the following

requirements:

a. Permission to disinter remains of persons who died of non-dangerous

communicable diseases may be granted after a burial period of three years.

453 | P a g e
 b. Permission to disinter remains of persons who died of dangerous communicable

diseases may be granted after a burial period of five years.

c. Disinterment of remains covered in paragraphs "a" and "b" of this Section may

be permitted within a shorter time than that prescribed in special cases, subject

to the approval of the Regional Director concerned or his duly authorized

representative.

d. In all cases of disinterment, the remains shall be disinfected and placed in a

durable and sealed container prior to their final disposal.

SEC. 93. Funeral and Embalming Establishments.— These establishments are subject to

the following requirements:

a. Scope of inclusion—for the purposes of this Section, requirements prescribed

herein shall be applied and enforced to funeral chapels, embalming

establishments and morgues.

b. Sanitary permit—No establishment mentioned in the preceding paragraph shall

be operated with out a sanitary permit issued by the Secretary or his duly

authorized representative. This permit shall be revoked in case of any violation of

the provisions of this Chapter and the rules and regulations promulgated by the

Secretary.

c. Classification—Funeral establishment shall be classified in three (3) categories

which are described as follows:

1. Category I.—Establishments with chapels, and embalming facilities and

offering funeral services.

2. Category II.—Establishments with chapels and offering funeral services

but without embalming facilities.

454 | P a g e
 3. Category III.—Establishments offering only funeral services from the

house of the deceased to the burial ground.

d. Sanitary requirements—

For funeral chapels.—The requirements prescribed for places of public assembly in this

Code shall be applied.

For embalming and dressing rooms.—

1. They should be constructed of concrete or semi- concrete materials with

sufficient space to accommodate five bodies at one time.

2. The floors and walls shall be made of concrete or other durable impervious

materials.

3. Ventilation and lighting should be adequately provided.

4. Embalming shall be performed on a table made of a single marble slab or other

equally impervious materials. It shall be so constructed that all washings and

body fluids shall flow to a drain connected to the waste piping system of the

building.

5. Embalming and assistants shall use rubber gloves when working.

6. Washing facilities with soaps, detergents and germicidal solutions shall be

provided for use of the working personnel.

SEC. 94. Licensing and Registration Procedures.—The licensing and registration of

undertakers and embalmers are subject to the following requirements:

455 | P a g e
 a. Issuance of license to practice—

1. Any person who desires to practice undertaking or embalming shall be

licensed to practice only after passing an examination conducted by the

Department.

2. Licensed undertakers or embalmers shall practice undertaking or

embalming in accordance with requirements prescribed by the

Department

3. Licensed undertakers or embalmers shall display their licenses

conspicuously in the establishments where they work.

b. Issuance of certificates of registration—

1. An undertaker or embalmer shall apply annually for a registration

certificates and pay an annual registration fee of twenty-five pesos to

the Regional Health Office concerned.

2. The first registration certificate issued shall cover the period from the

date of issuance to the last day of the current year. Subsequent

certificates shall bear the date of January 1 of the year of issue and

shall expire December 31 of the same year.

3. Certificates of registration shall be posed conspicuously in

establishments concerned.

c. Exemption—Government and private physicians may perform embalming

without license and registration certificates as exigencies require.

456 | P a g e
SEC. 95. Autopsy and Dissection of Remains.—The autopsy and dissections of remains

are subject to the following requirements:

a. Persons authorized to perform these are:

1. Health officers;

2. Medical officers of law enforcement agencies; and

3. Members of the medical staff of accredited hospitals.

b. Autopsies shall be performed in the following cases:

1. Whenever required by special laws;

2. Upon orders of a competent court, a mayor and a provincial or city

fiscal;

3. Upon written request of police authorities;

4. Whenever the Solicitor General, provincial or city fiscal as authorized

by existing laws, shall deem it necessary to disinter and take

possession of remains for examination to determine the cause of death;

and

5. Whenever the nearest kin shall request in writing the authorities

concerned to ascertain the cause of death.

c. Autopsies may be performed on patients who die in accredited hospitals subject

to the following requirements:

1. The Director of the hospital shall notify the next of kin of the death of

the deceased and request permission to perform an autopsy.

2. Autopsy can be performed when the permission is granted or no

objection is raised to such autopsy within 48 hours after death.

457 | P a g e
 3. In cases where the deceased has no next of kin, the permission shall

be secured from the local health authority.

d. Burial of remains after autopsy—After an autopsy, the remains shall be interred

in accordance with the provisions in this Chapter.

SEC. 96. Donation of Human Organs for Medical, Surgical and Scientific purposes.—Any

person may donate an organ or any part of his body to a person, a physician, a scientist, a

hospital or a scientific institution upon his death for transplant, medical, or research

purposes subject to the following requirements:

a. The donation shall authorized in writing by the donor specifying the recipient, the

organ or part of his body to be donated and the specific purpose for which it will

be utilized.

b. A married person may make such donation with out the consent of his spouse.

c. After the death of a person the next of kin may authorize the donation of an

organ or any part of the body of the deceased for similar purposes in accordance

with the prescribed procedure.

d. If the deceased has no next of kin and his remains are in the custody of an

accredited hospitals, the Director of the Hospital may donate an organ or any

part of the body of the deceased in accordance with the requirement prescribed

in this Section.

e. A simple written authorization signed by the donor in the presence of two

witnesses shall be deemed sufficient for the donation of organs or parts of the

human body required in this Section, notwithstanding the provisions of the Civil

Code of the Philippines on matters of donation. A copy of the written

authorization shall be forwarded to the Secretary.

458 | P a g e
 f. Any authorization granted in accordance with the requirements of this Section is

binding to the executors, administrators, and members of the family of the

deceased.

SEC. 97. Use of Remains for Medical Studies and Scientific Research.—Unclaimed

remains may be used by medical schools and scientific institutions for studies and

research subject to the rules and regulations prescribed by the Department.

SEC. 98. Special Precautions for Safe Handling of Cadavers Containing Radioactive

Isotopes.—

a. Cadavers containing only traces (very small dose) of radioactive isotope do not

require any special handling precautions.

b. Cadavers containing large amounts of radioactive isotopes should be labeled

properly identifying the type and amount of radioactive isotopes present and the

date of its administration.

c. Before autopsy is performed, the Radiation Health Officer or his duly authorized

representative should be notified for proper advice. The pathologist and/or

embalmer should be warned accordingly of the radioactivity of the cadaver so

that radiation precautions can be properly enforced.

d. Normal burial procedures, rules and regulations may be carried out on the above

mentioned cadavers provided that their amount of radioactivity has decayed to a

safe level which will be determined by the Radiation Health Officer or his

authorized representative.

e. Cremation—If cremation is performed without autopsy, there is no handling

problem; other wise, autopsy precautions should be strictly enforced.

Precautions should be taken to prevent any possible concentration of

radioactivity at the base of the stack of the crematorium.

459 | P a g e
SEC. 99. Responsibility of the Regional Director.—The Regional Director shall:

a. Act on applications for the establishment of burial grounds; and

b. Close any burial ground which is a menace to public health.

SEC. 100. Responsibility of the Local Health Authority.—The local health authority shall:

a. Administer city or municipal cemeteries;

b. Issue permits to inter, disinter or transfer remains;

c. Apply prescribed measures when cause of death is due to a dangerous

communicable disease.

d. Keep records of death occurring within his area of jurisdiction; and

e. Authorize the delivery of unclaimed remains to medical schools and scientific

institutions for purposes specified in this Chapter and in accordance with the

rules and regulations of the Department.

SEC. 101. Responsibility of Local Government.—Local governments shall:

a. Reserve appropriate tracts of land under their jurisdiction, for cemeteries subject

to approval of Regional Directors concerned;

b. Utilize judiciously grants, gifts, bequests of property or financial donations for the

establishment or improvement of cemeteries; and

c. Close cemeteries under their jurisdiction subject to approval of the Regional

Director.

SEC. 102. Penal Provisions.—

460 | P a g e
 a. The Secretary or his duly authorized representative may revoke or suspend the

license of an undertaker or embalmer who violates any provisions of this Chapter

or the rules and regulations promulgated by the Secretary under this Chapter.

b. Any person who shall engage in the business of undertaking or embalming in

violation of any provision of this Chapter shall be liable to a penalty of not more

than one thousand pesos for each violation.

c. Each day or any part thereof during which any prohibited business or practice is

continued shall be deemed a separate violation and subject to the same penalty

prescribed in the preceding paragraph.

CHAPTER XXII.—FINAL PROVISIONS

SEC. 103.—Penal Provisions.—

a. Unless otherwise provided in any Chapter or section in this Code, any person

who shall violate disobey, refuse, omit or neglect to comply with any of the rules

and regulations promulgated under this Code shall be guilty of misdemeanor and

upon conviction shall be punished by imprisonment for a period not exceeding

six months or by a fine of not exceeding one thousand pesos or both depending

upon the discretion of the court.

b. Any person who shall interfere with or hinder, or oppose any officer, agent or

member of the Department or of the bureaus and offices under it, in the

performance of his duty as such under this Code, or shall tear down, mutilate,

deface or alter any placard, or notice, affixed to the premises in the enforcement

of the Code, shall be guilty of a misdemeanor and punishable upon conviction by

461 | P a g e
 imprisonment for a period not exceeding six months or by a fine of not exceeding

one thousand pesos or both depending upon the discretion of the Court.

SEC. 104. Separability Clause.—In the event that any section, paragraph, sentence,

clause, or word of this Code is declared invalid for any reason, other provisions thereof

shall not be affected thereby.

SEC. 105. Repealing Clause.—All laws, as well as pertinent rules and regulations thereof

which are inconsistent with the provisions of this Code are hereby repealed or amended

accordingly.

SEC. 106. Effectivity.—This Code is hereby made part of the law of the land and shall take

effect immediately.

462 | P a g e
463 | P a g e
USER’S PROFILE

SUMMARY DATA

Type municipality

Island group Luzon

Region CALABARZON (Region IV-A)

Province Cavite

Barangay count 36

Postal code 4122

Coastal/Landlocked landlocked

Marine waterbodies none (landlocked)

Philippine major island(s) Luzon

Area (2013) 74.90 km2 (28.92 sq mi)

Population (2020) 68,699

Density (2020) 917 / km2 (2,375 / sq mi)

Coordinates 14° 12' North, 120° 53' East (14.1954, 120.8773)

Estimated elevation above sea level299.5 meters (982.3 feet)

Households

The household population of Indang in the 2015 Census was 65,419 broken down

into 15,016 households or an average of 4.36 members per household.

464 | P a g e
Population by age group

According to the 2015 Census, the age group with the highest population in Indang

is 15 to 19, with 6,234 individuals. Conversely, the age group with the lowest population

is 75 to 79, with 778 individuals.

details

Combining age groups together, those aged 14 and below, consisting of the young

dependent population which include infants/babies, children and young

adolescents/teenagers, make up an aggregate of 26.55% (17,419). Those aged 15 up to

64, roughly, the economically active population and actual or potential members of the

work force, constitute a total of 67.08% (44,006). Finally, old dependent population

consisting of the senior citizens, those aged 65 and over, total 6.36% (4,174) in all.

The computed Age Dependency Ratios mean that among the population of Indang,

there are 40 youth dependents to every 100 of the working age population; there are 9
465 | P a g e
aged/senior citizens to every 100 of the working population; and overall, there are 49

dependents (young and old-age) to every 100 of the working population.

The median age of 28 indicates that half of the entire population of Indang are aged

less than 28 and the other half are over the age of 28.

Historical population

The population of Indang grew from 11,526 in 1903 to 68,699 in 2020, an increase

of 57,173 people over the course of 117 years. The latest census figures in 2020 denote a

466 | P a g e
positive growth rate of 0.98%, or an increase of 3,100 people, from the previous population

of 65,599 in 2015.

467 | P a g e
Barangays in Indang Cavite

468 | P a g e
Users and their roles

469 | P a g e
Patients ( People in Indang )
 Role: Receives medical care and treatment for illnesses or injuries.

Healthcare Providers
 Role: Includes physicians (doctors), nurses, and allied health professionals

who deliver medical care, treatment, and support to patients.

Administrative Staff
 Role: Manages the day-to-day operations of the hospital, including

administrative tasks, scheduling, and financial aspects.

Hospital Management and Executives

 Role: Sets overall hospital strategy, oversees management, and ensures the

hospital's adherence to regulations.

Support Staff
 Role: Includes roles such as receptionists, clerks, and janitorial staff who

contribute to the smooth running of the hospital.

Information Technology (IT) Staff

 Role: Manages and maintains the hospital's information systems, electronic

health records (EHRs), and other technology infrastructure.

Medical Laboratory Technologists

 Role: Conducts tests and analyzes samples to assist in the diagnosis and

treatment of patients.

Pharmacists
 Role: Dispenses medications, provides drug information, and ensures the

safe and effective use of medications.

Radiologic Technologists
 Role: Operates medical imaging equipment, such as X-ray machines, CT

scanners, and MRIs, to produce diagnostic images.

470 | P a g e
Physical Therapists
 Role: Assists patients in regaining mobility and functionality through physical

therapy.

Occupational Therapists
 Role: Helps patients develop or regain the skills needed for daily living and

working through occupational therapy.

Patient Advocates
 Role: Supports patients in navigating the healthcare system, addressing

concerns, and ensuring their rights are protected.

Social Workers
 Role: Provides support and resources for patients and families, addressing

social and emotional needs.

Quality Assurance and Compliance Officers

 Role: Ensures that the hospital complies with regulatory standards and

maintains high-quality patient care.

Security Personnel
 Role: Maintains a secure and safe environment within the hospital premises.

Biomedical Engineers
 Role: Manages and maintains medical equipment to ensure proper

functioning and safety.

Hospital Chaplains
 Role: Offers spiritual and emotional support to patients, families, and hospital

staff.

Dietitians
 Role: Plans and oversees nutrition programs for patients based on their

medical conditions.
471 | P a g e
Volunteers
 Role: Contribute their time and skills to assist in various areas of the

hospital, providing additional support to patients and staff.

472 | P a g e
473 | P a g e
DESIGN CRITERIA FOR THE COMPLEX AND MID RISE TOWER: GUIDELINES IN
THE PLANNING AND DESIGN OF A HOSPITAL AND OTHER HEALTH
FACILITIES

A hospital and other health facilities shall be planned and designed to observe

appropriate architectural practices, to meet prescribed functional programs, and

to conform to applicable codes as part of normal professional practice. References

shall be made to the following:

 P. D. 1096 – National Building Code of the Philippines and Its

Implementing Rules and Regulations

 P. D. 1185 – Fire Code of the Philippines and Its Implementing

Rules and Regulations

 P. D. 856 – Code on Sanitation of the Philippines and Its Implementing

Rules and Regulations

 B. P. 344 – Accessibility Law and Its Implementing Rules and Regulations

 R. A. 1378 – National Plumbing Code of the Philippines and Its

Implementing Rules and Regulations

 R. A. 184 – Philippine Electrical Code

 Manual on Technical Guidelines for Hospitals and Health Facilities

Planning and Design. Department of Health, Manila. 1994

 Signage Systems Manual for Hospitals and Offices. Department of

Health, Manila. 1994

 Health Facilities Maintenance Manual. Department of Health, Manila.

1995

474 | P a g e
  Manual on Hospital Waste Management. Department of Health, Manila.

1997

 District Hospitals: Guidelines for Development. World Health

Organization Regional Publications, Western Pacific Series. 1992

 Guidelines for Construction and Equipment of Hospital and Medical

Facilities.

American Institute of Architects, Committee on Architecture for Health.

1992

 De Chiara, Joseph. Time-Saver Standards for Building Types. McGraw-

Hill Book Company. 1980

What to consider on planning a tertiary hospital

1 Environment: A hospital and other health facilities shall be so located that it is

readily accessible to the community and reasonably free from undue noise,

smoke, dust, foul odor, flood, and shall not be located adjacent to railroads,

freight yards, children's playgrounds, airports, industrial plants, disposal plants.

2 Occupancy: A building designed for other purpose shall not be converted

into a hospital. The location of a hospital shall comply with all local zoning

ordinances.

3 Safety: A hospital and other health facilities shall provide and maintain a safe

environment for patients, personnel and public. The building shall be of

such construction so that no hazards to the life and safety of patients,

personnel and public exist. It shall be capable of withstanding weight and

475 | P a g e
 elements to which they may be subjected.

3.1 Exits shall be restricted to the following types: door leading directly

outside the building, interior stair, ramp, and exterior stair.

3.2 A minimum of two (2) exits, remote from each other, shall be provided

for each floor of the building.

3.3 Exits shall terminate directly at an open space to the outside of the

building.

4 Security: A hospital and other health facilities shall ensure the security of

person and property within the facility.

5 Patient Movement: Spaces shall be wide enough for free movement of

patients, whether they are on beds, stretchers, or wheelchairs. Circulation

routes for transferring patients from one area to another shall be available and

free at all times.

5.1 Corridors for access by patient and equipment shall have a minimum

width of 2.44 meters.

5.2 Corridors in areas not commonly used for bed, stretcher and

equipment transport may be reduced in width to 1.83 meters.

5.3 A ramp or elevator shall be provided for ancillary, clinical and

nursing areas located on the upper floor.

476 | P a g e
 5.4 A ramp shall be provided as access to the entrance of the hospital

not on the same level of the site.

6 Lighting: All areas in a hospital and other health facilities shall be provided

with sufficient illumination to promote comfort, healing and recovery of

patients and to enable personnel in the performance of work.

7 Ventilation: Adequate ventilation shall be provided to ensure comfort of

patients, personnel and public.

8 Auditory and Visual Privacy: A hospital and other health facilities shall observe

acceptable sound level and adequate visual seclusion to achieve the acoustical

and privacy requirements in designated areas allowing the unhampered

conduct of activities.

9 Water Supply: A hospital and other health facilities shall use an approved

public water supply system whenever available. The water supply shall be

potable, safe for drinking and adequate, and shall be brought into the building

free of cross connections.

10 Waste Disposal: Liquid waste shall be discharged into an approved public

sewerage system whenever available, and solid waste shall be collected,

treated and disposed of in accordance with applicable codes, laws or

ordinances.

477 | P a g e
 11 Sanitation: Utilities for the maintenance of sanitary system, including approved

water supply and sewerage system, shall be provided through the buildings

and premises to ensure a clean and healthy environment.

478 | P a g e
 12 Housekeeping: A hospital and other health facilities shall provide and

maintain a healthy and aesthetic environment for patients, personnel and

public.

13 Maintenance: There shall be an effective building maintenance program in

place. The buildings and equipment shall be kept in a state of good repair.

Proper maintenance shall be provided to prevent untimely breakdown of

buildings and equipment.

14 Material Specification: Floors, walls and ceilings shall be of sturdy materials

that shall allow durability, ease of cleaning and fire resistance.

15 Segregation: Wards shall observe segregation of sexes. Separate toilet shall

be maintained for patients and personnel, male and female, with a ratio of one

(1) toilet for every eight (8) patients or personnel.

16 Fire Protection: There shall be measures for detecting fire such as fire alarms

in walls, peepholes in doors or smoke detectors in ceilings. There shall be

devices for quenching fire such as fire extinguishers or fire hoses that are

easily visible and accessible in strategic areas.

17 Signage. There shall be an effective graphic system composed of a

number of individual visual aids and devices arranged to provide information,

orientation, direction, identification, prohibition, warning and official notice

considered essential to the optimum operation of a hospital and other health

facilities.
479 | P a g e
 18 Parking. A hospital and other health facilities shall provide a minimum of

one (1) parking space for every twenty-five (25) beds.

19 Zoning: The different areas of a hospital shall be grouped according to

zones as follows:

19.1 Outer Zone – areas that are immediately accessible to the public:

emergency service, outpatient service, and administrative service.

They shall be located near the entrance of the hospital.

19.2 Second Zone – areas that receive workload from the outer zone:

laboratory, pharmacy, and radiology. They shall be located near the

outer zone.

19.3 Inner Zone – areas that provide nursing care and management of

patients: nursing service. They shall be located in private areas but

accessible to guests.

19.4 Deep Zone – areas that require asepsis to perform the prescribed

services: surgical service, delivery service, nursery, and intensive care.

They shall be segregated from the public areas but accessible to the

outer, second and inner zones.

480 | P a g e
 19.5 Service Zone – areas that provide support to hospital activities: dietary

service, housekeeping service, maintenance and motorpool service, and

mortuary. They shall be located in areas away from normal traffic.

20 Function: The different areas of a hospital shall be functionally related with

each other.

20.1 The emergency service shall be located in the ground floor to ensure

immediate access. A separate entrance to the emergency room shall be

provided.

20.2 The administrative service, particularly admitting office and business

office, shall be located near the main entrance of the hospital. Offices for

hospital management can be located in private areas.

20.3 The surgical service shall be located and arranged to prevent non-

related traffic. The operating room shall be as remote as practicable

from the entrance to provide asepsis. The dressing room shall be

located to avoid exposure to dirty areas after changing to surgical

garments. The nurse station shall be located to permit visual observation

of patient movement.

20.4 The delivery service shall be located and arranged to prevent non-

related traffic. The delivery room shall be as remote as practicable from

the entrance to provide asepsis. The dressing room shall be located to

avoid exposure to dirty areas after changing to surgical garments. The

481 | P a g e
 nurse station shall be located to permit visual observation of patient

movement. The nursery shall be separate but immediately accessible

from the delivery room.

20.5 The nursing service shall be segregated from public areas. The

nurse station shall be located to permit visual observation of patients.

Nurse stations shall be provided in all inpatient units of the hospital with

a ratio of at least one (1) nurse station for every thirty-five (35) beds.

Rooms and wards shall be of sufficient size to allow for work flow and

patient movement. Toilets shall be immediately accessible from rooms

and wards.

20.6 The dietary service shall be away from morgue with at least 25-meter

distance.

21 Space: Adequate area shall be provided for the people, activity, furniture,

equipment and utility.

Space Area in Square Meters

Administrative Service
Lobby
Waiting Area 0.65/person
Information and Reception Area 5.02/staff
Toilet 1.67
Business Office 5.02/staff
Medical Records 5.02/staff

482 | P a g e
 Space Area in Square Meters
Office of the Chief of Hospital 5.02/staff
Laundry and Linen Area 5.02/staff
Maintenance and Housekeeping Area 5.02/staff
Parking Area for Transport Vehicle 9.29
Supply Room 5.02/staff
Waste Holding Room 4.65
Dietary
Dietitian Area 5.02/staff
Supply Receiving Area 4.65
Cold and Dry Storage Area 4.65
Food Preparation Area 4.65
Cooking and Baking Area 4.65
Serving and Food Assembly Area 4.65
Washing Area 4.65
Garbage Disposal Area 1.67
Dining Area 1.40/person
Toilet 1.67
Cadaver Holding Room 7.43/bed
Clinical Service
Emergency Room
Waiting Area 0.65/person
Toilet 1.67
Nurse Station 5.02/staff
Examination and Treatment Area with Lavatory/Sink 7.43/bed
Observation Area 7.43/bed
Equipment and Supply Storage Area 4.65
Wheeled Stretcher Area 1.08/stretcher
Outpatient Department
Waiting Area 0.65/person
Toilet 1.67
Admitting and Records Area 5.02/staff
Examination and Treatment Area with Lavatory/Sink 7.43/bed
Consultation Area 5.02/staff
Surgical and Obstetrical Service
Major Operating Room 33.45
Delivery Room 33.45
Sub-sterilizing Area 4.65
Sterile Instrument, Supply and Storage Area 4.65
Scrub-up Area 4.65
Clean-up Area 4.65
Dressing Room 2.32
Toilet 1.67
Nurse Station 5.02/staff
Wheeled Stretcher Area 1.08/stretcher
Janitor’s Closet 3.90

483 | P a g e
 Space Area in Square Meters
Nursing Unit
Semi-Private Room with Toilet 7.43/bed
Patient Room 7.43/bed
Toilet 1.67
Isolation Room with Toilet 9.29
Nurse Station 5.02/staff
Treatment and Medication Area with 7.43/bed
Lavatory/Sink
Central Sterilizing and Supply Room
Receiving and Releasing Area 5.02/staff
Work Area 5.02/staff
Sterilizing Room 4.65
Sterile Supply Storage Area 4.65
Nursing Service
Office of the Chief Nurse 5.02/staff
Ancillary Service
Primary Clinical Laboratory
Clinical Work Area with Lavatory/Sink 10.00
Pathologist Area 5.02/staff
Toilet 1.67
Radiology
X – Ray Room with Control Booth, Dressing Area 14.00
and Toilet
Dark Room 4.65
Film File and Storage Area 4.65
Radiologist Area 5.02/staff
Pharmacy 15.00

Notes:

1. 0.65/person – Unit area per person occupying the space at one time

2. 5.02/staff – Work area per staff that includes space for one (1) desk and

one (1) chair, space for occasional visitor, and space for aisle

3. 1.40/person – Unit area per person occupying the space at one time

4. 7.43/bed – Clear floor area per bed that includes space for one (1) bed,

484 | P a g e
 space for occasional visitor, and space for passage of equipment

5. 1.08/stretcher – Clear floor area per stretcher that includes space for one (1)

stretcher

485 | P a g e
CONSIDERATIONS IN DESIGNING A TERTIARY HOSPITAL

Designing a Tertiary Hospital requires careful consideration of various factors to ensure

functionality, efficiency, and safety. Here are some key design criteria to guide the

planning process:

Site Selection and Layout:

a. Accessibility: Choose a location with good accessibility for both patients and

medical students, considering proximity to transportation hubs and major roads.

b. Land Use Planning: Optimize land use by allocating space for hospital facilities,

medical school buildings, and the mid-rise tower while allowing for future expansion.

c. Green Spaces: Incorporate green spaces and landscaping to provide a healing

environment and promote well-being.

Functional Zoning:

a. Separation of Functions: Clearly define and separate zones for hospital

operations, medical school classrooms, laboratories, and administrative spaces.

b. Patient Flow: Design patient-friendly pathways, ensuring a logical and efficient

flow from admission to discharge.

Hospital Facilities Design:

a. Specialized Departments: Design specialized areas for various medical

departments, such as emergency rooms, surgery suites, imaging facilities, and

486 | P a g e
 patient wards.

b. Infection Control Measures: Implement design features that facilitate infection

control, including well-ventilated spaces, appropriate room layouts, and easy-to-

clean surfaces.

c. Patient-Centered Design: Prioritize patient comfort and experience with well-

designed waiting areas, private rooms, and spaces for family support.

Medical School Facilities:

a. Lecture Halls and Classrooms: Create flexible and technologically equipped

lecture halls and classrooms to accommodate various teaching methods.

b. Laboratories: Design state-of-the-art laboratories for medical research and

practical training, considering safety and equipment requirements.

c. Simulation Centers: Include simulation centers for hands-on medical training,

offering realistic scenarios for students.

Mid-Rise Tower Design:

a. Vertical Circulation: Plan for efficient vertical circulation through well-placed

elevators and stairwells to connect different floors seamlessly.

b. Mixed-Use Spaces: Integrate mixed-use spaces in the tower, such as

administrative offices, conference rooms, and communal areas.

c. Natural Lighting: Maximize natural light penetration through well-designed

windows, promoting a healthy and comfortable indoor environment.

487 | P a g e
Energy Efficiency and Sustainability:

a. Green Building Standards: Design the entire complex to meet or exceed green

building standards, incorporating energy-efficient systems, sustainable materials,

and renewable energy sources.

b. Waste Management: Integrate waste management systems to minimize the

environmental impact of hospital and educational activities.

Safety and Security:

a. Emergency Evacuation Planning: Develop comprehensive emergency

evacuation plans and design features to ensure the safety of patients, staff, and

students.

b. Security Measures: Implement advanced security systems, including

surveillance cameras, access control, and emergency response protocols.

Technology Integration:

a. Health Information Systems: Integrate electronic health records (EHR) systems

to enhance patient care and streamline administrative processes.

b. Smart Building Technologies: Utilize smart building technologies for energy

management, security, and maintenance.

Sustainability and Resilience:

a. Resilient Infrastructure: Design the complex with resilience in mind, considering

potential climate challenges, natural disasters, and long-term sustainability.

488 | P a g e
Compliance and Regulations:

a. Code Compliance: Ensure compliance with local building codes, healthcare

regulations, and educational standards.

Engaging with healthcare professionals, architects, and educators during the

design process is essential to create a facility that meets the diverse needs of a tertiary

hospital with a medical school and a mid-rise tower. Additionally, obtaining input from

future users can help address specific requirements for medical and educational

functionality.

489 | P a g e
 MANUAL ON TECHNICAL GUIDELINES FOR HOSPITAL PLANNING AND DESIGN
250-BED HOSPITAL (LEVEL 3)

ADMINISTRATIVE SERVICE FACILITIES

490 | P a g e
491 | P a g e
492 | P a g e
493 | P a g e
494 | P a g e
495 | P a g e
496 | P a g e
497 | P a g e
498 | P a g e
499 | P a g e
500 | P a g e
501 | P a g e
502 | P a g e
503 | P a g e
504 | P a g e
505 | P a g e
506 | P a g e
507 | P a g e
508 | P a g e
509 | P a g e
510 | P a g e
511 | P a g e
512 | P a g e
513 | P a g e
514 | P a g e
515 | P a g e
516 | P a g e
517 | P a g e
518 | P a g e
 EMERGENCY SERVICE FACILITIES

519 | P a g e
520 | P a g e
521 | P a g e
522 | P a g e
523 | P a g e
524 | P a g e
525 | P a g e
526 | P a g e
527 | P a g e
528 | P a g e
529 | P a g e
530 | P a g e
531 | P a g e
532 | P a g e
533 | P a g e
534 | P a g e
 OUTPATIENT SERVICE FACILITIES: OUTPATIENT CLINICS, AMBULATORY
SURGERY CLINIC, PHYSICAL REHABILITATION UNIT, DIALYSIS UNIT

535 | P a g e
536 | P a g e
537 | P a g e
538 | P a g e
539 | P a g e
540 | P a g e
541 | P a g e
542 | P a g e
543 | P a g e
544 | P a g e
545 | P a g e
546 | P a g e
547 | P a g e
548 | P a g e
549 | P a g e
550 | P a g e
551 | P a g e
552 | P a g e
553 | P a g e
554 | P a g e
555 | P a g e
556 | P a g e
557 | P a g e
558 | P a g e
559 | P a g e
560 | P a g e
561 | P a g e
562 | P a g e
563 | P a g e
564 | P a g e
565 | P a g e
566 | P a g e
 ANCILLARY SERVICE FACILITIES

567 | P a g e
568 | P a g e
569 | P a g e
570 | P a g e
571 | P a g e
572 | P a g e
573 | P a g e
574 | P a g e
575 | P a g e
576 | P a g e
577 | P a g e
578 | P a g e
579 | P a g e
580 | P a g e
581 | P a g e
582 | P a g e
583 | P a g e
584 | P a g e
585 | P a g e
586 | P a g e
587 | P a g e
588 | P a g e
589 | P a g e
590 | P a g e
591 | P a g e
592 | P a g e
593 | P a g e
594 | P a g e
595 | P a g e
596 | P a g e
597 | P a g e
598 | P a g e
599 | P a g e
600 | P a g e
601 | P a g e
602 | P a g e
603 | P a g e
604 | P a g e
605 | P a g e
606 | P a g e
 NURSING SERVICE FACILITIES

607 | P a g e
608 | P a g e
609 | P a g e
610 | P a g e
611 | P a g e
612 | P a g e
613 | P a g e
614 | P a g e
 BURN UNIT SERVICE FACILITIES

615 | P a g e
616 | P a g e
617 | P a g e
618 | P a g e
 OPERATING ROOM & ICU SERVICE FACILITIES

619 | P a g e
620 | P a g e
621 | P a g e
622 | P a g e
623 | P a g e
624 | P a g e
625 | P a g e
626 | P a g e
627 | P a g e
628 | P a g e
629 | P a g e
630 | P a g e
631 | P a g e
632 | P a g e
633 | P a g e
634 | P a g e
635 | P a g e
636 | P a g e
637 | P a g e
638 | P a g e
639 | P a g e
640 | P a g e
641 | P a g e
642 | P a g e
643 | P a g e
 DELIVERY ROOM & NICU SERVICE FACILITIES

644 | P a g e
645 | P a g e
646 | P a g e
647 | P a g e
648 | P a g e
649 | P a g e
650 | P a g e
651 | P a g e
652 | P a g e
653 | P a g e
654 | P a g e
655 | P a g e
656 | P a g e
657 | P a g e
658 | P a g e
659 | P a g e
660 | P a g e
661 | P a g e
662 | P a g e
663 | P a g e
664 | P a g e
665 | P a g e
 NUTRITION & DIETETICS SERVICE FACILITIES

666 | P a g e
667 | P a g e
668 | P a g e
669 | P a g e
670 | P a g e
671 | P a g e
672 | P a g e
673 | P a g e
674 | P a g e
675 | P a g e
676 | P a g e
677 | P a g e
678 | P a g e
679 | P a g e
680 | P a g e
 ENGINEERING, MAINTENANCE and HOUSEKEEPING SERVICE FACILITIES

681 | P a g e
682 | P a g e
683 | P a g e
684 | P a g e
685 | P a g e
686 | P a g e
687 | P a g e
688 | P a g e
689 | P a g e
690 | P a g e
691 | P a g e
692 | P a g e
693 | P a g e
694 | P a g e
695 | P a g e
 SUPPORT SERVICE FACILITIES

696 | P a g e
697 | P a g e
698 | P a g e
699 | P a g e
700 | P a g e
701 | P a g e
702 | P a g e
703 | P a g e
704 | P a g e
705 | P a g e
706 | P a g e
707 | P a g e
708 | P a g e
709 | P a g e
710 | P a g e
711 | P a g e
712 | P a g e
713 | P a g e
714 | P a g e
715 | P a g e
716 | P a g e
717 | P a g e
718 | P a g e
719 | P a g e
720 | P a g e
721 | P a g e
722 | P a g e
723 | P a g e
SITE CONSIDERATIONS

1. Topography and Geology: Understanding the natural landscape, soil conditions,

and geological features is crucial for planning construction and infrastructure

projects.

2. Accessibility and Transportation: Proximity to major roads, highways, and

transportation hubs can influence the ease of access for residents, businesses, and

visitors.

3. Utilities and Infrastructure: Availability of essential utilities such as water,

electricity, sewage, and telecommunication services is critical for development.

4. Zoning and Land Use Regulations: Compliance with local zoning laws and

regulations is essential to ensure that the proposed development aligns with the

designated land use and planning guidelines.

5. Environmental Impact: Assessing the potential environmental impact of a project

and implementing measures to minimize any negative effects on the ecosystem and

biodiversity.

6. Demographics: Understanding the local population, their needs, and

socioeconomic factors is crucial for businesses and community planning.

724 | P a g e
 7. Economic Factors: Evaluating the economic potential of the area, including market

demand, employment opportunities, and potential for economic growth.

8. Cultural and Historical Significance: Preservation of cultural heritage and

historical landmarks can be important considerations in site planning.

9. Risk Assessment: Identifying potential risks such as flooding, earthquakes, or

other natural disasters and implementing measures to mitigate these risks.

10. Community Engagement: Involving the local community in the planning process to

address concerns, gain support, and ensure that the development aligns with the

community's needs and values.

11. Government Policies and Incentives: Understanding and leveraging government

policies, incentives, and support programs that may impact the development

project.

12. Amenities and Services: Proximity to educational institutions, healthcare facilities,

recreational areas, and other amenities can enhance the attractiveness of a

location.

725 | P a g e
SITE POTENTIALS

1. Economic Opportunities: The presence of economic activities, industries, and job

opportunities can contribute to the potential of an area. This includes assessing the

business environment, potential for industrial development, and job market.

2. Tourism Potential: If Indang, Cavite, has historical or natural attractions, it may

have tourism potential. This could include heritage sites, scenic landscapes, or

cultural events that attract visitors.

3. Educational Institutions: The presence of educational institutions, schools, and

universities can contribute to the potential of an area, attracting students and

promoting a knowledge-based economy.

4. Infrastructure Development: The availability of well-developed infrastructure, such

as roads, transportation networks, and utilities, can enhance the potential of an area

for various types of development.

5. Investment Climate: A favorable business and investment climate, including

supportive government policies and incentives, can attract investors and contribute

to the economic potential of the area.

726 | P a g e
 6. Quality of Life: Factors such as a good standard of living, healthcare facilities,

recreational opportunities, and overall quality of life can enhance the appeal of an

area.

7. Strategic Location: Proximity to major cities, ports, airports, or economic zones

can enhance the strategic importance and potential of an area.

8. Community Engagement: A supportive and engaged local community can

contribute to the overall potential of an area, fostering a sense of community and

cooperation.

SITE LIMITATIONS

1. Topography and Geotechnical Considerations: Steep slopes, rocky terrain, or

poor soil quality can pose challenges for construction and development.

2. Flood Risk: Areas prone to flooding or with poor drainage might have limitations for

certain types of development.

3. Environmental Constraints: The presence of protected ecosystems, endangered

species, or other environmental considerations may restrict certain types of

development.

727 | P a g e
 4. Zoning Restrictions: Local zoning regulations and land-use policies may limit the

types of structures or businesses allowed in specific areas.

5. Infrastructure Limitations: Inadequate infrastructure, such as limited road access,

insufficient utilities, or lack of public services, can restrict development.

6. Cultural and Historical Preservation: The presence of culturally or historically

significant sites may impose limitations on certain types of development to preserve

heritage.

7. Government Restrictions: National or local regulations, permits, and compliance

requirements can limit certain activities or development.

8. Community Opposition: Strong opposition from the local community or concerns

related to social impact can be a limitation.

9. Natural Hazard Risks: Proximity to fault lines, earthquake-prone areas, or

susceptibility to other natural hazards may limit certain types of development.

10. Traffic and Transportation Issues: Limited access to major transportation routes

or high traffic congestion can be a limitation for certain projects.

11. Land Ownership and Parcel Size: Fragmented land ownership or small parcel

sizes may limit the feasibility of large-scale developments.

728 | P a g e
 12. Water Availability: Scarcity of water resources or limitations on water use may

impact certain types of industries or developments.

13. Power Supply: Inadequate or unreliable power supply can limit the viability of

certain businesses or industries.

14. Land Use Conflicts: Conflicts between different land uses or incompatible

neighboring activities can pose limitations.

15. Economic Factors: Economic challenges or downturns in specific industries may

affect the potential for growth and development.

SITE ANALYSIS

LOCATION: San Gregorio Street, Indang, Cavite

729 | P a g e
THE SITE IS:
 Adjacent to the road
 Near the terminal

Mendez, Tagaytay to Indang : 33 mins drive (17.9 kilometers)

Alfonso to Indang: 23 mins drive (12.2 kilometers)

Amadeo to Indang: 17 mins drive (8.3 kilometers)

Trece Martires City to Indang: 20 mins drive (11.9 kilometers)

General Trias to Indang: 49 mins drive (27.2 kilometers)

Dasmarinas to Indang: 42 mins drive (21.9 kilometers)

Ternate to Indang: 54 mins drive (33.0 kilometers)

Indang is a municipality located in the province of Cavite in the Philippines. The

town is situated in the Calabarzon region, and it is surrounded by other municipalities and

cities. Here are some towns near Indang, Cavite:

1. Mendez / Tagaytay City: Known for its cool climate and scenic views, Tagaytay is

a popular tourist destination and is located northwest of Indang.

2. Alfonso: Situated west of Indang, Alfonso is known for its agricultural areas and

natural attractions.

3. Amadeo: Located to the northeast of Indang, Amadeo is recognized for its coffee

farms and is often referred to as the "Coffee Capital of the Philippines."

4. Trece Martires City: The provincial capital of Cavite, Trece Martires City, is

situated northeast of Indang.

730 | P a g e
 5. Naic: Found to the southeast of Indang, Naic is known for its historical significance

and natural landscapes.

6. General Trias: Located to the north of Indang, General Trias is an industrial city

with growing commercial and residential developments.

7. Dasmarinas: Positioned to the north-northeast, Dasmarinas is one of the largest

and most populous cities in Cavite, known for its economic activities and

educational institutions.

8. Ternate: Situated to the south, Ternate is known for its beaches and historical sites.

These towns and cities in proximity to Indang collectively contribute to the overall

characteristics and development of the region. The area is known for its mix of rural and

urban landscapes, as well as its proximity to tourist destinations such as Tagaytay. Keep in

mind that developments and conditions in these areas may have changed since my last

update in January 2022, so it's advisable to check with local sources for the latest

information.

SITE CURRENT CONDITION:

731 | P a g e
 REFERENCES

 PD.pdf (dpwh.gov.ph)

 Abe, K., & Tuppal, C. P. (2018). Patient safety goals’ level of attainment in selected

tertiary hospitals in Manila, Philippines: a preliminary study. Nurse Media Journal of

Nursing, 8(1), 1. https://doi.org/10.14710/nmjn.v8i1.18536

 History of hospital. (2017, September 16). [Slide show]. PPT.

https://www.slideshare.net/zulfiquer732/history-of-hospital

 History of hospitals. (n.d.).

732 | P a g e
 o https://www.nursing.upenn.edu/nhhc/nurses-institutions-caring/history-of-

hospitals/

 Cilliers, L., & Retief, F. (2002). The evolution of the hospital from antiquity to the end

of the middle ages. Curationis, 25(4). https://doi.org/10.4102/curationis.v25i4.806

 Javier, R. S. (2015, July 28). Assessment of performance among tertiary hospitals

in the Philippines. Javier | Philippine Journal of Health Research and Development.

https://pjhrd.upm.edu.ph/index.php/main/article/view/24

 Kapgarg. (n.d.). Introduction to hospitals. Scribd.

https://www.scribd.com/presentation/66087095/Introduction-to-Hospitals

 Hospital | Definition, History, Types, services, & Facts. (2024, January 18).

Encyclopedia Britannica. https://www.britannica.com/science/hospital/The-modern-

hospital

 Everything about hospital: hospital departments and the services they provide |

Free essay example. (2022, March 31). StudyCorgi.

https://studycorgi.com/everything-about-hospital/

 Logan, C., & Willis, J. (2010). International travel as Medical Research: Architecture

and the Modern Hospital. Health and History, 12(2), 116.

https://doi.org/10.5401/healthhist.12.2.0116

733 | P a g e
  Hussein, M., Pavlova, M., Ghalwash, M., & Groot, W. (2021). The impact of hospital

accreditation on the quality of healthcare: a systematic literature review. BMC

Health Services Research, 21(1). https://doi.org/10.1186/s12913-021-07097-6

 Pilosof, N. P. (2020). Building for Change: Comparative Case Study of Hospital

architecture. HERD: Health Environments Research & Design Journal, 14(1), 47–

60. https://doi.org/10.1177/1937586720927026

 Flores, L. (2021, December 14). Hospitals in the Philippines: Where they are, and

where they aren’t. Medium. https://medium.com/@lorenzoflores/hospitals-in-the-

philippines-where-they-are-and-where-they-arent-54eae00d63e

 Johnstone, J. (2021, January 31). Hospital school - Philippines - Teacher in a box.

Teacher In A Box. https://teacherinabox.org.au/hospital-school-philippines/

 What is a Teaching Hospital | CS Mott Children’s Hospital | Michigan Medicine.

(n.d.). Www.mottchildren.org. https://www.mottchildren.org/about-us/teaching-

hospital

 Bennett, V. B. (n.d.). Architectural design- medical college campus and hospital.

Scribd. https://www.scribd.com/document/490109958/Architectural-Design-Medical-
College-Campus-and-Hospital

 BP 344 IMPLEMENTING RULES AND REGULATIONS (IRR)

AMENDMENTS

 https://www.officialgazette.gov.ph/2008/12/19/republic-act-no-9514/

 Time Saver standards-building-types.pdf

 Manual on Technical Guidelines for Hospitals and Health Facilities

734 | P a g e
  Planning and Design 100-Bed Hospital. Department of Health, Manila. 1994

 Signage Systems Manual for Hospitals and Offices. Department of Health, Manila.
1994.

 Healthcare Waste Management Manual 3rd Edition. Department of Health, Manila.

2011.

 The Fire Code of the Philippines and its Implementing Rules and Regulations RA
9514. Bureau of Fire Protection, Manila. 2009.

 National Building Code of the Philippines and its Implementing Rules and
Regulations PD 1096. Department of Public Works and Highways. 2005.

 The Law to Enhance Mobility of Disabled Persons BP 344. 1983.

 DOH Administrative Order 2010-0036 : Universal Health Care for All Filipinos
“Kalusugang Pangkalahatan”

 DOH Administrative Order No. 2012-0012 : Rules and Regulations Governing the
New Classification of Hospitals and Other Health Facilities in the Philippines

 PhilHealth Bench book for Quality Assurance in Healthcare. 2006

 Safe Hospitals in Emergencies and Disasters, Philippine Indicators.

 Department of Health, Manila. 2011

 Time-Saver Standards for Building Types – De Chiara, Joseph

 CHED-Policies, Standards and Guidelines for the following Programs: Doctor of

Medicine, Nursing, Dentistry and Physical Therapy

735 | P a g e